Intermediate

Language Practice
with key

with Paul Emmerson

English Grammar and

Vocabulary
Intermediate
Language Practice
with key

Michael Vince
with Paul Emmerson

English Grammar and

Vocabulary
*

MACMILLAN
Macmillan Education
Between Towns Road, Oxford 0X 4 3PP
A division of Macmillan Publishers Limited
Companies and representatives throughout the world
ISBN 10: 1-4050-0768-0
ISBN 13: 978-1-4050-0768-9
Text © Michael Vince 2003
Design and illustration © Macmillan Publishers Limited 2003
First published 1998
This edition published 2003
All rights reserved; no part of this publication may be
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission
of the publishers.
Design by Mike Brain Graphic Design Limited
Layout and composition by Mike Brain Graphic Design Limited
Cover design by Oliver Design
Illustrations by:
Ed McLachlan pp 57, 85, 174, 198; Janek Matysiak pp 224, 259;
Julian Mosedale pp 18, 33, 105, 119, 178; Martin Shovel pp 22, 49,
54, 65, 132, 155, 164, 188, 193, 217, 226, 229, 238, 241, 262, 271.

Photographs by:
Eyewire, Photodisc and Oliver Design.

The author would like to thank the many schools and teachers who
have commented on these materials. Also special thanks to
Paul Emmerson and Sarah Curtis.

Printed and bound in the UK

by Scotprint, Haddington
2007 2006
10 9 8 7 6
 Contents

Grammar 1 Introduction 1
Understanding grammar words - Thinking about language in context -
Other ways of learning - Which English?

Grammar 2 Present time 1 3

Present simple: form, meaning, pronunciation - Present continuous: form,
meaning

Grammar 3 Present time 2 7

Present simple: frequency adverbs - State verbs and action verbs - Present
simple or continuous? - Present continuous: future meanings - Other
problems

Grammar 4 Past time 1 11

Past simple: form, meaning - Past continuous: form, meaning - Time
expressions

Grammar 5 Past time 2 15

Past perfect: form, meaning - Common uses - used to - would - Past
perfect and past simple - Past forms used in conditionals

Grammar 6 Present perfect 1 20

Present perfect: form, meaning - Time expressions

Grammar 7 Present perfect 2 24

Present perfect continuous: form, meaning - Time expressions -
Present perfect or present perfect continuous? - Other problems

Grammar 8 Future 1 29
Future time - will - be going to - Present continuous - Problems

Grammar 9 Future 2 34
Future continuous - Future perfect - Present simple - Functions using
will and shall

Grammar 10 CONSOLIDATION 1 38

Grammar 11 Reported speech 1 42

Reported speech - Tense changes - No tense changes - Speakers in
reported speech - People, places, times - Summarizing - say, tell, speak

G ram m ar 12 Reported speech 2 46

Reporting questions - Reporting commands and requests - Other reporting
verbs

iii
 INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Grammar 13 Conditionals 1 50
Conditions and results - Zero conditional: I f + present simple, ... present
simple - First conditional: I f + present simple, ... will/won't - Second
conditional: I f + past simple, ... would/wouldn't - unless - Other uses of would

Grammar 14 Conditionals 2 55

Third conditional: I f + past perfect, ... would/wouldn't + have + past

participle - Modal verbs in conditional sentences - Conditionals without
i f - I f I were you, I ...

Grammar 15 Wishes 58
Wishes about the present - Wishes about the past - hope - I f only

Grammar 16 Passive 1 61
Passive: form, use - Using by and with - Sentences without an agent -
Transitive and intransitive verbs

Grammar 17 Passive 2 66
Verbs with two objects - to be born - have something done - Passive
infinitive

Grammar 18 Modals 1: present and future 69

Modal verbs: form and meaning - Ability - Certainty and uncertainty -
Obligation - Opinions and advice

Grammar 19 Modals 2: past 75

Ability - Certainty and uncertainty - Obligation - Opinions and advice

CONSOLIDATION 2 78

Grammar 21 Purpose 83
Purpose: to and for - Purpose: so that

Grammar 22 Reason and result 86

Reason and result - 50 and such for emphasis - too and not enough for a
difficulty - 50 and too - Result phrases: as a result, in the end, eventually -
Linking words

Grammar 23 Contrast 91
but, yet and although - even though and though - while and whereas -
despite and in spite o f - however and on the other hand - Linking words

Grammar 24 Functions 94

What is a function? - Asking for information - Offers - Permission -

Promising - Requests - Requests with mind - Suggesting and advising

Grammar 25 Relative clauses 1 99

Relative clauses - Relative pronouns - Leaving out the relative pronouns

Grammar 26 Relative clauses 2 203

Combining sentences - Relative clauses with an -ing form - W hat as
a relative pronoun

iv
 CONTENTS

Grammar 27 Questions 1 106

Yes/No questions - Wh- questions - Question words as the subject -
Negative questions - Short answers

Grammar 28 Questions 2 109

Tag questions: form, use - Problems with tags - Reply questions - Indirect
questions

Grammar 29 it and there 114

Introducing new information - Referring back - Referring to a place -
it's and its - they're and there

Grammar 30 Place and position 116

in, inside, out, outside - Expressions with in - on - Expressions with on -
at, in or to - Expressions with at - above/below, over/under - next to/beside,
near/by - opposite

CONSOLIDATION 3 120

Grammar 32 Time expressions 125

in, on and at - Relation to today - Parts of yesterday, today and
tomorrow - Calendar references - for, since and ago - during or for? -
by or until? - on time or in time? - once and one day, - now and nowadays -
then, afterwards, after and later - at the end, in the end and at last

Grammar 33 C ountable and uncountable nouns 129

Countable and uncountable - Countable and uncountable: grammar -
some or any? - many and much - Change of meaning - Other problems

Grammar 34 Articles 1 133

Indefinite article: a/an - Zero article (no article)

Grammar 35 Articles 2 136

Definite article: the

Grammar 36 D eterm iners and pronouns 141

all, some - no, none - each, every - both, either, neither

Grammar 37 Adjectives and adverbs 146

Adjectives - Order of adjectives - Gradable adjectives - Adjectives
ending -ing and -ed - Adjectives with be, become, feel, look - one -
Adverbs - Adverbs of degree (intensifiers)

Grammar 38 Making com parisons 151

Comparatives and superlatives: meaning, form - Irregular forms -
Adverbs - Making comparisons - Intensifiers

Grammar 39 Phrasal verbs 1 156

Understanding phrasal verbs - Verbs with three parts - Verbs with
two parts: transitive and inseparable

v
 INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Grammar 40 Phrasal verbs 2 161

Verbs with two parts: transitive and separable - Verbs with two parts:
intransitive

CONSOLIDATION 4 165

Grammar 42 Verbs follow ed by -ing or infinitive 1 170

Verbs followed by -ing or infinitive: little or no change of meaning - Verbs
followed by to + infinitive - Verbs followed by to + infinitive, or tfzaf-clause

Grammar 43 Verbs follow ed by -ing or infinitive 2 175

Verbs followed by -ing or infinitive: change of meaning - Verbs followed
by -ing or infinitive without to: change of meaning - Verbs followed
by -ing or noun - Verbs followed by -ing, or noun, or that-clause

Grammar 44 Verbs follow ed by prepositions 179

Verbs + preposition - be + adjective + preposition

Grammar 45 Pronouns 184

Indefinite pronouns - someone, anyone etc. - everyone, no one etc. -
Reflexive pronouns: m yself etc. - Impersonal one

Grammar 46 Possession 189

'5 (apostrophes) - o f and compound nouns - Possessive adjectives -
Possessive pronouns - Double possessive

Grammar 47 Linking words 194

and, both, too, as well, also - for example, such as - first (o f all), secondly
etc., finally —as well as this, besides this —in fact, actually —in my view,
personally - either, or - instead (of) - except - even - Time words with other
meanings

Grammar 48 Capital letters and punctuation 199

Capital letters - Full stop (.) - Comma (,) - Semi colon (;) - Colon (:) -
Speech marks (") ("") - Question mark (?) and exclamation mark (!)

Grammar 49 Spelling and pronunciation 1 203

Adding -ing to verbs - Words ending in -ful - -ie or -ei? - Silent letters

Grammar 50 Spelling and pronunciation 2 206

Same sound, different spelling - Same pronunciation, different spelling
and meaning - Words which look similar - Words with a syllable which is
not pronounced —Nouns and verbs with c and s —How to improve spelling

Grammar 51 CONSOLIDATION 5 209

vi
 CONTENTS

Vocabulary 1 Dealing with vocabulary 213

When you find a new word - Making the most of your dictionary -
Keeping a vocabulary notebook
Vocabulary 2 Word formation 1 215
Vocabulary 3 Word formation 2 218
Vocabulary 4 Collocations and fixed expressions 1 221
Vocabulary 5 Collocations and fixed expressions 2 224
Vocabulary 6 Compound words 227
Vocabulary 7 Money and shopping 230
Vocabulary 8 Living space 233
Vocabulary 9 Personal matters 236
Vocabulary 10 Family and friends 239
Vocabulary 11 The body and clothes 242
Vocabulary 12 Everyday problems 245
Vocabulary 13 Travel and holidays 248
Vocabulary 14 Interests and free time 251
Vocabulary 15 Places 254
Vocabulary 16 Food and drink 257
Vocabulary 17 Work and study 260
Vocabulary 18 The natural environment 263
Vocabulary 19 Tools and technology 266
Vocabulary 20 Everyday objects 269
Vocabulary 21 People 272

Formation rules 275

Irregular verbs 277

Grammar index 279

Grammar answers 281

Vocabulary answers 293

vii
GRAMMAR

i Introduction

U n d e r s t a n d in g g r a m m a r w o r d s
Match the examples (a-n) with the grammar words (1-14).
a) a/an, the
b) at, to, fo r............
c) do, have............
d) can, m ust............
e) If you do that, I 'll............
f) she, someone, myself............
g) all, some, both, either............
h) past simple, present perfect............
i) What's your name? Where do you live?............
j) happy, important, good............
k) slowly, carefully, w ell............
1) get up in the morning, look up a word............
m) The letter that arrived this morning is for you...............
n) It is made of wood. The book was written in 2001............

1 verb tenses 8 conditional sentence

2 auxiliary verbs 9 passive voice
3 modal auxiliaries 10 pronouns
4 prepositions 11 phrasal verbs
5 questions 12 articles
6 adjectives 13 determiners
7 adverbs 14 relative clause

Match the tenses in italics (a-h) with their names (1-8).

a) Helen is leaving first thing in the morning....... 2-....
b) I've been studying English for two years...............
c) If I had a helicopter, I'd get to school more easily!............
d) I get up at 7.30 every day...............
e) Next year I'll be taking my final exams at university...............
f) By the time we got to the station, the train had left...............
g) I've lived in Athens all my life...............
h) While I was walking along the street a dog ran in front of a car.

1 present simple 5 past simple

2 present continuous 6 past continuous
3 present perfect 7 past perfect
4 present perfect continuous 8 future continuous
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Thinking about language in context

3 For each situation (a-d) underline the best expression. The other alternatives may
be w rong in grammar, or too informal/impolite for the situation, or too
formal/polite for the situation.

a) It's your birthday on Saturday. Invite a friend to your party.

1 I'll have a party on Saturday. You will come.
2 I'm having a party on Saturday. Do you want to come?
3 I have a party on Saturday. Are you coming?
b) You are on the bus. Ask a stranger to open the window.
1 Could you open the window, please?
2 Open the window.
3 Excuse me, but do you think you could possibly open the window?
c) You arrive late for class and apologize to your teacher.
1 I'm late, I apologize.
2 Sorry I'm late.
3 Please accept my most sincere apologies.
d) You are a witness to a minor accident. Explain what you saw to a policeman.
1 This car comes down the road and hits a tree, bang!
2 A car had come down the road and had hit a tree.
3 A car came down the road and hit a tree.

Other ways of learning

4 Which ways of learning English do you use? What could you start doing now?
a) Reading for pleasure.
b) Translating.
c) Making lists of words, or problem points, in a notebook.
d) Using a dictionary.
e) Listening to songs.
f) Keeping a diary.
g) Reviewing your written work.
h) Looking at English-language internet sites.
i) Watching television, watching films or listening to the radio,
j) Using a self-study grammar/vocabulary book.

Which English?
English is a world language, and the English spoken in the USA or Australia
differs from the English spoken in Britain. There are also differences between
speakers from Scotland, Ireland and England, and between different parts of the
same country. This book uses what is generally called Standard British English.
References are also made to some differences in American English.

2
 GRAMMAR

2 Present time 1

Explanations
Present simple: ■ The present simple is formed with the bare infinitive form of the verb. We
form add s in the third person singular he/she/it.
I like You like He/She/It likes We like They like
Some verbs are irregular: have, be
I have You have He/She has We have They have
I am You are He/She is We are They are

■ Spelling problems
Verbs ending in o, s, ch, sh, x add -es for the third person singular.
He goes She misses She watches He wishes He relaxes

■ Questions
Yes/No questions are formed with do and the bare infinitive form of the verb.
The third person singular uses does.
Do you like Italian food? Does she like Italian food?
We also use do/does when we form questions with when, what, why, where,
how etc.
What do you want? Where does she live?

■ Negatives
Negatives are formed with do not and the bare infinitive form of the verb.
The third person singular uses does not.
I do not like that. She does not like that.
In speech and informal writing, do not becomes don't, and does not becomes
doesn't.
I don't like that. She doesn't like that.

Present simple: ■ We use the present simple to describe:

meaning Habitual actions.
I usually get up at 7.30.
Actions and situations that are generally or usually true
Liz plays in the school basketball team.
We like ice-cream.
Facts which are always true.
The sun rises in the east.

■ The present simple also has some future meanings.

3
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Present simple: Verbs which end in /z/, /dz/, Is/, /sh/, /tsh/ and /ks/ make an extra syllable in the
pronunciation third person, pronounced /iz/.
watches misses relaxes
After /f/, /k/, /p/, /t/, third person sound is /s/. hits /hits/
Other third person /s/ are pronounced as /z/. 5ees /si:z/
Does is normally pronounced /d\z/

Present ■ The present continuous is formed with the auxiliary verb be and the -ing
continuous: form form of the main verb.
I am relaxing. You are relaxing. He/She is relaxing.
We are relaxing. They are relaxing

u Spelling problems
Verbs ending -e drop the -e when they add -ing.
like liking decide deciding write writing
Verbs with one syllable, ending in one vowel and one consonant, double the
consonant when they add -ing.
sit sitting swim swimming dig digging
Verbs ending -ie change -ie to -y.
lie lying tie tying die dying

m Contractions
In speech and informal writing, the verb be is contracted:
I'm writing. You're writing. He's/She's writing.
We're writing. They're writing.

■ Questions
Yes/No questions are formed by inverting the subject and the auxiliary be.
Am I writing? Are you writing? Is he/she writing?
Are we writing? Are they writing?
Wh- questions follow the same pattern.
What are you writing? Why are we writing?

m Negatives
Negatives are formed with the verb be + not. This is contracted in speech and
informal writing.
I'm not writing. He's not writing. They're not writing.

Present ■ We use the present continuous to describe:

continuous: Actions in progress at the present moment.
meaning Sorry, I can't speak to you, I'm washing my hair.
Actions happening 'around now', even though not at the moment of
speaking.
I'm reading The Lord o f the Rings.

The present continuous also has some SEE ALSO

future meanings.
Gram m ar 3: Present time 2
Gram m ar 8: Future 1
Gram m ar 9: Future 2
4
 GRAMMAR 2 PRESENT TIME 1

Practice

Underline the correct phrase in each sentence.

a) What time go vou/do you go to bed on Saturdays?

b) Why are you waiting/do you waiting outside the door?
c) Don't ask Tim. He doesn't know/not knows the answer.
d) I having/I’m having my lunch at the moment.
e) When you leave/do you leave the house in the morning?
f) I don't understand. What is happening/is happen?
g) Excuse me, does you know/do you know the time?
h) This is a great party. I ’m having/Am I having a lovely time.

2 Read the answers and then complete the questions.

a) Where ...................................................................................
Sue? She lives at the end of Axwell Road.
b) Do ...............................................................................................................................
Jim? No, I don't know him.
c) W h a t..........................................................................................................................
At the moment? I'm doing my homework.
d) Are .............................................................................................................................
Here? No, I'm sitting over there.
e) Do ..............................................................................................................................
Here? No, we change trains at the next station.
f) W h y ...........................................................................................................................
I'm wearing two pullovers because I feel cold!

3 Rewrite each sentence so that the verb in italics is a negative contraction.

a) Naomi and Bill are watching television.

A leiomi and'&ill
b) Peter likes chocolate cake.

c) I'm using this pencil at the moment.

d) The children are having lunch in the kitchen.

e) I get up early on Saturday.

f) Elena is writing a novel.

5
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Complete each sentence with a present simple or present continuous form, using
the words in bold.

a) Do you Like
you like
b) What tim e ........................................................................ ?
the sun rise
c) W h a t..................................................................................
you read
d) Sorry, I can't talk.............................................................
I have
e) W e .......................................................................................
not watch videos
f) Look out of the window !............................................
it snow
g) This is an examination! W h y ..................................... ?
you talk
h) A n n ..................................................................................... . to school by bus every day.
go
i) ............................................................................................... ...a uniform at your school?
you wear
j) Pat has got an interesting hobby...............................
she build

Choose the correct spelling from each pair of words.

a) (jvritlngywritting
b) diging/digging
c) takeing/taking
d) deciding/decideing
e) swiming/swimming
f) having/haveing
g) lying/lieing
h) readding/reading
i) using/useing
j) waiting/waitting
k) washeing/washing
1) riding/rideing
m) flyeing/flying
n) studing/studying
o) going/goeing

6
 GRAMMAR

3 Present time 2

Explanations
Present simple: ■ Frequency adverbs are often used with the present simple. They explain how
frequency adverbs often someone does an action, or something happens.
always / / / / / I always get up at 7.00.
often / / / / Pat often goes to football matches,
usually / / / It usually rains when I go on holiday!
sometimes / / We sometimes eat pizza for lunch,
rarely / lane rarely listens to jazz,
never - My bus never arrives on time.

■ Note in the above examples that the frequency adverb comes before the
verb. With the verb be the adverb comes after.
Jim is usually late.

m Other frequency adverbs are: frequently ( / / / / ) , normally ( / / / ) , occasionally

( / / ) , seldom ( / ) , hardly ever (✓).

State verbs and ■ A state is when something stays the same. An action is when something
action verbs happens. State verbs are not usually used in any continuous form.
I know what you mean. (NOT I am knowing-wfort you're meaning.)

Examples of state verbs are:

■ senses: appear, hear, look like, see, taste
■ feeling: like, hate, love, prefer, want, wish
m thinking: agree, believe, forget, know, think, understand
■ possession: belong to, contain, have, own
■ being: be, exist
■ other: cost, depend on, mean, need

■ Some of the verbs in the previous list can have a 'state' meaning and an
'action' meaning. Examples include be, have, taste, think.
I have two sisters. (permanent state)
I'm having problems with this computer. (temporary action)

■ Sometimes state verbs can describe temporary feelings.

How are you getting on at your new school?
I hate/I'm hating it!

7
 INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Present simple or Compare:

continuous? Present simple Present continuous
permanent temporary
habits and routines in progress now
facts that are always true events happening at the moment
general situations a particular situation

/ live in Budapest. (all the time)

I'm living in Budapest. (for a few months)
This plane lands in Frankfurt. (routine)
We're landing. (in progress now)

Present ■ The present continuous can be used to describe a fixed future arrangement.
continuous: future There is usually a future time expression.
meanings Paul is leaving early tomorrow morning.
My parents are buying me a mountain bike for my birthday.
This usage is common when we describe social arrangements.
Are you doing anything on Saturday? We're going skating.

Other problems m feel

There is almost no difference of meaning between the simple and
continuous.
/ feel awful! I'm feeling awful!
How do you feel now? How are you feeling now?

■ Present continuous or present perfect continuous?

Sue is staying with Jill.
(in progress now, and will continue)
Sue has been staying with fill since March.
(in progress up to now, and may or may not continue)

■ Present continuous with always

We can use always with the present continuous when we are exaggerating or
complaining. We emphasize always in speech in this case.
You're always forgetting your keys!

■ Present simple in narratives

In speech we can use the present simple to make a story or joke appear more
immediate and interesting, even though the events were in the past. This is
also used in written summaries such as plots of television series.
A man walks into a bar and asks for a glass o f water. The barman says ...
The story so far: Michael meets Susan in the library and tells her about the
missing earrings ...

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 4: Past time 1

Gram m ar 5: Past time 2
Gram m ar 6: Present perfect
Gram m ar 8: Future 1
8
 GRAMMAR 3 PRESENT TIME 2

Practice

Underline the correct sentence for each situation.

a) You want to invite a friend to your party on Friday. You say:

1 I have a party on Friday. Do you want to come?
2 I'm having a party on Friday. Do you want to come?
b) You find a wallet on your desk and ask the people nearby:
1 Who does this wallet belong to?
2 Who is this wallet belonging to?
c) A friend invites you to a snack bar at lunch time. You say:
1 Thanks, but I always go home.
2 Thanks, but I'm always going home.
d) A friend opens the door and says: What are you doing? You reply:
1 I work as a secretary.
2 I'm repairing the computer.
e) You haven't decided yet about buying a new bike. You say:
1 I think about it.
2 I'm thinking about it.
f) A friend asks: Do you like lemon tea? You reply:
1 I prefer tea with milk.
2 I'm preferring tea with milk.
g) A friend asks you if you have finished the book she lent you. You say:
1 Sorry, I still read it.
2 Sorry, I'm still reading it.
h) It's a hot day, but a friend has a heavy coat on. You ask:
1 Why do you wear a heavy coat?
2 Why are you wearing a heavy coat?

2 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) That can't be right! I don't believe/I'm not believing it!

b) Caroline can't swim today. She has/is having a cold.
c) See you in the morning. I leave/I'm leaving now.
d) What do you do/are yon doing? If you drop it, it will explode!
e) Stop doing that, Bill! You're/You're being very silly.
f) I drive/I'm drivingl You can sit in the back with Martin.
g) W hat do we eat/are we eating this evening? I'm really hungry!
h) You're a great cook! This cake tastes/is tasting wonderful.
i) Where do you go/are you going? I haven't finished speaking to you!
j) Chemistry is hard. I don't understand/I'm not understanding it.

9
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Put each verb in brackets into the present simple or present continuous.

a) Ugh, don't show me that picture! I (h a te )...... h . ...............................mice!

b) Who (you, g o ) ................................................ to the match on Saturday with?
c) In the winter, what (you, w ear)................................................?
d) I can't stand horror films. I (think) ................................................they're silly!
e) Diana (not, usually, s it ) ................................................ next to Ellen.
f) Why (you, look a t ) ................................................ me like that?
g) Excuse me. (this bus, sto p )................................................ outside the station?
h) I (not ta k e )................................................ the bus to school today.

4 Match each sentence (a-h) with a suitable response (1-8).

a) What do you usually do on your birthday?.....1.....

b) Would you like to meet again on Saturday?............
c) What do you usually do when there is an earthquake?............
d) Have you finished your hom ew ork?............
e) What are you d o in g ?............
f) What are you doing on Friday?............
g) Are you in the school basketball te a m ?............
h) What do you d o ? ............

1 I have a party.
2 I lie under the table.
3 I work in a travel agency.
4 Yes, we play every Friday.
5 I'm still doing it.
6 It's hot in here. I'm opening some windows.
7 I'm going back to Canada tomorrow.
8 I'm having a party.

5 Put each verb in brackets into the present simple or present continuous.

a) What (usually, you, do) at the weekend?

b) Don't worry about the cat. It (only e a t) ..........................................once a day.
c) I can't work out the answer, (you, k n o w )..........................................what it is?
d) What's the matter? Why (you, stare).......................................... at me like that?
e) (you, speak).......................................... English? I'm looking for a hotel.
f) Elena (stay ).......................................... with me while her house is being
decorated.
g) You should go on a diet, (you, put) .......................................... on weight.
h) (they, speak).......................................... French or German? I can't tell the
difference.

10
 GRAMMAR

4 Past time 1

Explanations
Past simple: form ■ Regular verbs
Past simple regular verbs add -ed to the bare infinitive. Verbs ending in -e
simply add -d.
I enjoyed the film. I loved the music.
All persons have the same form.

■ Spelling problems
Verbs ending in consonant + -y change -y to -ie.
try tried cry cried
Verbs ending with one vowel and one consonant double the final consonant.
regret regretted fit fitted

■ Irregular verbs
The most common irregular verbs are listed on page 277. It is necessary to
learn these forms.
eat ate drink drank wake woke

■ Questions
Questions are formed with did and the bare infinitive.
Did you enjoy the film? Did you drink all the milk?
W hat did you do yesterday? Why did she leave?

■ Negatives
Negatives are formed with did not and the bare infinitive. This is contracted
to didn't in speech and informal writing.
The coat didn't fit me. Carol didn't eat very much.

Past simple: ■ The past simple is used to describe actions and states in a completed period
meaning of time. We know when the action happened, so a definite time expression
can be used.
I enjoyed the film we saw last night.
We listened to some new CDs yesterday afternoon.

■ The past simple is also used to describe habitual actions in the past.
Every day we got up early and went to the beach.

11
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Past continuous: The past continuous is formed with the past of the auxiliary verb be and the
form -ing form of the main verb.
I was sitting by the door. You were laughing. He/She was driving.
We were crying. They were eating.

Questions
Yes/No questions are formed by inverting the subject and the auxiliary verb

Was I sleeping? Were you waiting? Was he/she driving?

Were we writing? Were they leaving?
Wh- questions follow the same pattern.
What were you writing? Why were they waiting?

Negatives
Negatives are formed with the verb auxiliary verb be + not. This is contracted
in speech and informal writing.
I wasn't listening. He wasn't playing. They weren't looking.

Past continuous: The past continuous is used to describe a situation in progress in the past.
meaning This is often contrasted with a sudden event in the past simple.
Background situation Sudden event
I was having my lunch when Ruth phoned.
W hile I was waiting for the bus, I met Karen.

The past continuous can be used to describe several situations in progress,

happening at the same time.
While James was cooking, David was phoning a friend.
The airport was full o f people. Some were sleeping on benches, some were
shopping, others were reading. Everyone was waiting for news o f the delayed
plane.

Time expressions With the past simple

I arrived here two hours ago/in September/last week/at 6.00.
Helen lived in Madrid for three years.

With the past continuous

We can use when or while with the past continuous to mean 'during the time
that'.
While we were waiting for the train, it started to rain.
I cut my finger when I was peeling the potatoes.
But if we mean 'at the time that' then we only use when with the past
simple.
She was very happy when she got her exam results.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 7: Present perfec

Gram m ar 32: Time express

12
 GRAMMAR 4 PAST TIME 1

Practice
Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) While I washed/was washing my hair, the phone rang/rimed.

b) How did you felt/did you feel yesterday afternoon?
c) When I got/was getting home I received/was receiving a phone call.
d) Last summer I was going swimming/went swimming every weekend.
e) When the dog bit/was biting Laura's leg, she screamed/was screaming.
f) We sang/sung some songs and then ate/eat some sandwiches.
g) When you fell/felt over the cliff, what happened/was happening next?
h) While Mary washed-up/was washing-up, she broke/was breaking a cup.
i) I didn't see/saw where the bus stop was, so I was missing/missed the bus.
j) What did you do/were you doing when I phoned/was phoning you last night?
There was no reply.

2 Rewrite each sentence according to the instructions given.

a) I enjoyed the concert, (negative) .X..dxdyut.&Yty.Q')/..,tk&..('.QyW'.&'Ct.-........

b) You ate all the bread, (question) ..........................................................................
c) Did John spend a lot? (affirmative) ..........................................................................
d) I felt well yesterday, (negative) ..........................................................................
e) Anna didn't buy a car. (affirmative) ..........................................................................
f) They won the prize, (question) ..........................................................................
g) Paul doesn't speak Greek, (affirm ative)..........................................................................
h) I paid all the bills, (negative) ..........................................................................

3 Complete each sentence with a suitable time expression from the box. You can
use an expression more than once.

ago in last week at when while

a) A burglar broke into the house ....^ h U p ....... we were watching television.
b) I met an old friend of mine in the city centre.
c) What were you d o in g ........................ the police officer knocked on the door?
d) Jan met S arah ........................ half-past eight outside the cinema.
e) Dick was preparing lunch, he cut his finger badly.
f) I first came to this town more than twenty y ears...........................
g) Jeff was studying to be a d o cto r........................ he met Sally.
h) Tony bought his first m otorbike........................ 1992.
i) did you start playing basketball?
j) Most of the young people left this village a long tim e ...........................

13
INTERM EDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Match each sentence (a -h ) with a suitable response (1-8).

a) What was Katrina doing when you knocked on the door? ....3.....
b) How did Brenda spend her holiday?............
c) What happened when the lights went o u t? ............
d) When did you meet C ath y ?............
e) What did Julie do when Tony called ?............
f) Did Suzannah hear what David said ?............
g) What did Lucy do when the bell rang at the end of the lesson?........
h) Why did Alicia leave so early ?............

1 She went sailing most days, and sunbathed at the beach.

2 She put the phone down.
3 She was listening to the radio in the kitchen.
4 She went to meet her parents at a restaurant.
5 She came to my brother's birthday party.
6 While Tina was looking for a torch, they came back on.
7 She wasn't listening.
8 She put her books away and left.

5 Put each verb in brackets into either the past simple or past continuous.

a) When Harry (wake up)

him the news.
b) Everyone (w ait)..................
message (arrive)..................
c) Charlotte (w an t).................
(ch o o se).................................
d) When Roberto (study)
(p h o n e)..................................
e) I (fin d )................................... ......my pen while I (look fo r )...........................
my bag.
f) Ann (w atch ).........................
(arrive)...................................
g) When the lights (go out) ........................................ , I (lie )............................
in bed reading.
h) When you (g o )....................
(you e a t)................................ ?

14
 GRAMMAR

5 Past time 2

Explanations
Past perfect: form ■ The past perfect is formed with the auxiliary had and the past participle
(third column in verb tables). The past participles of irregular verbs are listed
on page 277.
I had decided. She had left. We had eaten.
In speech and informal writing these forms are contracted to:
I'd decided. She'd left. We'd eaten.

■ Questions and negatives

Questions are formed by inverting the subject and had. Negatives are formed
with not and contractions are used.
Had she left?
She had not left. She hadn't left.

Past perfect: ■ The past perfect is used to show clearly that one past event happened before
meaning another past event. We use the past perfect for the earlier event.
Sue left at 7.00. We arrived at her house at 8.30.
-> When we arrived at Sue's house, she had left.
It is not necessary to use the past perfect if we use before or after to make the
time sequence clear, although many speakers do so to show a strong
connection between the two events.
Sue left her house before we arrived.
OR Sue had left her house before we arrived.
We arrived at Sue's house after she left.
OR We arrived at Sue's house after she had left.

■ Note that it is not necessary to use the past perfect just because an event
happened a long time ago. We use past simple.
The Chinese built the Great Wall over two thousand years ago.

Past perfect: ■ The past perfect is often used with verbs of thinking like think, know, be sure,
common uses realize, remember, suspect, understand etc.
I thought I'd seen the film before, but I hadn't.
David knew he'd seen her somewhere before.
Ellen was sure she hadn't locked the door.
When I got home I realized I'd lost my wallet.
The inspector suspected that the th ief had used a special key.

15
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

used to ■ Used to describes a habit or state in the past. There is no present form. Used to
suggests that the action or situation is no longer true and so makes a
contrast with the present.
I used to have long hair when I was younger.
It is used for repeated actions and not for single events.
/ used to play tennis, but now I play football.

■ Questions and negatives

With questions and negatives used to becomes use to.
Did you use to have long hair when you were younger?
I didn't use to play tennis, but now I play most weekends.

■ Pronunciation
Used is pronounced /ju:st/. This is different from the past tense of the verb
use, pronounced /juzd/.

would Would is used in the same way as used to, but it only describes repeated actions
in the past, not states. It is more common in descriptive writing than in speech.
On winter days, we would/used to all sit around the fire and tell stories.
I used to own a motorbike. (NOT i-w&uld own a motorbike. )

Past perfect and ■ Study the situations and the example sentences:
past simple
Situation 1: the film starts at 8.00, I arrive at 7.50.
a) I arrived at 7.50, just before the film started.
b) When the film started, I had already arrived ten minutes before.

Situation 2: the film starts at 8.00, I arrive at 8.10.

a) The film started at 8.00, but I arrived ten minutes late.
b) I arrived at 8.10, but the film had already started.

To describe these situations it is possible to use the past simple for both
verbs, as in la) and 2a). It is also possible to put the event that happened
first into the past perfect, as in lb) and 2b).

However, la) is more simple and much more likely than lb). In lb) we
emphasize which event happened first (me arriving) - but arriving first is
normal when we go to the cinema so we don't need to emphasize it.

In situation 2 both a) and b) are possible. 2a) is simple and easy to use and
understand. But 2b) helps the meaning by emphasizing which event
happened first (the film starting).

Past forms used in ■ Note that the past simple and past perfect are also used in conditional
conditionals sentences { I f ... ). In these sentences they have a different meaning.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 13: Conditionals

Gram m ar 14: Conditionals

16
 GRAMMAR 5 PAST TIME 2

Practice it
Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) When we had ate lunch, we were sitting in the garden.

W h en , yJt k W tA itv i Lunck, W e. s a t . i n . th e. jjw d tn ...........................
b) While I looked for my keys, I remembered I left them at home.

c) Anna had used to play badminton when she had been at school.

d) When I got into bed, I was falling asleep immediately.

e) When I was finally finding the house, I was knocking at the door.

f) After Jill was giving Nick his books, she went home.

g) Maria would live in Sweden when she was a child.

h) I was using to get up early when I had gone sailing.

i) The Vikings had sailed to North America a thousand years ago.

j) Juliet was sure she was seeing the tall man before.

2 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) While I had waited/was waiting/waited at the bus stop, I had noticed/was

noticing/noticed a new shop which wasn't/hadn't been in the street the day
before.
b) I had gone/went out into the garden to fetch my bike, but found/was finding
that someone stole/had stolen it.
c) When George met/was meeting Diane at the party, he thought/was thinking
that he saw/had seen/was seeing her somewhere before.
d) Emily got off/was getting o f f the bus, and walked/was walking into the bank
when she realized/had realized/was realizing that she left/had left/was leaving
her handbag on the bus.
e) After I was buying/had bought my new computer, I discovered that I wasn't
having/didn't have enough memory.
f) I went to the post office to ask about my package, but they had said/said that
it still hadn't arrived/didn't arrive.

17
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Put each verb given into the past simple, past continuous or past perfect. More
than one answer may be possible.

The police suspected that Brian (a) ...hflff..)?.W.k&W'.....(break) the window at

his house because he ( b ) .................................... (want) to make them think that a
burglar ( c ) .................................... (steal) his valuable stamp collection. They
( d ) .................................... (think) that Brian ( e ) ...................................... (do) this
because he ( f ) .................................... (need) the money. However, they
(g) .................................... (not know) that Brian (h) .................................... (fly) to
Brazil the week before, and ( i ) .................................... (be) abroad when the
burglary ( j ) .................................... (take place).

4 Complete each sentence, using would or used to and the verb in brackets. More
than one answer may be possible.

a) Jack (h ave).....ft-f.fy ....... a beard but he shaved it off.

b) My mother (read )............................ .................... to me every night.
c) In the holidays we (m eet)............ .................................... at the beach every
morning.
d) I (not lik e ).......................................... .......spinach, but now I do.
e) Helen (w rite).....................................
f) Tina (liv e).......................................... ......in the house opposite.
g) When I was young, the summers (b e )................................................. warmer.
h) Whenever our teacher let us leave early, we (cheer)...............................................

18
 GRAMMAR 5 PAST TIME 2

5 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Michael took a deep breath and dived into the water.

After Michael ....hfl.d.t.flk& Vl.................. a deep breath, he dived into the water.
b) Terry was fatter.
Terry................................................. to be so thin.
c) Gary was sure his keys were not in his pocket.
Gary was su re................................................. his keys.
d) When he was younger David played tennis.
D avid................................................. tennis when he was younger.
e) Last summer, Julia got up early every morning.
Last summer, Julia used t o ..................................................early every morning.
f) We missed the bus so we took a taxi.
We took a taxi becau se................................................. the bus.
g) In those days, we spent the summer in the mountains.
In those days, w e ................................................. the summer in the mountains.

6 Combine the two sentences to make one sentence. Use when and the past
perfect.

a) I washed and got ready. I went out to meet my friends.

Wktvi. I'd. Washed. .w d jo t' ready,..L yJ.wtf. oui.. to..m eet. my frien ds.........
b) I knew much more about the job. I visited their offices.

c) I looked at the new dress for ages. I asked how much it cost.

d) I felt much more independent. I passed my driving test.

e) Anne went on holiday. She saved enough money.

f) The team finally won the match. They ran round the pitch to celebrate.

19
 GRAM M AR

6 Present perfect 1

Explanations
Present perfect: ■ The present perfect is formed with the present tense of the auxiliary verb
form have and the past participle (third column in verb tables). The past
participles of irregular verbs are listed on page 277.
I have decided to leave tomorrow. (regular)
She has written the em ail to Lucy, (irregular)
In speech and informal writing these forms are contracted to:
I've decided. She's written.

m Questions and negatives

Questions are formed by inverting the subject and have. Negatives are formed
with not and contractions are used.
Have you decided yet?
She has not written the email. She hasn't written the email.

Present perfect: The present perfect describes past events which are connected to the present.
meaning There are a number of different uses:

■ Experiences in our life up to now.

Have you visited any other countries?
Yes, I've been to Italy and France.
There is no time expression because we are talking about a whole life
experience, not individual events. If we wanted to say when the events
happened we would use the past simple.

■ An event in the past that has a result in the present.

Helen has broken her pencil.
I've hurt my foot.
There is no time expression because when it happened is not important. Our
attention is on the present (Where is the pencil sharpener? / I can't play
football). If we wanted to say when the actions happened we would use the
past simple.

■ A situation that started in the past and continues until the present.
I've lived here for ten years.
I've often seen Jim with his dog in the park.
Here there is a time expression, describing how long or how often something
has happened.

20
 GRAMMAR 6 PRESENT PERFECT 1

■ Completion
We often use the present perfect when we describe how many things are
completed so far.
I've read a hundred pages o f this book.
An exact time is not mentioned.

Time expressions ■ ever, never

We use ever and never when we ask or talk about our experiences in life.
Have you ever eaten Japanese food?
No, I've never eaten it.

m yet, so far and already

We use yet in questions and negative sentences. It has a similar meaning to
50 far (or 'up to now'), which is used in questions and positive sentences.
Have you finished this book yet? No, I'm on page 56.
How many pages have you read? I've read 56 pages so far.
We use already in positive sentences to describe an action which happened
before.
When are you going to finish your letter?
I've already written it.

■ just
We use just when we describe a very recent event.
Cathy has just phoned from the airport.

■ Frequency adverbs: always, often etc.

Frequency adverbs that are used with the present simple can also be used
with the present perfect.
He has always loved you. (a state)
We have often visited Spain. (a repeated event)

■ for and since

for describes the length of a time period.
Tom has worked here for three months,
since describes the point when the time period started.
Tom has worked here since July 10th.

Gram m ar 3: Present time 2

21
INTERM EDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Put each verb into a form of the present perfect simple.

a) What's the matter? (you cut) H eiVt yOH t u t yourself7

b) I (h av e)............................................. ....a headache ever since lunchtime.
c) Nadia (never s e e ).......................... ......................any Chinese films.
d) Someone (steal)............................. ................... Mr Grant's bike.
e) The passengers are tired because they (not sleep ).................................................
all night.
f) I'm afraid we (just break )........... ..................................... your window. Sorry!
g) David (not w in )............................. ................... a prize this time, I'm afraid.
h) (you ever e a t) .................................. .............. Spanish food? It's great!

2 Complete what each speaker says.

We }?.?£$. w w ,f r ie d for I ................................................. on holiday

twenty-five wonderful years! to Australia.

I ................................................. a snail
twenty-three letters! before!

I ..................................................you since Oh no! I ...................................................my

the day we met! pencil!
22
 GRAMMAR 6 PRESENT PERFECT 1

Complete each sentence with a time word or phrase from the box.

yet for §»€e often ever never already so far just always

a) Luis has lived in the city centre ....fkYlfi?'........ 1996.

b) Thanks for the present! I'v e ........................ wanted a pet goldfish!
c) Have y o u ........................ drunk pineapple juice? It's fantastic!
d) I'v e ........................ heard some fantastic news! I've passed my exams!
e) Hurry up! Haven't you fin ish ed ........................ ? You're so slow!
f) Nina has worked in this com pany........................ five years.
g) I 'v e ........................ been on a big ship before. It's an interesting experience!
h) We're very busy tod ay......................... we've sold over a hundred bikes.
i) I'v e ........................ passed this building, but this is the first time I've been
inside.
j) Can I have a different book? I 'v e ........................ read this one.

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) We started working here three years ago.

We .hQCf-'.................for three years.
b) This is the first time I've been on a plane.
I ...................................................... on a plane before.
c) That's strange! My pen isn't here!
That's strange!...................................................... disappeared!
d) Nicky and Jan aren't at this school any more.
Nicky and J a n ...................................................... this school.
e) I saw a friend of yours a few moments ago.
I ...................................................... a friend of yours.
f) I'm still writing my letters.
I ...................................................... writing my letters yet.
g) Is this your first visit to South America?
H ave...................................................... to South America before?
h) Oh no! My wallet is still in the car.
Oh no! I ...................................................... my wallet in the car.
i) It's a long time since we spoke to your sister.
W e ...................................................... to your sister for a long time.
j) Is Anna still asleep?
H as...................................................... up yet?

23
 GRAMMAR

7 Present perfect 2

Explanations
Present perfect The present perfect continuous is formed with the present perfect of be, and the
continuous: form -ing form of the verb.
I've been waiting here all morning.
W hat have you been doing lately?
I haven't been sleeping well recently.

Present perfect ■ The present perfect continuous, like the present perfect, describes past events
continuous: which are connected to the present. But in the continuous form there is a
meaning meaning of an action or situation in progress.
W hat have you been doing lately?
I've been working a lot.
How long have you been living here?

■ The present perfect continuous can emphasize the length of time of the
action.
I've been waiting here all morning.
I've been feeling ill for weeks.

■ The present perfect continuous can emphasize that the action is temporary.
I've been staying in a hotel for the past month.

m The present perfect continuous can be used for repeated actions.

I've been phoning her for days, but she's never at home.

■ The action may be finished or continuing, we only know by the situation.

Carlos has been studying English for two years and now he's stopped! What a
shame.
Carlos has been studying English for two years. He's going to do an exam next
year.

Time expressions Typical time expressions that are used with the present perfect continuous
include:
all day, all morning, for days, for ages, lately, recently, since, for

24
 GRAMMAR 7 PRESENT PERFECT 2

Present perfect or ■ Often there is very little difference between the two tenses:
present perfect I've worked/been working here for two years.
continuous? I've lived/been living here for two years.

■ We often use the present perfect if our attention is on the finished result, but
the present perfect continuous if our attention is on the action.
I've written that em ail to Jackie. I was meaning to do it for ages.
I've been writing that email to Jackie and it's taken an hour! I'm exhausted!

■ If we give details of how many or how much we do not use a continuous

form.
I've written four emails.
I've done a lot o f cooking and cleaning this afternoon.

Other problems ■ Present simple or present perfect?

We use the present simple to describe habits or states in the present, but we
use the present perfect to describe the time until the present.
I live in Prague.
(a permanent state - I always live there)
I've lived in Prague for two years.
(I arrived two years ago and still live there)

■ Past simple or present perfect?

The past simple describes an event in a completed time period. The present
perfect is used for a time period that includes the present.
I lived in Prague in the nineties. (now I live somewhere else)
I've lived in Prague since the nineties. (I still live there)

The choice of tense often depends on whether our attention is in the past or
the present.
I had an umbrella, but I left it on the bus.
(the event is distant in my mind)
Oh no! I've left my umbrella on the bus.
(the event is present in my mind)

■ have been and have gone

If we have been to a place, we went there and have now returned. If we have
gone to a place, we went there but have not returned.
Melissa has been to China. (and she has come back)
Melissa has gone to China. (and she is still there)

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 4: Past time 1

25
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I live here/I’ve lived here since the end of last year.

b) I'm afraid the last train left/has left an hour ago.
c) Someone has just stolen/has just been stealing my bicycle.
d) Thank you for your offer, but I decided/I've decided not to accept.
e) Yesterday I lost/I've lost my wallet.
f) Take your umbrella with you. It started/it's started raining.
g) We're enjoying our trip. We visited/We've visited two countries so far.
h) I'm standing here/I've been standing here for hours and I feel tired.
i) This was/has been a busy day and it isn't over yet!
j) I feel really tired. We went/We’ve been to a party last night.

2 Put each verb in brackets into either the present perfect, past simple or present
simple.

a) Last week I (lo se)..... ...... .....................................my scarf, and now I (just lose)
V e j u s t Lost ......... my gloves.
b) I (w ork)....................... ......................... for Blue Bank at the moment but I
(decide).......................
c) We (b e )....................... ......................... here for hours. Are you sure we (come)
......... to the right place?
d) (you s e e )..................... ............................my calculator? I'm sure I (leave)
......... it here earlier.
e) We (h av e).................. .............................. some coffee and then (catch)
......... the bus home.
f) I (never e a t) ...............
(e a t)............................. ................... some squid.
g) I (h o p e)....................... ......................... you aren't a vegetarian. I (cook)
.......... you some lamb chops.
h) Recently a lot of young people (take u p ) ................................................. kite
surfing.
i) When we (reach) ........................................... the cinema, there (not be)
........ any tickets left.
j) Please come quickly! Nick (have) ................................................. an accident, and
be(go) ........................

26
 GRAMMAR 7 PRESENT PERFECT 2

Complete each mini-dialogue by putting the verbs given in brackets into either
the present perfect or present perfect continuous.

a) A: Terminator 2 is on at the Rex? (you see) ........... it?

B: No, not yet. Shall we go? I (look forward) . . . ( .
to seeing it for ages.
b) A: What's the matter? You look really tired!
B: I am! I (study)................................................. all day, and I (not finish)
................................................. yet.
A: Oh well, time for a break.
c) A: I (p h o n e)................................................. Carol all day, but there's no reply.
B: I expect she (g o )................................................. swimming with her friends.
d) A: (you h e a r)................................................. the news?
B: What news?
A: Someone (ro b )................................................. the bank at the end of the road.
e) A: Why is your leg in plaster?
B: That's a silly question! I (break)..................................................it, of course.
A: Someone (w rite)................................................. 'Break Time' on the plaster!

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) I came to live here three months ago.

I .Y&.b.C&Yk.Livim.............. here for three months.
b) Sophie is out at the shops at the moment.
Sop h ie................................................. to the shops.
c) I've had French lessons since March.
I ................................................. French since March.
d) I'm still reading this book.
I ................................................. reading this book yet.
e) Paul left the room a moment ago.
Paul h a s ................................................. the room.
f) It's ages since I last went to the cinema.
I ................................................. to the cinema for ages.
g) This is the first time I've eaten snails.
I ................................................. snails before.
h) I don't remember Helen's phone number.
I'v e ................................................. Helen's phone number.

27
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

We've had a very interesting trip (a) .............. far, and we've had some
interesting adventures ( b ) ........................ the last time we wrote. We've
( c ) ........................ to some beautiful islands, and (d ) ..........................a lot of
interesting people. In fact ( e ) ........................ we've made friends with some
people in a village, and they've been ( f ) ........................us the local language. I
haven't managed to learn much (g )........................ .. but Ann ( h ) ........................
picked up quite a lot, and can speak well. She's been ( i ) ........................every day,
and she's ( j ) ........................ me everything she knows!

6 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) My penfriend is writing to me for years.

My Ivas bem writing to me for ytfirs.
b) We have started this course three weeks ago.

c) 'What have you been doing all day?' 'I've been written letters.'

d) When have you arrived in this city?

e) You have ever been to India?

f) Paula has been stayed in a hotel by the sea.

g) I've been feeling ill three weeks ago.

h) I live in this city since I was born.

i) I wait here for ages. Where have you been?

j) Tony has leaved his books on the bus.

28
 Explanations
Future time We can refer to the future in English by using will, be going to or by using
present tenses. Sometimes we can use different forms and there is little
difference between them, other times there is a difference.

will ■ Form
The will future is formed with the infinitive without to. The negatives of will
is won't. Will is usually shortened in speech and informal writing to '11.
Some speakers use shall to refer to the future in formal situations with I and
we. However this use is becoming very rare. In modern English shall is used
for suggestions only:
Shall I open the window?

■ Meaning
We use will to talk generally about future beliefs, opinions, hopes and
predictions. There is usually a time expression. We can add perhaps, probably
or definitely to show how certain or uncertain we are about our predictions.
In the next century, most people will probably live in big cities.
Perhaps it'll rain tomorrow.
United will definitely win tonight.
Notice that probably comes after will but before won't.
She'll p ro b a b ly come with us tonight.
She probably won't come with us tonight.

be going to ■ Form
The be going to future is formed with the verb be + going + the infinitive.
Jean is going to learn to drive.
Tim and Ann are going to travel abroad next year.

■ Meaning
We use going to for plans and intentions. The plan may be in the near future,
or more distant.
I'm going to do lots o f work this evening.
After I finish University I'm going to travel all over Europe by InterRail.
We also use going to for predictions. We use going to when there is some
evidence in the present situation, for example we can see something.
Look out! Those books are going to fall!

29
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Present Form
continuous See Grammar 2 for the form of the present continuous.
I'm meeting my mother for lunch at one.

Meaning
We use the present continuous to talk about things we have arranged to do,
in particular social arrangements and appointments. There is nearly always a
time expression.
A: Are you doing anything on Friday evening?
B: Not really. Why?
A: I'm having a party. Would you like to come?

Problems will or going to?

Will and going to are both used for predictions, and on most occasions either
is possible.
I think it's going to/it'll probably rain tomorrow.
However if there is strong evidence in the present situation, then going to is
usually used:
I think it's going to rain this afternoon.
(looking up at black clouds in the sky)

going to or present continuous?

Going to and the present continuous are both used for plans and
arrangements, and on most occasions either is possible.
I'm going to have/I'm having a party on Friday.
However, going to can suggest that the details are not yet finalized - it's still
just a plan. Whereas the present continuous can suggest that the
arrangement is more fixed, with a time and a place.
Jean is going to have another driving lesson soon.
(a plan, with no specific time)
Jean is having her driving lesson this afternoon.
(it's fixed, in her diary)

other meanings of will

Will has other meanings, for example spontaneous decisions that come into
our head at the moment of speaking, promises etc.
Is that the phone ringing? I'll answer it. (a spontaneous decision)
I'll do the best that I can to help you. (a promise)

With be we use will or going to, not the present continuous.

I'll be back on Friday.
I'm going to be back on Friday.
- » SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 2: Present time 1

Gram m ar 9: Future 2

30
 GRAMMAR 8 FUTURE 1

Practice

Underline the correct sentence, 1 or 2, in each mini-dialogue.

a) A: Can you come dancing tomorrow night?

B: 1 Sorry, I'll play basketball.
2 Sorry. I'm playing basketball.
b) A: What are your plans for the summer?
B: 1 I'll spend a month in the mountains.
2 I'm going to spend a month in the mountains.
c) A: What do you think about the weather?
B: 1 It'll probably rain tomorrow.
2 It's raining tomorrow.
d) A: What about tomorrow at about 5.30?
B: 1 OK, I'll see you then.
2 OK, I'm seeing you then.
e) A: Mary is buying a dog next week.
B: 1 Really? What is she calling it?
2 Really? What is she going to call it?
f) A: It would be nice to see you next week.
B: 1 Are you doing anything on Wednesday?
2 Will you do anything on Wednesday?

2 Put each verb in brackets into a form of will, going to or present continuous.
More than one answer may be possible.

a) Have you heard the news? Harry (join) i f . .....

the Army!
b) Sorry to keep you waiting. I (not b e ) ..................................................long.
c) According to the weather forecast, it (snow )..................................................
tomorrow.
d) I'm sorry I can't meet you tonight. I (go o u t)..................................................with
my parents.
e) Careful! You (k n ock)................................................. that jug off the table!
f) In fifty years' time, most people (probably rid e)..................................................
bicycles to work.
g) Our teacher (give) ................................................. us a test tomorrow.
h) I (g o )................................................. to Manchester at the end of next week.
i) Look out! You (h it)................................................. that tree!
j) I think our team (probably w in )....................................................

31
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) My party is on Thursday.
I ..'m..k fin .n g .p a rty ..... on Thursday.
b) Tomorrow's weather forecast is for rain.
I t 's ................................................. tomorrow.
c) I predict a victory for our team.
I th in k ................................................. win.
d) Tomorrow I'll be absent, Mrs Jones.
I ................................................. here tomorrow, Mrs Jones.
e) Terry intends to finish painting the kitchen this evening.
Terry................................................. painting the kitchen this evening.
f) Meet me outside the station at 5.30.
I ................................................. outside the station at 5.30.
g) What's our arrangement for lunch?
W h ere ................................................. for lunch?
h) Everyone expects lots of tourism in this country next summer.
Everyone thinks a large number of tourists................................................. this
country next summer.

4 Underline the sentences which are incorrect. Rewrite them. If the sentence is
correct, put a tick (/ ).

a) I go swimming next Saturday. Would you like to come?

I[m g o in g sw im m in g next.S&tjAJrdffy...Wouddm
y o u .Like to come?
b) What are you going to discuss at the next meeting?

c) The boat is turning over! I think it will sink!

d) Sue is going to lend me her roller-skates.

e) The weather forecast says it's definitely sunny tomorrow.

f) There is a lot to do. Is anyone going to help you?

g) Sorry, I'm not seeing you tomorrow. I have to go to London.

h) Bye for now. I see you later this evening.

32
 GRAMMAR 8 FUTURE 1

5 Rewrite each sentence so that it contains will or going to.

a) I plan to study engineering in France.

..J.M.joivuj to study iyi Fmncc.
b) I've arranged a party for next Friday.

c) We've got an appointment at the doctor's, so we can't come.

d) Kelly is likely to get the job.

e) Martin's wife is pregnant again.

f) Sarah doesn't plan to get married yet.

g) There's a possibility of snow tomorrow.

h) I predict a score of 3-0.

33
 GRAM M AR

9 Future 2

Explanations
Future continuous ■ Form
The future continuous is formed with will + be + the -ing form of the verb.
This time tomorrow I'll be eating lunch on the plane.

m Meaning
The future continuous is used when we imagine an activity in progress in the
future.
We often use it when we compare what we are doing now with what we will
be doing in the future. There is nearly always a time expression.
Where will you be living in five years' time?
We also use the future continuous to say that something will definitely
happen.
We'll be holding a meeting soon, so we can decide then.

Future perfect ■ Form

The future perfect is formed with will + have + the past participle.
By the time we get to the cinema, the film will have begun.

m Meaning
We use the future perfect to look back from one point in the future to an
earlier event. We often use by or by the time with the future perfect.
By next week I'll have collected over 1000 euros for charity.
The situation has not happened yet, but at a certain time in the future it will
happen.

Present simple ■ We often use the present simple to talk about events in the future based on a
fixed timetable, programme or calendar.
Jim's plane leaves at 12.00.
Our head teacher retires next year.

m We use the present simple to refer to the future after these words: when, after,
before, unless, in case, as soon as, until, by the time, the next time.
When I see her again, I'll tell her your news.
Let's run home before it rains.
Take an umbrella, in case it rains.
As soon as we’re ready, we'll phone you.
Please wait here until Mrs Hall comes back.
We can also use the present perfect with these words to emphasize that an
action is complete.
Hand in your paper as soon as you have finished.

34
 GRAMMAR 9 FUTURE 2

Functions using will When we say that a verb form has a 'function', we mean that we use it for a
and shall purpose like 'promising' or 'suggesting' rather than to refer to time. Many uses
of will and shall are more easily described in this way.

■ Promise
I'll try as hard as I can.

■ Threat
Stop doing that, or I'll tell my dad.

■ Decision made at the moment of speaking.

A: 'Which one do you want?'
B: 'I'll take the blue silk one.' (in a shop)

■ Offer
I'll give you a lift in my car.
Will you have some more coffee?
Shall I open the door for you?

m Request
Will you carry this bag for me?

m Suggestion
Shall we play tennis?

■ Parting remark
I'll see you tomorrow.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 24: Functions

35
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) This time next week Billy will lie/will be Ivins on the beach.
b) Please stay in your seats until the bell rings/will ring.
c) We'll have moved/We'll be moving to our new house on Tuesday.
d) What time does your train leave/will your train leave?
e) Don't forget to turn off the lights before you're leaving/you leave.
f) Where will you work/will you be working in ten years' time?
g) Wait for me. I'll be/I'll have been ready in a moment.
h) John won't stop/won't have stopped talking all the time!

2 Complete each part sentence (a -h ) with one of the part sentences (1-8). More
than one answer may be possible.

a) As soon as I hear from Sharon, ...rL .

b) By the time Mary arrives............
c) Please take a s e a t............
d) This time next w eek ............
e) The next time you see m e ............
f) We'll have time to have some lu n c h ............

1 until the dentist is ready.

2 the match will be over.
3 I'll have had my hair cut and you won't recognize me.
4 before the train leaves.
5 I'll ask her to phone you.
6 we'll be enjoying ourselves on holiday.

3 Underline the inappropriate verb forms and write the correct form in the space.
If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/ ).

a) By the time the police get here, the burglars will have
vanished. ................/..............
b) When you'll grow older, you'll change your mind about
this. ................................
c) The bus leaves at 1.00, so we'll leave the house at 11.30.....................................
d) I won't leave until you will give me the money. ................................
e) As soon as the taxi will arrive, I'll be letting you know........................................
f) Will you have been using the video next lesson? ................................
g) By the time we get to Helen's house, she'll leave. ................................
h) 'Do you want me to carry this?' 'No that's all right, I'm
doing it.' ................................

36
 GRAMMAR 9 FUTURE 2

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it contains will/shall or going to, and the verb
underlined.

a) How playing tennis?

5 .W (. vVe. jPLay ten n is?
b) I've decided to study Arabic in Cairo.

c) I promise to be home by midnight.

d) I hope to meet you later.

e) I'd like you to go to the shops for me.

f) We promise not to make too much noise.

g) Would you like me to help you with those bags?

h) We could come back later if you like.

5 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) The work won't take us longer than an hour.

We ..I I . .fiy&S.hzM................................ the work in an hour.
b) I promise to phone you before our next meeting.
Before w e ........................................................................ you.
c) Would you like me to check the spelling for you?
S h a ll........................................................................ for you?
d) Sheila refuses to let me share her book.
Sheila w o n 't........................................................................ book.
e) How about having a game of chess?
S h a ll........................................................................ a game of chess?
f) Please stay here until I come back.
Please d o n 't........................................................................ come back.
g) After the lesson we'll meet and play tennis.
W h e n ........................................................................ we'll meet and play tennis.
h) What job will you have in twenty years' time?
What w ill........................................................................ in twenty years' time?

37
 GRAM M AR

10 Consolidation 1

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) When I was a child I used to ride/I was riding a tricycle.

b) That looks very heavy. Will I/Shall I help you?
c) I'm waiting for Sue. Have you seen her/Did you see her?
d) How long are you working/have you been working here?
e) I can't come out because I haven't finished/I didn't finish my homework yet.
f) When the phone rang I washed/I was washing my hair in the bathroom.
g) Why do you stare/are you staring at me like that?
h) I've finished my exams so I'm having/I have a party tomorrow.
i) We'd better wait here until the rain stops/will stop.
j) When did you last go/have you last been to the cinema?

2 Put each verb in brackets into the present simple or continuous, or the past
simple or continuous.

a) 'What (you do) ....4.9..Y.^..4P.......................?' 'I'm an engineer.'

b) The door was open so the dog (ru n )................................................. into the
living room.
c) When we arrived home Jan (s it)................................................. outside the door.
d) Can you help me? I (not understand)................................................. Spanish.
e) At the beginning of the film I (realize)................................................. I'd seen it
before.
f) I'm sorry, I can't talk long. I (study)................................................. for an
examination.
g) At the moment of the earthquake Pat (read)................................................. in bed.
h) I'll phone you as soon as I (know )................................................. the results.
i) I (stay)..................................................at the Hotel Tirol. Why don't you call me?
j) 'What (you d o )..................................................when you saw the snake?' 'I ran!'

3 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Steve left before my arrival.

When I .. ftXTXy&d.i. .5 .. already left.
b) Do you need any help with your suitcase?
S h a ll................................................. you with your suitcase?
c) What's your usual time of arrival at school?
W h e n ................................................. arrive at school?
d) Alice started playing tennis six months ago.
A lice..................................................tennis for six months.
38
 G R A M M A R 10 C O N S O L I D A T O N 1

e) I'll wait here until it stops raining.

When it stops rain in g ..................................................leave.
f) In the middle of my meal, the phone rang.
While I ................................................. my meal the phone rang.
g) Jack has come to stay for the weekend.
J a c k ................................................. with me for the weekend.
h) I last saw David in 1990.
I ................................................. David since 1990.
i) Are you free tomorrow evening?
A re................................................. anything tomorrow evening?

4 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits the space.

Maria's homecoming
When the bus (1) .....Cr.... in a small square, Maria ( 2 ) ............ her magazine and
didn't realize that she ( 3 ) ............ at her destination. 'This is Santa Teresa,'
Martin said. '( 4 ) ............ home! I suppose your cousin ( 5 ) ..............for us. Come
on. ( 6 ) ............the bags.' Maria thought, 'All those years when I ( 7 ) ..............in
New York, I ( 8 ) ............ of this moment. And now it's real, I can't believe it! Here
I am, ( 9 ) ............ in the square'. Santa Teresa was Maria's birthplace, but she
(1 0 ) ............ the town at the age of six. She had some memories of the town, and
some photos, but ( 1 1 ) ............ here still? She ( 1 2 ) ................ Nobody (13) ..
in the square. Perhaps her cousin Pablo ( 1 4 ) ............ Maria's letter. 'What
( 1 5 ) ............ now?' asked Martin. 'There isn't even a hotel here!'

1) A has stopped B stops C stopped D was stopped

2) A was reading B read C had read D used to read
3) A arrived B arrives C has arrived D had arrived
4) A You arrive B You're arriving C You've been arriving D You've arrived
5) A waits B will be waiting C has waited D is going to wait
6) A I'll carry B I carry C I've carried D I carried
7) A live B have lived C was living D am living
8) A dream B am dreaming C used to dream D will dream
9) A I really stand B I was really standing C I had really stood D I'm really standing
10) A was leaving B had left C used to leave D has left
11) A will she belong B did she belong C has she belonged D does she belong
12) A wasn't knowing B hasn't known C hadn't known D didn’t know
13) A was waiting B is waiting C waits D waited
14) A wasn't receiving B didn't use to receive C hadn't received D hasn't received
15) A are we going to do B have we done C did we do D are we doing

39
INTERM EDIATE LANGUAGE PRA CTICE

5 Put a suitable time word or expression in each space. Each space is for one word.

Just a quick note (a) ..k.&fPT.?:....... I leave for the airport. Sorry I haven't been in
touch ( b ) ........................ Wednesday, but I've been busy getting ready
(c ) , and I haven't collected my ticket
(d ) from the travel agency, ( e ) ....................................................
......................... I get to Sydney, I'll write you a letter. I've ( f ) ..........................been to
Australia before but I've been reading a lot about it ( g ) .......................... It sounds
great! I'll be in Sydney ( h ) ........................ the end of next week, and then I'm
travelling to Melbourne. I'll be there ( i ) ........................ a month, ( j ) ..........................
...................................................I get back all my friends will have forgotten me!

6 Look carefully at each line. Some lines are correct but some have a word which
should not be there. Tick ( / ) each correct line. If a line has a word which should
not be there, write the word in the space.

Dear Emma,
I'm sorry I haven't been written to you lately, but I've 1 ...k.C&W'.
been working hard. When I received your last letter 2 ..........
I was acting in a play at school, and when 3 ..............
I have finished that, I went on holiday with some friends. 4 ..............
I meant to send you a postcard, but I had forgot to take 5 ..............
your address with me. How are you getting on at 6 ..............
college? You didn't say very much about this in 7 ..............
your letter. I hope you are still like it, and don't 8 ..............
been work all the time! Do you still want to come 9 ..............
and will stay for a few days? I'm starting work in 10 ..............
London after I shall leave school in July, and I want 11 ..............
to see you before then. I have know you're busy, 12 ..............
but by the time your term finishes, I'll have 13 ..............
started my job. I've been done so many things 14 ..............
lately! I've just learned to drive and my parents 15 ..............
have sometimes lend me their car, so I often go out 16 ..............
with friends. Maybe I'll be drive to Nottingham and 17 ..............
see you one day.
Best wishes, Luisa

40
 G R A M M A R 10 CONSOLIDATION 1

7 Underline the errors in these sentences. Correct the error.

a) By the time I got to the phone it stopped ringing.

.... it. jfiW stppptd".rivuf'ing.................................................
b) I'm not very good at this game. You see, I didn't play it before.

c) When has Pete written to you last?

d) What do you do at weekends? Are you ever going to the cinema?

e) When I was on holiday last summer I was going to the beach every day.

f) Julie can't meet you tomorrow. She will play basketball.

g) You're always late! I'm waiting here for ages!

8 In everyday spoken English, we often leave out the subject pronoun and auxiliary.
Instead of saying, 'Do you like it?'w e say, 'Like it?'. Rewrite each sentence so that
the verb underlined has a subject pronoun.

a) Finished yet? We're all waiting!

..M ?!¥$'.. yp.& . y& ?............................................................................................
b) Bye for now! See you tomorrow!

c) Good holiday? Had a nice time?

d) Paul's a bit difficult. Know what I mean?

e) Hi, Tim. Coming out for a drink later?

f) Been waiting long? Sorry for the delay.

Problem 1 Check the difference between the present simple and present continuous in
check Grammar 3. How can you show this difference in your language?

2 Does your language have a tense with the same form as the present perfect? Is it
used in the same way? Can you show the difference in your language between
the present perfect and past simple?

3 Do you have a future tense in your language? Does it express all the meanings of
will, going to and the present continuous?

41
 11
GRAMMAR

Reported speech 1

Explanations
Reported speech We often tell people what other people have said. This is called reported or
indirect speech. We rarely report the exact words, usually we just give a general
summary.
Sandra speaking to Petra: 'Bye, Petra, it's been great seeing you again. I'll call you
sometime next week when I get a chance.'
Petra reporting the conversation to Roberta: 7 saw Sandra yesterday. She said
she'd call me next week.
We usually change tenses (will -> would in the example above) and also other
references like people, places and times (you -> me in the example above).

Tense changes Statements are usually reported with a past tense verb (like said) and an
optional that. The form of the verb that follows then 'moves back' in time. This
is sometimes called backshift.

Present simple to past simple 7 need some help.'

She said (that) she needed some help.

Present continuous to ‘We are having our lunch.'

past continuous She said that they were having their lunch.

Present perfect to past perfect 'I've lost my keys.'

He said (that) he had lost his keys.

Past simple to past perfect 7 wrote two letters to her.’

(or stays the same) He said (that) he had written two letters to her.
He said (that) he wrote two letters to her.

be going to to was going to 'They are going to come back.'

She said (that) they were going to come back.

will to would 7 will b e home at 6.00.'

can to could She said (that) she would be home at 6.00.

m There is no change for must, might, could, shoidd, would.

7 m ust leave straightaway for Brussels.'
He said he m ust leave straightaway for Brussels.
But in the case of must we can also use had to.
He said he had to leave straightaway for Brussels.

■ Note that if the actual words were in the past simple, the report can change
or stay the same.

■ Note that if we write down the actual words that someone says we use
speech marks (inverted commas). But if we write down a report of the words
there are no speech marks.

42
 G R A M M A R 11 REPORTED SPEECH 1

No tense changes ■ If the report is about something which is always true, it is not necessary to
change tenses.
7 like apples more than I like oranges.'
She said that she likes apples more than she likes oranges.
But in cases like this it is still possible to change tenses if you want to.

■ If the report is about something that has immediate relevance, we usually do

not change tenses.
Jack speaking to Ted: ‘I'm going to the cinema tonight. Do you want to comeT
Ted reporting the conversation to Peter: ‘Jack is on the phone. He says he's
going to the cinema tonight.'

Speakers in When we write down the actual words, the speaker can be mentioned at the
reported speech beginning or end of the sentence. Notice the position of the comma and the
final full stop in relation to the speech marks.
Jack said, 'We're going to miss the train.'
'We're going to miss the train,' said Jack.
But in reported speech the speaker is only mentioned at the beginning of the
sentence.
Jack said (that) they were going to miss the train.

People, places, In reported speech references to people, places and times often change, because
times the point of view changes.
'I'll see you here tomorrow,' said Sue.
Sue said (that) she would see me there the next day.
7 bought this book yesterday,' said Martin.
Martin said (that) he had bought the book the day before.

Summarizing We usually just summarize what people say when we make reports.
'Look, actually, tell him I'll give him a call or em ail him next week, OK?’
Reported as: She said (that) she'd get in touch next week.
If we report the exact words it is called verbatim reporting.

say, tell, speak We say something and we tell somebody. Say and tell can be followed by the
optional that.
'It's warm today,' she said.
She said (that) it was warm.
She told me (that) it was warm.
We can use to after say, but we never use to after tell.
7 come from Slovenia’
She said to me (that) she comes from Slovenia.
She told me (that) she comes from Slovenia.

Speak describes the act of talking.

Simon spoke to me in the supermarket yesterday.

43
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Sally told that she'd lost her keys.

Sally, stiid tWc\t skcW Lost kcr keys.
b) Chris said me that he must leave early.

c) Maria and Tony said they shall see us tomorrow.

d) Tom said, I'm coming to your party.

e) Sue said that she had wrote a letter to Lisa.

f) Steve said us that he was arriving at 8.00.

g) 'I had bought a new bike Pam told us.'

h) 'What's the matter? Ellen told.

2 Rewrite each sentence in direct speech, ending as shown.

a) Anna told us that she'd finished.

.............................................,' Anna told us.
b) Simon said that he would be back at 6.00.
' .............................................................................. ,' Simon said.
c) Beth said she was going to go shopping.
' .............................................................................. ,' said Beth.
d) Paul said that he wanted to make a phone call.
' .............................................................................. ,' said Paul.
e) Tina told the teacher she'd forgotten her homework.
'.............................................................................. ,' Tina told the teacher.
f) David said he had to be back by 3.30.
' .............................................................................. ,' David said.
g) Jan told me she would let me know.
' .............................................................................. ,' Jan told me.
h) Bill said he was going to be late.
'.............................................................................. ,' Bill said.

44
 G R A M M A R 11 REPORTED SPEECH 1

3 Match each sentence in direct speech (a-e) with its summarized version in
reported speech (1-5).

a) 'Look, sorry about this, but I'm afraid I'm going to be a bit late.' ....3.....
b) 'Actually I've no idea at all where I a m !'............
c) 'The thing is, I know it's silly but I've missed the b u s .'............
d) 'Anyway, I'll be back in next to no tim e .'............
e) 'I did ring, you know, earlier in the ev en in g .'............

1 She said she would be back soon.

2 She said she had missed the bus.
3 She said she was going to be late.
4 She said she had already rung.
5 She said she didn't know where she was.

4 Complete each sentence, using say, tell or speak in an appropriate form.

a) Daniel ...t.Q.id......me that he was playing in the school basketball team.

b) I .................. to Helen, and s h e ....................she would phone you.
c) 'You're lu ck y ,'.................. Steve. ' I .................... you that you would win!'
d) A translator.................. the President what everyone w a s......................
e) 'Look,' I .................. her, 'why don't y o u .................... me what you mean?'
f) I ..................my teacher that I .................... Chinese, but she didn't believe me.

5 Rewrite each sentence in reported speech, beginning as shown.

a) 'I won't be there because I'm having a party,' said Lucy.

Lucy told us that she .M.QkddYl.t...k&.tkaC Z .. j Mt f . .kttYlYV}.....
party.,...............................................................................................................
b) 'I've lost the map and I don't know the way,' said Jack.
Jack told me that h e .............................................................................................................

c) 'When I finish the book, I'm going to watch television,' said Jessica.
Jessica said that w h e n ........................................................................................

d) 'I'm doing some homework but I won't be long,' said Mike.

Mike said that h e ................................................................................

e) 'I got up late and I missed the bus,' said Richard.

Richard said that h e .....................................................

45
 GRAM M AR

12 SB Reported speech

Explanations
Reporting We can report questions with verbs like ask, wonder and want to know. Tense
questions change rules are the same as in Grammar 11.
'Where do you live?’ he asked.
He asked me where I lived. (NOT where I did live)
Do you live in Athens?' he asked.
He wanted to know i f I lived in Athens. (NOT If I did live)

Look at more examples of ‘Wh- questions' (using when, what, why, how etc).
Study the tense changes and word order carefully. Notice that the word order
in a reported question is like a normal statement, with the subject before the
verb.
'Where is the bus station?' she asked.
She asked where the bus station was. (NOT where was-tke bus station)
'What are you doing?' he asked.
He wanted to know what I was doing.
'Why did you go there?' she asked.
She wondered why I had gone there.
'Where have you come from?' he asked.
He asked me where I had come from.

Look at more examples of Yes/No questions (Do you, Did you, Are you etc.).
When we report Yes/No questions we use i f or whether.
'Does the London train stop here?' she asked.
She asked me if the London train stopped here.
Did you speak to Rachel?' he asked.
He wanted to know whether I had spoken to Rachel.
'Are you a student?' she asked.
She asked me if I was a student.

Reporting Commands are reported with tell and the infinitive.

commands and 'Wait! Wait!'
requests I told him to wait.
Requests are reported with ask and the infinitive.
'Please wait!'
I asked her to wait.

46
 G R A M M A R 12 REPORTED SPEECH 2

Other reporting Grammar 11 used say as the reporting verb, but there are many others. Here
verbs are some of the most common:

advise 'I wouldn't buy that car, Janos, i f I were you.'

I advised Janos not to buy the car.
agree 'OK, I'll give you a lift,' said Jenny.
Jenny agreed to give her a lift.
'Yes, Jill, I think you're right,' said Mike.
Mike agreed with Jill.
apologize for 'I'm really sorry for being so late,' said Maria.
Maria apologized for being late.
ask 'Do you think you could help me, Sue?'
I asked Sue to help me.
congratulate on 'Well done, Tina, you've passed the exam!'
I congratulated Tina on passing her exam.
decide 'I'll have the fish soup, please,' said Bill.
Bill decided to have the fish soup.
deny 'No, I didn't take it! I wasn't even there!' said Alice.
Alice denied taking it.
invite 'Would you like to come to the cinema on Saturday, Pam?'
I invited Pam to the cinema on Saturday.
offer 'Shall I carry your case, Dawn?' said Peter.
Peter offered to carry Dawn's case.
promise 'I'll definitely be home by eight,' said Ann.
Ann promised to be home by eight.
refuse 'No, I won't open the door!' said Carol.
Carol refused to open the door.
remind 'Don't forget to send your mother a birthday card, Joe.'
I reminded Joe to send his mother a birthday card.
suggest 'How about spending the day at the beach?' said Carlos.
Carlos suggested spending the day at the beach.

Reporting verbs can have one or more different patterns. A good dictionary
shows this information. Study the example sentences in the previous section
in relation to the patterns below.

Verb + to infinitive: agree, decide, offer, promise, refuse

Verb + object + to infinitive: advise, ask, invite, remind
Verb + -lug form: deny, suggest
Verb + preposition + -ing form: apologize for, congratulate on

|-»|ee a ls o

Gram m ar 11: Reported

speech 1

47
INTERM EDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Put one suitable word in each space.

a) Fiona asked me I ...M 'W ...........going to school or not.

b) David asked his m o th er........................ s h e ..........................be coming home.
c) Peter asked u s ........................ w e ..........................ever been to Hungary.
d) Costas asked m e ........................ I ..........................many photographs.
e) Maria asked a policem an........................ the museum was.
f) Dora asked her sister........................ s h e .......................... fed their dog.

2 Complete each question in direct speech, ending as shown.

a) Jack asked me whether I was having lunch or going out.

................... ? ' Jack asked me.
b) Carol asked Ann what she had done the day before.
'.........................................................................................................., Ann?' asked Carol.
c) John asked us if we often went sailing.
'..........................................................................................................?' John asked us.
d) Christine asked me how many German books I had read.
'.......................................................................................................... ?' Christine asked me.
e) Kevin asked Sue if she was going to change schools.
'.......................................................................................................... , Sue?' asked Kevin.
f) Alice asked me who I sat next to in class.
' .......................................................................................................... ?' Alice asked me.

3 Rewrite each sentence in reported speech, beginning as shown. Do not change

the meaning.

a) 'Are you staying here all summer?' the little girl asked me.
The little girl asked me S fa y iq # ..t k c r t ..<?[//..SiA m m U .,..
b) 'What does 'procrastinate' mean?' I asked my teacher.
I asked my teacher ..............................................................................................................
c) 'Have you done your homework, or not?' my mother asked me.
My mother asked me .........................................................................................................
d) 'When is your birthday?' I asked Sue.
I asked S u e ..............................................................................................................................
e) 'Did you remember to lock the door,' my father asked me.
My father asked me .............................................................................................................
f) 'Why have you turned off the television?' Ellen asked me.
Ellen asked me .....................................................................................................................

48
 G R A M M A R 12 REPORTED SPEECH 2

4 Use a verb from the box to rewrite each sentence in reported speech, beginning
as shown. Do not change the meaning.

advised apologized congratulated invited offered

promised refused suggested

a) 'I'll definitely be at your house before 8.00, Sue,' said Mike.

Mike ..p.MMM$d.. Sue .M .M&tdd...fefc.M ..k & c ..h /j.w A ..h f$ .r& .L Q O
b) 'Would you like to come to the cinema, Jean?' asked Chris.
Chris ..............................................................................................................................
c) 'I wouldn't eat too much if I were you, Dave/ said Patsy.
Patsy ..............................................................................................................................
d) 'How about going for a walk?' said Nick.
Nick ...............................................................................................................................
e) 'I'm terribly sorry for breaking the window,' said Carol.
Carol ..............................................................................................................................
f) 'Shall I do the washing-up?' said Bill.
Bill .................................................................................................................................
g) 'Well done, you've passed your driving test,' said Tina's mother.
Tina's m o th er..................................... her ...............................................................
h) 'No, I won't open my mouth!' said Pat.
Pat .................................................................................................................................

49
 GRAMMAR

13 Conditionals 1

Explanations
Conditions and
results ■ Sentences with I f are called conditionals. The I f ... clause is the condition
and the other part of the sentence is the result. Here are four examples of
conditionals, used for talking about checking in at the airport for a flight:
1 I f you arrive early, you get a better seat.
2 I f you arrive early, you'll get a better seat.
3 I f you arrived early, you'd get a better seat.
4 I f you had arrived early, you'd have got a better seat.

m Sentence 1 is talking generally about something that is always true. It is

sometimes called a zero conditional.
Sentence 2 is talking about something that is likely to happen in the future.
It is sometimes called the first conditional.
Sentence 3 is talking about something that is unlikely to happen in the
future, or an imaginary situation. It is sometimes called the second
conditional.
Sentence 4 is talking about something that is imaginary in the past. It is
sometimes called the third conditional.

■ Zero, first and second conditionals are covered in this unit. The third
conditional is covered in Grammar 14.
Zero conditional:
■ This type of sentence describes things that are always or generally true. We
lf+ present
can use when or i f to introduce the sentence.
simple, ... present
It's a tropical country, and so if it rains hard, everyone stays indoors.
simple
When it rains hard, everyone stays indoors.

■ There can be an imperative structure in the result clause: just the bare
infinitive with no subject. An imperative is when we tell people what to do.
I f you feel dizzy, stop taking the tablets.
I f you change your mind, give me a ring.
First conditional: If
■ This type of sentence describes future events that will happen, or are likely
+ present simple,
to happen. It is a real possibility in the speaker's mind, not imaginary (for
... will/won't
imaginary situations see the second conditional).
I f we walk so slowly, we'll be late.
I f we run, we won't be late.
I f we don't run, we will be late.

50
 G R A M M A R 13 C O N D ITI O NA L S 1

m Example: You are at the supermarket with a friend. Your friend has put some
eggs in a bag, and is picking up lots of other bags at the same time. You say:
I f you carry too many bags, you'll drop the eggs.
I f you drop the eggs, they'll break.
I f the eggs break, there will be an awful mess on the floor!
I f you are careful, you won't break them.

m In the condition clause it is possible to use other present tenses, not just the
present simple.
I f you're driving, I'll come with you. (present continuous)
I f I've seen the film before, I'll let you know! (present perfect)

Second ■ This type of sentence describes future events that are imaginary, unlikely or
conditional: lf + impossible.
past simple, ... I f I h a d a helicopter, I'd fly to school.
would/wouldn't I f I flew to school, I wouldn't be late.

■ Example: You start talking to a friend about aliens. You say:

I f some aliens landed on earth, I'd make friends with them.
I f they didn't speak English, I'd use sign language.
I f they took me back to their planet, I'd learn their language.
I f anyone believed my story, I'd become famous!

■ Note that would is usually contracted in speech.

I'd become famous. (= I would become famous.)

■ Note that the past simple is used in the condition clause, but the time
reference is the future.

■ The regular past simple of to be is I was and He/She was. We can use these
forms in second conditionals, or alternatively we can use I f I were and I f
he/she were. The were form is more formal.
I f I was/were an astronaut, I'd enjoy being weightless!

unless Unless means I f not. Compare these sentences which have the same meaning.
We'll go out for a walk if it doesn't rain.
We'll go out for a walk unless it rains.

Other uses of We use would in other situations which do not involve conditional sentences.
would
Reporting what someone said: He said he would call back later.
Polite offer: Would you like some more tea?
Polite request: Would you open the window, please?
Someone refused to do The minister wouldn't
something: answer the question.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 14: Conditionals 2

51
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) If we'd be/we're late for class, our teacher will be/was angry.
b) If we would live/lived on another planet, we'll see/we'd see the Earth in the sky.
c) If we take/will take a taxi, we arrived/we’ll arrive sooner.
d) If we won't hurry/don't hurry, we'll be/we'd be late.
e) If we were/are birds, we would be able to/are able to fly.
f) If you don’t wear/wouldn't wear your pullover, you'll feel/you felt cold.
g) If I studied/will study harder, I get/would get better marks.
h) If I have/had a motorbike, I rode/I'd ride it to school.
i) If you will lend/lend me your bike, I'll let/I let you borrow my skateboard,
j) If I had/have lots of money, I gave/I'd give some to all my friends.

2 Complete the sentence for each situation using the verbs given.

a) You're standing very close to the edge of a swimming-pool. You're wearing

all your clothes, not a swimming costume. A friend says:
If you (fall in) ....., your clothes (get) wet!
b) You're sitting in the classroom on a hot day. You're day-dreaming about
going to the beach. You think:
If today (b e )........................ a holiday, I (g o )..........................to the beach.
c) You can't answer a question in your English book. You ask a friend to help,
but she doesn't know the answer. She says:
If I (know )........................ the answer, I (te ll)..........................you.
d) You're walking towards the bus stop with a friend. Suddenly the bus arrives.
The bus stop is far away, but you think there is a chance of catching the bus.
You say:
If we (ru n )........................ , we (c a tch ).......................... it!
e) You're planning to go to the beach tomorrow with some friends. You are not
sure about the weather, because it sometimes rains at this time of the year.
You arrange to meet tomorrow afternoon and say:
If it (ra in )........................ , we (g o )..........................to the cinema instead.
f) You're very busy, because you have lots of school work, and you also play in
two teams. A friend asks you to join a computer club. You say:
If I (h av e)........................ more free time, I (jo in )..........................the club.
But it's impossible at the moment because I'm too busy!

52
 G R A M M A R 13 CONDITIONALS 1

Complete each sentence using if, unless or would.

a) If he asked me to help him, I .........

b) We'll have lunch outside in the gard en,........................ it's too cold.
c) J o h n ........................ win more races if he trained harder.
d) Come o n ! ........................ we hurry, we'll miss the plane!
e) you like to see my stamp collection?
f) The manager won't be long...........................you take a seat, please.
g) I'm sure that C o n n ie ........................ go to the cinema with you, if you asked
her.
h) you feel like a chat, phone me tonight.
i) W h a t........................ you do if you saw a snake?
j) I don't feel h ap p y........................ I swim every day.

Complete each sentence (a-j) with an ending (1-10).

a) If you play the music too loud, 1 the alarm would go off.
b) If the North Pole melted, ............ 2 I'll buy a new bike.
c) If we don't have enough ice-cream ,............ 3 I'll be in Paris at 6.00.
d) If I found someone's w allet,............ 4 you wouldn't see me any
more!
e) If a burglar broke into this h o u se,............ 5 you would feel better.
f) If my train isn't la te ,............ 6 the water would flood
many cities.
g) If you were fam ous,............ 7 I'll buy it for you.
h) If my father lends me the m on ey ,............ 8 you'll wake up the
neighbours.
i) If you took more exercise,............ 9 we'll get some more.
j) If you tell me what you w a n t,............ 10 I'd take it to the police
station.

53
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence as either a first conditional or a second conditional

sentence using the verb in brackets.

a) If I (have) . . . h # d ..... arms five metres long, I (be able) ........to

reach the top of that shelf!
b) D on't worry, you've just got a cold. If you (ta k e )...................an aspirin, you
( fe e l)......................................better.
c) Vegetarians believe that if nobody ( e a t) ................... meat, everyone (live)
......................................longer.
d) If I (b e co m e )................... a famous rock star, I (b u y )....................................... my
parents an enorm ous house.
e) It says 'No Parking'. If you (le a v e )...................the car here, the police
(g iv e )......................................you a parking fine.
f) It's n ot far. If you (fo llo w )................... this path, you (c o m e )...................................
to the station.
g) If people (u s e )...................bikes instead of cars, there (not b e ) ................................
so m uch pollution.
h) Actually, Brutus is a very friendly dog. If you (touch) ...................him, he
(not b i t e ) ......................................you.
i) If you (le a v e )...................your books on the desk, I (g iv e ).......................................
them back to you at the end of the lesson.
j) If you (o w n )................... a pet tiger, your friends (not v is it)......................................
you!

54
 GRAMMAR

14 Conditionals 2

Explanations
Third conditional: ■ This type of sentence describes a past event that is different to what really
lf+ past perfect, ... happened.
would/wouldn't + I f you had arrived earlier, we wouldn't have missed the train.
have + past I f you hadn't warned me about the sun, I would have got sunburnt.
participle
m Example: You went for a long walk, but you did not take your umbrella. It
rained, and you got wet.
I f I had taken my umbrella, I wouldn't have got wet.
I f I'd heard the weather forecast, I wouldn't have gone out.
I f I hadn't gone out, I would have finished my homework.

Modal verbs in ■ The examples in Grammar 13 and this unit have all used will/won't or
conditional would/wouldn't in the result clause. But we can use any other m odal verb, like
sentences can, could, may, might, must and should.
I f you ever come to Istanbul, I can show you around the city.
I f you ever come to Istanbul, you must phone me.

■ We often use might and could in conditional sentences when we want to say
that we are n ot certain about the results. Compare:
I f you carry too many bags, you will drop the eggs. (certain result)
I f you carry too many bags, you might drop the eggs. (uncertain result)
I f anyone believed my story, I would become famous! (certain result)
I f anyone believed my story, I could become famous! (uncertain result)

In third conditional sentences we use could have (done) or might have (done) .
I f I had brought some more money with me, I could have taken a taxi.

Conditionals In everyday speech we can use imagine or supposing in place of if.

without if Imagine you saw a snake, what would you do?
Supposing you owned a helicopter, what would you use it for?

If I were you, ... We can give advice by using a second conditional sentence beginning I f I were
you.
I f I were you, I'd spend more time on your written work.
I f I were you, I wouldn't eat so much chocolate!
It is also possible to put the if-clause at the end.
I'd be more careful, if I were you.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 13: Conditionals 1

G ram m ar 18: Modals 1
G ram m ar 19: Modals 2

55
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Rewrite each comment, beginning as shown. Do not change the meaning.

a) Supposing
ig you had wings, what would you do?
W hat
b) W hy d on't you leave now? That's what I'd do.
I f ..................................................................................................
c) Im agine you lived on Mars. How would you feel?
H o w ............................................................................................
d) I think you should buy a bike. That's what I'd do.
I f ..................................................................................................
e) Im agine you were rich. W hat would you do?
W h a t ..........................................................................................
f) Supposing Jim came with us, what would you say?
W h a t ..........................................................................................
g) W hy don't you take the bus. That's what I'd do.
I f ..................................................................................................
h) Imagine you owned a robot. W hat would you do?
W h a t ..........................................................................................

2 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) If you phoned/had phoned me yesterday, I had siven/would have given you the
news.
b) If you took/would have taken more exercise, you might feel/had felt better.
c) If Tim drove/had driven more carefully, he wouldn't have crashed/didn’t crash.
d) If you had come/came to see the film, you had enjoyed/would have enjoyed it.
e) If I'd known/I would know it was your birthday, I would send/would have sent
you a card.
f) If people had helped/helped one another more often, the world might be/was a
better place.
g) If our team had scored/scored more goals, we had won/could have won.
h) If you would have worn/wore a coat, you wouldn't get/didn't get wet.

56
 G R A M M A R 14 CONDITIONALS 2

3 Complete the sentence for each situation.

a) Charlotte didn't leave early, and so she missed the bus.

If C h a rlo tte ............... .................................................................................... , she
vJOiddyCt'UAVc m is s e d . th e bus.

b) I didn't buy more milk, so I didn't have enough for breakfast.

If I ................................................................................................... , I
................................................................................................... enough for breakfast.
c) We forgot to take a map, so we got lost in the mountains.
If w e ...................................................................................................., we
................................................................................................... in the mountains.
d) I didn't go to bed early, so I didn't wake up at 7.00.
If I ................................................................................................... early, I
................................................................................................... at 7.00.
e) Mike didn't make a shopping list, and he forgot to buy some coffee.
If M ik e ................................................................................................... , he
................................................................................................... some coffee.
f) I didn't realize you were tired when I asked you to go for a walk.
If I ................................................................................................... , I
................................................................................................... for a walk.
g) The Romans didn't sail across the Atlantic, so they didn't reach America.
If the R o m a n s...................................................................................................., they
................................................................................................... America.
h) I didn't turn left at the station, and I lost my way.
If I ................................................................................................... , I
................................................................................................... my way.

57
 Explanations
Wishes about the m For wishes about the present we use I wish + the past simple. Note the
present relationship with the second conditional.
I wish I owned a helicopter. I f I owned a helicopter, I would be happy.
I wish I didn't have to go to school! I f I didn't go to school, I would be happy.

m could
We use I wish I could to refer to som ething that is difficult or impossible. This
can refer to the present or future.
I wish I could fly!
I wish I could stay at home tomorrow.

■ As in the second conditional, the past simple form does not refer to past
tim e.

Wishes about the For wishes about the past we use I wish + the past perfect. Note the relationship
past with the third conditional.
I wish I had lived in the eighteenth century! I f I had lived in the eighteenth
century, I would have been happy.
I wish I hadn't eaten so much! I feel awful! If I hadn't eaten so much, it
would have been better for me!

hope If the wish is a good one, we use I hope. This is not followed by a conditional
form - it is simply followed by the present simple or will.
I hope you have a good time at the party.
I hope the weather will be fine tomorrow.

If only We can replace I wish with I f only for emphasis. We stress only in speech.
I f only I owned a helicopter.
I f only I hadn't eaten so much!

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar IB: Conditionals

G ram m ar 14: Conditionals

58
 G R A M M A R 15 WISHES

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I'm sunburnt. I wish I hadn’t sunbathed/didn't sunbathe for so long.

b) I don't feel well. I wish I could stay/stayed at hom e tomorrow.
c) I'm not a good swimmer, but I wish I could swim/would swim well.
d) I wish I had/have a puppy or a kitten!
e) I wish I could see/saw you tomorrow, but it's impossible.
f) I wish Jim didn’t sit/doesn't sit next to me. He's so annoying!
g) If only we had/would have some m oney we could take the bus.
h) I hope you enjoyed/enjoy yourselves at the dance tomorrow.
i) I wish I can/could speak English better!
j) I hope I'll/I'd win the lottery!

2 Underline the correct continuation for each sentence.

a) I've got lots of work to do, and I'm tired, but I can 't stop.
1 I wish I had taken a rest. 2 I wish I could take a rest.
b) I wasn't paying attention in class, and now I can 't do my homework.
1 I wish I listened to my teacher. 2 I wish I'd listened to m y teacher.
c) Sarah painted her room green, but she doesn't like it.
1 She wishes she'd painted it blue. 2 She wishes she painted it blue.
d) This is a very puzzling problem!
1 I wish I'd known the answer. 2 I wish I knew the answer.
e) It's really cold and m iserable here in the winter.
1 I wish we lived in a warm place. 2 I hope we live in a warm place.
f) I can't repair my bike because I haven't got any tools.
1 If only I would have a screwdriver. 2 If only I had a screwdriver.
g) I'm worried about m y basketball team. Perhaps they w on't win!
1 I wish they play well. 2 I hope they play well.
h) You promised not to tell anyone my secrets but you did!
1 I wish I h adn't told you. 2 I wish I didn't tell you.
i) I've been feeling ill all week.
1 I hope I feel better soon. 2 I hope I'd feel better soon,
j) I want to see my sister. I haven't seen her for ages.
1 I wish I could speak to her. 2 I wish I spoke to her.

59
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete each sentence with a suitable form of the verb in brackets.

a) I'm soaked to the skin! If only I (bring) ........an umbrella!

b) This pullover was cheap. I wish I (b u y ).......................................... two of them!
c) I like your school. I wish I (go) ...........................................there too.
d) I must get in touch with Sue. If only I (k n o w ).......................................... her
phone number!
e) This bus is really slow! I wish we (ta k e )...........................................the train.
f) I'm disappointed in this camera. I wish I (not b u y ) .......................................... it.
g) I answered three questions well. If only I (fin is h ).......................................... the
whole test!
h) I can 't understand Marie! I wish I (sp e ak )...........................................French.

4 Complete each sentence in a suitable way.

a) I'm hungry. If only with me.

b) Enjoy your holiday. I h o p e ....................................................time.
c) This is a lovely place. I wish w e ................................................... before.
d) It's a pity you live so far away. If only y o u ................................................... nearer.
e) Ellen is a fantastic dancer. I wish I ................................................... as well as her!

5 Rita isn't very happy at the moment. Complete her words.

a) Rita wasted a lot of m oney on DVDs.

'I wish I ........... so m uch m oney on expensive DVDs!'
b) Rita thinks new jobs are difficult to find.
'I wish new jo b s ....................................................so difficult to find.'
c) Rita thinks new jobs are difficult to find.
'I wish new jo b s ....................................................easier to find.'
d) Rita can 't go on holiday this summer.
'I wish I ....................................................on holiday.'
e) Rita doesn't have very good qualifications.
'I wish I ....................................................better qualifications.'
f) Rita has to do the washing up. She hates doing it.
'I wish I ....................................................do the washing up.'
g) Rita is sorry her fam ily moved to the suburbs.
'I wish w e ....................................................to the suburbs.'
h) Rita thinks she is very untidy.
'I wish I ....................................................so untidy.'

60
 Explanations
Passive: form To make the passive we use be and a past participle. Compare the active and
passive forms in these examples:

Present simple The Government builds hundreds o f houses every year.

Hundreds o f houses are built every year.

Present continuous The authorities are questioning two men.

Two men are being questioned by the authorities.

Present perfect We have chosen Helen as the new president.

Helen has been chosen as the new president.

Past simple The police arrested one protester.

One protester was arrested.

will They will play the match on Wednesday evening.

The match will be played on Wednesday evening.

Notice how the object in the active form (hundreds o f houses, two men, Helen)
moves to the front in the passive sentence and becom es the subject.

Passive: use Focus on im portant inform ation

Compare:
(active) The Government built hundreds o f houses last year.
(passive) Hundreds o f houses were built by the Government last year.

In the active sentence more emphasis is given to who did the action - the
Governm ent.
In the passive sentence more emphasis is given to the thing affected by the
action - the num ber of houses.
Emphasized inform ation usually comes at the beginning of the sentence.

Spoken and written

The passive is used more in writing and formal speech.

Using by and with The person or organization that does the action is called 'th e agent'. If we
want to say who does the action then we use by.
Hundreds o f houses were built last year.
Hundreds o f houses were built by the Government last year.
A lot o f stones were thrown.
A lot o f stones were thrown by angry football fans.

The thing that is used to perform an action is called 'th e instrum ent'. If we
want to include this we use with.
The windows were broken with a baseball bat.

61
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Sentences without It is n ot always necessary to m ention the agent. There are several reasons for
an agent this:

■ Agent n ot known: Brenda's motorbike was stolen last night.

If we knew who had stolen it, we would m ention the name of the person.
But we don't know and the agent is not m entioned.

■ Agent obvious: One protester was arrested.

It is not necessary to add the words 'by the police', because we know that it
is always the police who do this. However, it is possible to add these words if
we want to.

■ Agent unim portant: A lot o f English grammar books are sold every year.
Exactly who sells the books is n ot im portant. If it was im portant we could
use by and the nam es of the people or shops who sell the books.

Transitive and ■ Verbs w hich have objects are called transitive verbs (example: help). In this
intransitive verbs sentence, 'th e old lady' is the object.
A young man helped the old lady across the road.

■ Verbs w hich do n ot have objects are called intransitive verbs (example:

walk).
Diane walks to college.

■ Dictionaries show this inform ation with T or I. Only transitive verbs can be
made passive.
The old lady was helped across the road by a young man.

62
 C R A M M A R 16 PASSIVE 1

Practice

Underline phrases which are not necessary in these sentences. Sometimes every
phrase is necessary.

a) My wallet has been stolen by som eone.

b) We were taught by a different teacher yesterday.
c) Nick was operated on at the hospital by a doctor.
d) The meal was served by a waiter in a red coat.
e) We were shown round the museum by a guide.
f) Two letters were delivered this m orning by the postm an.
g) Three m en have been arrested by the police.
h) Yesterday a window was broken by someone.

2 Complete each sentence with a passive verb.

a) The police questioned George.

George ......... by the police.
b) M illions of people watch this programme.
This p ro gram m e....................................................by m illions of people.
c) They will finish our new house at the end of the m onth.
Our new h o u s e ....................................................at the end of the m onth.
d) They've elected a new president.
A new p re sid en t......................................................
e) They’re rebuilding the damaged stadium.
The damaged stad iu m ......................................................
f) They've closed the m ountain road.
The m ountain r o a d ......................................................
g) Students write most of this magazine.
Most of this m ag azin e....................................................by students.
h) A burglar stole my laptop.
My la p to p ....................................................by a burglar.
i) Somebody will m eet you at the bus station.
Y o u ................................................... at the bus station
j) United won the cup last year.
Last year the c u p ....................................................by United.

63
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Many pet dogs are losing every year.

M any .p zt.d p js.flrc Lost. every . y ea r..............................
b) The injured m an was been taken to hospital.

c) A new bridge is be built across the river.

d) All the food at the party was ate.

e) Nothing will being decided before next Saturday.

f) The m atch is playing on Friday evening.

g) The robber unlocked the door by a false key.

h) This book was writing by Sam's father.

4 For every question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Archaeologists have discovered a new tom b in Egypt.

A new tom b . . .)?.& & W - . V&T.cM.... by archaeologists in Egypt.
b) The President will open the new sports stadium on Saturday.
The new sports stad iu m ....................................................... by the President on
Saturday.
c) Picasso painted this portrait.
This p o r tra it....................................................... Picasso.
d) They will announce the results of the com petition tomorrow.
The results of the c o m p e titio n ....................................................... tomorrow.
e) They're redecorating our school during the summer holidays.
Our s c h o o l........................................................during the summer holidays.
f) The police in New York have arrested three terrorists.
Three terro rists....................................................... in New York.
g) Our com pany sells more than 1,000 cars every week.
More than 1,000 c a r s ....................................................... our company every week.
h) They're building a new museum in the city centre.
A new m u seu m ....................................................... in the city centre.

64
 G R A M M A R 16 PASSIVE 1

5 Rewrite each sentence with a passive verb, and so that the names of people are
not mentioned.

a) The authorities have closed the casino.

The, casino has been, dosed.
b) The clubs have postponed the m atch.

c) People all over the world speak English.

d) The authorities have opened the new swimming pool.

e) Som eone left this purse in the classroom yesterday.

f) The city council has banned traffic from the city centre.

g) People have elected a new governm ent.

h) Som eone broke into the flat last week.

65
 GRAMMAR

17 Passive 2

Explanations
Verbs with two ■ Some verbs can have two objects. We can:
objects give, lend, offer, promise, sell, send, take so m eth in g to som ebody
buy, keep, make, prepare, save so m eth in g for som ebody.

■ In active sentences we can use these verbs in two ways:

Peter gave Karen a present.
Peter gave a present to Karen.
Each way can be made passive:
Karen was given a present by Peter.
A present was given to Karen by Peter.

■ The form w ithout to/for is more usual, in both active and passive sentences.

to be born To be born is a passive form but does not have an obvious passive meaning.
I was born in Uruguay.

have something m W hen a professional person, e.g. a m echanic, a plumber etc. does some work
done for us, we can use have something done. Have can be used in any tense.
We had our house painted last year.
I'm having my car serviced tomorrow.
I've had my room decorated.

■ We also use this for unpleasant happenings.

She had her house broken into.
Tim had his arm broken playing rugby.

Passive + infinitive ■ The verbs believe, expect, know, report, say, think, suppose, understand are often
used in the present simple passive followed by an infinitive (to do/to be
doing). This use is com m on in news reports.
The economy is expected to grow by 2% this year.
Beckham is said to be considering a transfer from Manchester United.
The new shopping centre is supposed to open next spring.

66
 G R A M M A R 17 P A S S I V E 2

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I'm having my hair cutting/cut/to have cut tomorrow.

b) The children were took/taken/taking to the seaside for the day.
c) I was sending/sent/send here by the manager.
d) Kate is having her car services/servicing/serviced tomorrow.
e) Sue had her windows breaking/broken/broke by vandals.
f) David has been offer/offering/offered a new job in Brazil.
g) W here exactly were you born/did you born/did you bear?
h) I've just had my bike repaired/repair/repairing.
i) I was given/gave/did give this book by Emily.
j) This cake makes/made/was made for her birthday.

2 Rewrite each sentence beginning and ending as shown. Do not change the
meaning.

a) Som eone stole Bob's bike.

Bob bike stolen.
b) Jo h n lent me this book.
This b o o k .......................... Jo h n .
c) The dentist took out one of my teeth yesterday.
Yesterday I ............................. out.
d) Cairo is my place of birth.
I ................................................................................ in Cairo.
e) A rock concert ticket was sold to me by a friend.
I w a s ........................................................................... by a friend.
f) Someone broke into Tom's house last week.
Tom h a d .................................................................... last week.
g) W hen is your date of birth?
W hen e x a c tly .............................. born?
h) My parents gave me this ring.
I ................................................................................ parents.
i) I'm keeping this bottle of wine for a special occasion.
This bottle of wine for a special
occasion.
j) We will send you a letter with your exam results.
A letter ................................................................................. to you with your exam
results.

67
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) They're servicing my car tomorrow,

h av in g
I'm k^ving _. vviy coi r scrvice^l towwrroW . ............................................................................
b) Yesterday they stole my bike,
had

c) Last year they painted our house,

had

d) They're taking out my tooth tomorrow!

h av in g

e) They've just cut my hair,

had

f) They're fitting our new carpet tomorrow,

h a v in g

g) They've just painted Ann's portrait,

had

4 Rewrite the first sentence as a news report using present simple passive +
infinitive.

a) Lots of people believe the crim inal is living abroad.

The crim inal .t.Q.. } ? & . . . . abroad.
b) Econom ists suppose that inflation will fall next year.
In fla tio n ............................................................... next year.
c) Everyone expects that Arsenal will win the League.
A rsen a l...............................................................the League.
d) People think the Governm ent is planning a new airport.
The G o v e rn m e n t...............................................................a new airport.
e) They say he is making a new movie about the Civil War.
H e ...............................................................a new movie about the Civil War.
f) Journalists report that the Finance M inister disagrees with the President.
The Finance M in iste r...............................................................with the President.

68
 GRAMMAR

18 Modals 1: present and fut

Explanations
Modal verbs: form ■ Modal verbs are auxiliary verbs - they are used with other m ain verbs. Modal
and meaning verbs are can, could, will, would, may, might, shall, should and must.

■ Note these im portant rules:

- two m odal verbs cannot be put together
(NOT He can will meet you temermwr)
- modal verbs are followed by the infinitive w ithout to.
(NOT He must to meet you tomorrow.)
- m odal verbs do n ot have third person s
(NOT He cans meet you tomorrow.)
- modal verbs do n ot form tenses with -ing, -ed etc.
(NOT I'm sorry I canned not meet you yesterday.-)
- modal verbs use inversion in questions (like the verb be), n ot do/does
(NOT Do can you meet me tomorrow?)

■ Questions are made by putting the m odal in front of the subject. Negatives
are made by putting not im m ediately after the modal (often shortened to -n't
in spoken and inform al written English).
Can I ...? I cannot (can't)
Could I ...? I could not (couldn't)
W i l l i ...? I will not (won't)
Would I ...? I would not (wouldn't)
May I ...? I may not
Might I ...? I might not
Shall I ...? I shall not (shan't)
Should I ...? I should not (shouldn't)
Must I ...? I must not (mustn't)

■ Modal verbs show the speaker's attitude or feelings about a situation. For
example how probable or necessary som ething is, or that the speaker is
offering or requesting som ething. The same modal verb can be used in
different ways with different m eanings - you only know from the situation.

Ability ■ To talk about ability we use can and can't (or cannot in formal writing)
I can swim. Can you swim?

m Pronunciation: can is norm ally unstressed /kan/, but is stressed for emphasis
/kaen/.
A: Can you speak Chinese?
B: No, but I can speak Japanese.

69
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

We sometim es use be able to instead of can. Be able to forms tenses.

Will you be able to help me move my furniture tomorrow?

Can and can't are also used for permission: to describe what is allowed or not
allowed.
Can I leave early, please?
I can't come skating tomorrow.

Certainty and Study this table of probability and the notes below:
uncertainty
100% certainty will
9 5 % -1 0 0 % deduction must, can't
80% expectation should
3 0 % -7 0 % uncertainty may, might, could
0% certainty won't

We use will and won't w hen we are certain about som ething in the future.

We use must and can't for another type of certainty called 'deduction'. This is
w hen we know som ething is certain because it is logical, or when we make
an assum ption because of the facts of the situation.
He must be stuck in the traffic.
(I'm sure he is - it's the only possibility)
She can't be in Italy! I saw her today!
(I'm sure she isn't - it's impossible)

We use should w hen we expect that som ething will happen.

They should arrive here at about 6.30.

We use may, might and could for uncertainty.

I may not have time to finish tonight. (I don't know)
President Jones might win the next election. (It's possible)
I may /might have some news for you next week. (perhaps I will)
He could be stuck in the traffic. (perhaps he is)

Obligation We use must or have to to explain that som ething is necessary.

I must finish my homework before 8.00.
I have to phone Jan at 9.00.

In writing there is no real difference between must and have to. In speech
there is a small difference:

We use have to when the situation makes som ething necessary, for example
because of official rules.
At our school, we have to wear a uniform.
Every player in a football team has to have a number.
When the traffic lights are red, you have to stop.
In everyday speech, we can use have got to instead of have to.

70
 G R A M M A R 18 M O D A L S 1: P R E S E N T A N D F U T U R E

We use must when the speaker personally feels that som ething is im portant.
You really must stop working so hard and try to relax.
You must be here by 8.00, or the bus will leave without you.
Note that we do n ot use to after must.

■ In their negative forms mustn't and don't have to have different m eanings.

Mustn't describes an action w hich is prohibited/forbidden.

You m ustn't cross the road when the red light is showing.
Don't have to describes an action w hich is n ot necessary - you have a choice.
You don't have to turn on the central heating. It's automatic.

Opinions and ■ We use should and shouldn't to give an opinion about what is the best thing
advice to do. W hen we speak to another person our opinion becom es advice.
I think the police should arrest hooligans. (opinion)
I think you should talk to your teacher about it. (advice)
Note the other use of should for expectation, m entioned earlier in this unit.

■ We can use ought to and ought not to in the same way as should and shouldn't.
Ought to is n ot as com m on as should and is a little more formal.
I think you ought to talk to your teacher about it.

m Note that with think in the negative, we use I don't think + should rather than
the negative forms of should and ought to.
I don't think you should/ought to go.

m Had better is used for strong opinions. Had is usually contracted.

I think you'd better talk to your teacher about it.
We'd better not forget to turn off the computer!

SEE ALSO

Grammar 24: Functions

71
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Look at those clouds. I think it can/might/must rain.

b) This is impossible! It can't be/mustn't be/may not be the answer.
c) Well done! You may be/must be/might be very pleased!
d) I've no idea where Jan e is. She could be/must be anywhere!
e) I suppose it's possible. I might/can/must com e to your party.
f) I'm not sure. I must not/may not be able to get there in time.
g) That can't be/mustn't be/may not be David. He hasn't got a bike.
h) Lisa isn't here yet. She can be/must be on her way.
i) There's someone at the door. It can be/could be the postman.
j) Sorry, I can't come/may not come out tonight. I have to do my homework.

2 Rewrite each sentence, using can, can't, might or must, and beginning and ending
as shown.

a) Sarah is really good at swimming.

Sarah ... well.
b) It's possible that our team will win.
Our t e a m .................................................. win.
c) I'm sure this isn't the right road.
T h is ........................................................ the right road.
d) I'm sure you work very hard!
Y o u ................................................. very hard.
e) Caroline isn't allowed to com e to our party.
Caroline to our party.
f) It's possible that I'll see you tomorrow, but I'm n ot sure.
I , but I'm not sure.
g) I'm afraid that your teacher is unable to come today.
I'm afraid t h a t ............................................ today.
h) I'm sure it's very hot here in summer.
It here in summer.
i) Excuse me, is it all right if I open the window?
Excuse me, the window?
j) I suppose you're Mrs Perry. How do you do?
You Mrs Perry. How do you do?

72
 G R A M M A R 18 M O D A L S 1: P R E S E N T A N D F U T U R E

3 Decide whether each pair of sentences have a similar meaning, or whether they
are different. Write 5 for same or D for different.

a) You'd better go. You should go.

b) You d on't have to press this button. You m ustn't press this button.
c) You should have a rest. You ought to have a rest.............
d) You must be crazy! You should be crazy! .........
e) You must be here before 8.30. You have to be here before 8.30.
f) You m ustn't do that! You don't have to do that! .........
g) You shouldn't eat so m uch. You ought n ot to eat so much.
h) We have to work harder. We must work harder.............
i) I'd better write my letters. I must write my letters.............
i) I ought to leave now. I have to leave now.............

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) It would be a good idea for you to see a dentist,

ought
J m ff.
b) It's not necessary for us to go to school tomorrow,
have

c) I'm sure that isn't Joh n , because he's in Paris,

be

d) Perhaps Ann is at home,

be

e) You ought to wear a warm coat today,

had

f) It's possible that I'll be late,

m ay

g) I wouldn't go skiing if I were you.

th in k

h) It is forbidden to leave your bike here,

ca n 't

73
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable modal auxiliary.

a) Soldiers ...h$Y & ..........to obey orders.

b) I think y o u ......................... take your umbrella.
c) Sorry, I ......................... go now. I don't want to be late.
d) I'm not sure, but I ......................... be able to help you.
e) Francesca isn't at hom e, so s h e ......................... be on her way here.
f) W e ......................... better not leave any windows open.
g) I t ......................... be a star, it's too bright. Perhaps it's an alien spaceship!
h) I d o n 't ......................... to go to work today. It's a holiday.
i) Sorry, but I w a s n 't......................... to finish all the work you gave me.
j) I think y o u .......................... to ask your teacher for some advice.

6 Rewrite each sentence so that it does not contain the phrase in italics.

a) I f I were you I'd take m ore exercise.

. I..think. ymA. b&MZ.yvn.
b) I expect the plane will land soon.

c) You are not allowed to use a dictionary.

d) It's impossible for that to be Sue. She's abroad.

e) It's possible that I'll com e to your party.

f) It's against the law to drop litter in the street.

g) It's not necessary for you to wait.

h) You'd better stay in bed today.

74
 GRAMM AR

19 Modals 2: past

Explanations
Ability ■ To talk about general past ability we use could, couldn't and was able to.
Jane could swim/was able to swim when she was ten.
To talk about one specific past action we only use was able to.
When David fell in the river, Jane was able to rescue him.

Certainty and The form is: modal + have + past participle. Compare with Grammar 18:
uncertainty You must have left your passport on the plane.
(deduction: I'm sure you did)
Lina can't have written this.
(deduction: I'm sure she didn't)
Maria might/may/could have taken the bus.
(uncertainty: perhaps she did)

Obligation ■ To talk about obligation in the past we use had to, didn't have to, didn't need
to, needn't have done. There is no past form of must.
When I was at school, we had to/didn't have to wear a uniform.

■ In strict grammar there is a difference between didn't need to and needn't have
done.
I didn't need to do any homework yesterday. (I had a choice)
I needn't have done any homework yesterday. (I did it, but it wasn't
necessary)
But in everyday speech we use didn't need to for both cases.

Opinions and ■ The form is: modal + have + past participle. Compare with Grammar 18:
advice I think you should have worked harder.
You shouldn't have eaten so much!
We can use ought to have done and ought not to have done in the same way.

■ These forms mean that we are making a criticism . So in the examples above
we are saying 'I think you were wrong'.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 18: Modals 1

75
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words. Contractions count as one word.

a) I'm sure you dropped your wallet at the bus stop.

You . . hS.YP..dxQ fflfrd.. your wallet at the bus stop.
b) Maybe Joan n a missed the last bus.
J o a n n a ....................................................the last bus.
c) Peter knew how to skate when he was twelve.
P e te r ....................................................skate w hen he was twelve.
d) Emma was wrong not to tell you the answer.
E m m a ....................................................you the answer.
e) It wasn't necessary for us to pay to get in.
W e ....................................................pay to get in.
f) I'm sure that Diana didn't take your books.
D ia n a ....................................................your books.
g) Perhaps David didn't notice you.
D a v id ....................................................noticed you.
h) Terry arrived early, but it wasn't necessary.
T e rry ....................................................arrived early.
i) It wasn't necessary for me to buy any food yesterday.
I d id n 't ....................................................any food yesterday.
j) It was a bad idea for us to be rude to the policem an!
W e ....................................................been rude to the policeman!

Rewrite each sentence beginning as shown. Do not change the meaning.

a) You were wrong to study so late!

You shouldn't TV^C- Vcd SO
b) Did you m anage to stop him ?
W e r e ............................................................................................................................................ ?
c) It wasn't necessary to work hard.
I d id n 't ..........................................................................................................................................
d) Perhaps Tim has lost his way.
Tim m ig h t ...................................................................................................................................
e) It was possible for you to hurt yourself.
You c o u ld .....................................................................................................................................

76
 G R A M M A R 19 M O D A L S 2: P A S T

f) It would have been a good idea to tell me.

You s h o u ld ...................................................................................................................
g) I'm sure the class enjoyed it.
The class m u s t............................................................................................................
h) I helped her but it wasn't necessary.
I n e e d n 't........................................................................................................................
i) It was a mistake to leave.
You o u g h t.....................................................................................................................
j) I'm sure the butler didn't do it.
The butler c a n 't .........................................................................................................

3 Complete each sentence so that it contains the words in bold.

a) I'm com pletely soaked! We .
should/umbrella
b) I've lost my bag. I think I .....................................................................................
must/bus
c) I tried to phone Sam, but I ..................................................................................
couldn't/get through
d) I forgot Kate's birthday. I ......................................................................................
should/present
e) The cat doesn't like fruit! It .................................................................................
can't/orange
f) Jo isn't here yet. I suppose she ..........................................................................
might/address
g) I did badly in the test. I ........................................................................................
ought/harder
h) It's a shame we didn't go on holiday. We ......................................................
could/fun

77
GRAMMAR

Consolidation 2

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Jim asked/told the teacher if the book was his.

b) I have had/had two teeth taken out last week.
c) I can 't do these sums. I wish I have/had a calculator with me.
d) Ann refused/said she didn’t want me to borrow her bike.
e) Helen can't have stolen/must have stolen the m oney from the office. She didn't
com e in to the office on the day it was stolen.
f) If I have/had m ore money, I'd pay for you too.
g) It's getting very late, so I think you'd better/you could leave.
h) Tracey phoned earlier and said that she had been/would be late.
i) The next two lessons were been/have been cancelled.
j) If we'd remembered/we remembered to bring the map, we wouldn't have got
lost.

Look carefully at each line. Some lines are correct but some have a word which
should not be there. Tick ( / ) each correct line. If a line has a word which should
not be there, write the word in the space.

Do-It-Yourself
Last week m y brother and I decided to paint our 1 ........... / . ..........
bedroom s if while our parents were out for the 2 ....if.................
day. Our parents usually they have the painting done 3
by a local firm, but we thought we could to save some 4
m oney if we did paint it ourselves. We had watched the 5
painters the last tim e the house had to been painted, 6
so we thought we would be able to do the job. 7
'First all the surfaces must have to be washed,' my 8
brother said. 'That can 't have be very difficult,' I 9 .........................
replied. 'We'd better if put some newspapers on 1 0 .........................
the carpet. If we can make a mess, we'll get into 11 .........................
trouble.' After that had been have done, we looked 1 2 .........................
for some paint in the garden shed. 'We could use 1 3
this red paint,' I was suggested. My brother said that 1 4
he preferred green paint. Just as if we were going to 1 5
start, our parents arrived hom e. 'You should have been 1 6
asked us first,' m y m other said us. 'You can paint the 1 7
rest of the house too!' 1 8
 G R A M M A R 20 CONSOLIDATION 2

Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits the space.

Making arrangements with Paul

A few days ago Paul phoned me and (1) whether I ( 2 ) .............looking
after his dog w hen he ( 3 ) .............away. I ( 4 ) ...............that I didn't really like dogs,
but he said that he ( 5 ) .............all his other friends, and that I ( 6 ) ...............his
only hope. He invited me round to his house ( 7 ) .............to m eet the dog, and
he told me that he ( 8 ) .............dinner for me. An hour later he phoned again
and said that he ( 9 ) .............after all, so I ( 1 0 ) ...............m eeting the following day
for lunch. The next m orning he cancelled this appointm ent and, after he
( 1 1 ) ............., said that he ( 1 2 ) ...............the dog to my house at 6.00. 'I don't
know exactly ( 1 3 ) .............,' he said. 'Could you tell me how ( 1 4 ) ...............there?'
I quickly said I ( 1 5 ) .............out and put the phone down. Luckily I haven't
heard from him since.

1) A told B said me C asked me D spoke

2) A would mind B want C like D will help
3) A has gone B went C would go D will go
4) A told him B said him C asked him D replied him
5) A asks B would ask C will ask D had already asked
6) A am B will be C had been D was
7) A this evening B that evening C the evening D in evening
8) A is cooking B will cook C would cook D had cooked
9) A had to go out B went out C goes out D has to go out
10) A had suggested B would suggest C suggested D suggest
11) A has done B told me sorry C asked D had apologized
12) A would bring B had brought C brought D brings
13) A where is it B if it is C where it is D how was it
14) A do I get B I get C I will get D I'm getting
15) A went B go C will go D was going

Complete each sentence with one of the words or phrases from the box.

could don't have to might have must m ustn't should

had to have to

a) We . doYlt..htfY&. to.... wear a uniform at my school.

b) Y o u ......................................play with matches! It's very dangerous!
c) I'm not sure, but I think I ......................................left my wallet in the bank.
d) I'm getting up early, because I ......................................go running before school.
e) Sorry I can 't stay any longer, but I re a lly ......................................go hom e.
f) If you want to, w e ......................................go swimming this afternoon.
g) Sorry I'm late, but I ......................................take my dog to the vet's.
h) I think y o u ......................................go to bed earlier, and stop drinking coffee.
79
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) I don't know the answer, so I can't help you.

if i I. y^.p.i^d. hzlp..yp.y-......................................................
b) D on't run fast, or you'll feel tired.
I f .................................................................................................................................................
c) An off-duty policewoman arrested the robber.
The ro b b e r..............................................................................................................................
d) We didn't leave early, so we missed the train.
If w e ..........................................................................................................................................
e) I ate all the ice-cream, and now I regret it.
I w is h .......................................................................................................................................
f) W here is the bus station?
Could y o u ..............................................................................................................................
g) The local council is building a new sports centre.
A new sports c e n tr e ...........................................................................................................
h) I think you should go to the doctor's.
If I .............................................................................................................................................
i) Som eone used a hammer to break the window.
The w in d o w ...........................................................................................................................
j) 'D on 't forget to buy some milk, Amy,' I said.
I rem in d ed .............................................................................................................................

6 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) It wasn't necessary for me to go to work yesterday.

I didn't ........................ to work yesterday.
b) I'd like to be rich!
I w is h ....................................................rich!
c) I'm going to the hairdresser's tomorrow.
I'm h a v in g ....................................................tomorrow.
d) Perhaps Mark missed the bus.
Mark m ig h t ................................................... the bus.
e) M arconi was the inventor of radio.
R a d io ................................................... by Marconi.
f) I think you were wrong to forget the keys!
You sh o u ld n 't................................................... the keys!

80
 GRAMMAR 20 CONSOLIDATION 2

g) It would be a good idea for us to take an umbrella.

W e ....................................................better take an umbrella.
h) I'm sure that Maria worked very hard.
M a ria ....................................................very hard.
i) Helen gave a camera to Richard.
R ich a rd ....................................................a camera by Helen.
j) It was unnecessary for us to buy so m uch food.
W e ....................................................bought so m uch food.

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) The painters are com ing to our house tomorrow.

We are ..... painted tomorrow.
b) Som eone stole Peter's car last week.
P e te r ....................................................stolen last week.
c) 'I've lost m y ticket, Kate,' said Danny.
Danny told Kate t h a t ....................................................lost his ticket.
d) Carl advised Diane n ot to take the job.
' I ....................................................the job if I were you, Diane,' said Carl.
e) W hen does the play start?
Could y o u ....................................................the play starts?
f) Let's go for a picnic if the weather's good.
Let's go for a p ic n ic ....................................................the weather's bad.
g) I stayed up late because I didn't feel tired.
If I had felt tired I ....................................................stayed up late.
h) Jim lived in Spain then, so it was impossible that you m et him here.
Y o u ....................................................m et Jim here, because he lived in Spain then.
i) 'Do you have to leave early tomorrow, Ann?' asked Mary.
Mary asked Ann if s h e ....................................................leave early the next day.
j) 'Do you think you could pass me the salt, Peter?' I said.
I ................................................... Peter to pass the salt.

81
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

8 Underline the errors in these sentences. Correct the error.

a) War and Peace was writing by Leo Tolstoy.

..W.'c.it.t&ft............................................................................................
b) That m ustn't be David! He's on holiday in Bermuda.

c) Andrea asked a passer-by where was the train station.

d) If I had lived in A ncient Greece, I m ight be a slave!

e) In the army, you'd better wear a uniform .

f) Kate told me that she must to finish her homework.

g) I think som eone must open your bag. That's the only explanation.

h) I wish I am taller!

i) I repair m y car by a qualified m echanic.

j) If I saw a snake, I'll scream and run away!

Problem 1 Do you change tenses when you use reported speech in your language?
check If you need to check the punctuation of direct speech you can look at Grammar 48.

2 Check the difference between the second and third conditionals. Remember that
the past tense verb in a second conditional does not refer to past time.

3 When do we use the passive? Does your language use passives like English does?

4 How do we use must, have to and should? When might you say:
a) Jim has to get up early every day.
b) Jim must get up early every day.
c) Jim should get up early every day.

5 Explain the difference between each pair of sentences.

a) I'm cutting m y hair.
I'm having m y hair cut.
b) I must have lost m y keys.
I can 't have lost my keys.
c) I didn't need to buy any food yesterday
I needn't have bought any food yesterday.
d) If you cam e by bus, you'd get here faster.
If you had com e by bus, you would have got here faster.

82
 GRAMMAR

21 Purpose

Explanations
Purpose: to and for ■ We use the to infinitive to describe purpose, to say why we do things. This is
called 'th e infinitive of purpose'.
Alistair went to the station to meet his parents. (NOT for to moot)

■ In formal speech and writing we can use in order to. This is n ot as com m on as
the infinitive of purpose.
The President made a speech in order to explain the policy.

m We can use for followed by a noun to say why we do som ething. This is
especially com m on following verbs of m otion.
I went to the shops for some milk.

Purpose: so that ■ We can use so (that) to express purpose. After so (that) we use subject + verb.

■ For a habitual purpose we use can or the present simple.

I leave the window open so (that) the cat can get in and out.
Bill wears thick socks in bed so (that) his feet don't get cold.

m For a future purpose we use can, will or the present simple.

Dora is going to leave class early so (that) she can go to the dentist.
We'll take an umbrella so (that) we don't get wet.

■ For a past purpose we use could, would or the past simple.

Dora left class early so (that) she could go to the dentist.
We took an umbrella so (that) we wouldn't get wet.
We took an umbrella so (that) we didn't get wet.

m If the subject of the first part of the sentence and the subject of the purpose
clause are different, we can't use the infinitive of purpose to. We have to use
so (that).
Helen played the piano to entertain her friends.
Helen played the piano so (that) everyone else could dance.

83
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Put one suitable word in each space. Contractions count as one word.

a) I wrote the date in my diary ..J.P...................... ...................... I wouldn't forget it.

b) Most tourists com e h e r e ......................... visit the ancient temples.
c) Mary called a m e e tin g ................................................................................ announce
the team.
d) The t h i e f ......................... in black so that n o b o d y ........................... see him.
e) Jack cam e to m e ......................... advice.
f) Our teacher made us sit far apart so that w e ......................... cheat!
g) I'll leave the box open so that y o u ......................... help yourself.
h) Lisa got up early so that s h e ......................... finish her homework.

2 Rewrite each sentence so that it contains to word in bold.

a) I went to the shops to get some eggs,
for
... I . . . PA . .P.h&. .-f.h p .p f. zgg.4.-,....................................................................

b) Nicola came here for a m eeting with the director,

to

c) We went on holiday to have a rest,

for

d) Mike plays chess for relaxation,

to

e) I opened the window to let in some air.

for

f) Cristina went shopping to buy some new clothes,

for

g) I went to a private school for English lessons,

to

h) Sam went to a specialist to get treatm ent,

for

84
 G R A M M A R 21 PURPOSE

3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) Paul had to go to the doctor's, and left work early.

Paul . . . [ t f t w r l y ........... so t h a t ....... ..................................... to the doctor's.
b) The school was rebuilt because it wasn't large enough.
The s c h o o l............................................................... in order t o .............................................
larger.
c) Sophia wanted Jack to call her, and gave him her phone number.
S o p h ia ........................................................................so t h a t ............................................her.
d) I m ight get sunburnt, so I'll put on some suntan oil.
I 'l l .................................................................... so t h a t .............................................sunburnt.
e) Cathy hid the presents and nobody saw them .
C a th y .................................................................... so t h a t .............................................them.
f) We wanted people to dance, so we had the party in a large hall.
W e ........................................................................so t h a t .............................................. dance.
g) Dick wanted to get a good seat, so he arrived early.
D ic k ........................................................... so t h a t .............................................a good seat.
h) I couldn't see well in the cinem a, and changed seats.
I ....................................................................so t h a t ....................................................... better.
i) We didn't want to feel hungry, so we took some sandwiches.
We t o o k ................................................................ so that w e ...................................................
j) Harry wanted his friends to notice him so he wore a funny hat.
H arry ................................................................ so t h a t .....................................................him.

85
 GRAMMAR

22 Reason and result

Explanations
Reason and result ■ We use because, as and since when we want to explain the reason for
som ething. As and since are more com m on in formal speech and writing.
Tim didn't feel well, because he had eaten fifteen ice-creams.
As/since Tim had eaten fifteen ice-creams, he didn't feel very well.
Tim didn't feel well, as/since he had eaten fifteen ice-creams.

■ As and since can com e at the beginning of the sentence. Normally we do not
begin sentences with because, but this is possible in inform al speech.
Because Tim had eaten fifteen ice-creams, he didn't feel very well.

m We use 50 to express a result. Note the relation between because and so.
Tim had eaten fifteen ice-creams, so he didn't feel very well.

so and such for ■ We use so many/much (that) and so few/little (that) with nouns, for emphasis.
emphasis That is usually left out in inform al speech and writing. Note the rules:

Countable nouns
I bought so many books (that) I couldn't carry them all.
There were so few people in the theatre (that) the actors didn't perform well.
U ncountable nouns
There is so much rain at the moment (that) we hardly ever go out.
We have so little free time (that) we don't watch television.

■ We use so + adjective + that with adjectives by themselves.

Last night was so hot (that) I couldn't sleep.
The trainers were 50 cheap (that) I bought two pairs.

■ If we have an adjective followed by a noun, we use such a.

It was such a lovely day (that) we went for a walk in the country.
It was such a good film (that) I saw it twice.

too and not m Too + adjective m eans 'm ore than is necessary or good'. It suggests a
enough for a difficulty, and that som ething cannot be done.
difficulty It was too far. (so I didn't go)
It was too difficult. (so I didn't do it)

■ If we say what the action is we use to + infinitive.

It was too far to walk so we took a taxi.
The mountain was too difficult (for us) to climb.

86
 G R A M M A R 22 REASON AND RESULT

■ Not + adjective + enough m eans 'less than is necessary or good'. Compare the
use of too and not enough.
Little Gerry is too young to walk to school.
Little Gerry is not old enough to walk to school.

■ W ith nouns we can use too many/much, too few/little and not enough.
Countable nouns
There are too many people in the class.
There are too few books.
We haven't got enough books.
U ncountable nouns
There are too many things to do.
There's too little time.
We haven't got enough time.

■ Notice from the above examples that enough comes after adjectives ('old') but
before nouns ('books'/'tim e').

so and too ■ It is a com m on mistake to confuse so and too.

So is like very, and is used for emphasis. The speaker's opinion can be positive
or negative.
Too means 'm ore than enough'. It suggests a d ifficulty that som ething
cannot be done or will n ot happen.
It's very expensive. (a fact)
It's so expensive. (I'm surprised, but I still m ight buy it)
It's too expensive. (so I w on't buy it)

■ Look back at the examples in the previous two sections to see these uses of so
and too.

Result phrases: as We can also express result with a linking phrase like as a result, or a tim e
a result, in the end, expression like in the end or eventually. These are more com m on in formal
eventually speech and writing.
Two metres o f snow fell during the night. As a result, several main roads were
blocked, (in speech we would just use so here)
It started raining while we were having our picnic, and eventually we decided
to go home.
Kate and Tim waited for the bus for a long time, and in the end they took a
taxi.

Linking words m Words like because and so are called 'linking words'.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 47: Linking words

87
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) It was such/so a delicious drink, that I had to have another glass.

b) Andrew ate so much/so many cakes that he could hardly walk!
c) Kate's offer sounded so/too good to be true!
d) There are so few/so little good programmes on TV that I rarely watch it.
e) I felt so/too weak that I couldn't stand up.
f) We had so much/so many free tim e, that we got bored.
g) I waited for Elaine for ages, and as a result/in the end I gave up.
h) There was so much/so many rain last night, that the roads were flooded.
i) David was too tall/tall enough/enough tall/very tall to reach the shelf.
j) I had so few/so little knowledge of the subject that I got zero in the test.

2 Complete the sentences with one of these words: too, enough, so, such, much,
many, little, few.

a) It's ...JP.............. ... late and there are still lots of people in the club.
b) I t 's ..................... ... late to catch a bus. I'll have to get a taxi home.
c) I have s o .......... ..............work to do!
d) I have s o .......... ..............jobs to do!
e) I don't have ..................... m oney to go on holiday this year.
f) I have too ................ m oney to go on holiday this year.
g) I have too , ................ euros in my bank account to go on holiday this year.
h) It w a s ................ ........ an exciting film.
i) The film was .......................exciting.
j) It's ..................... ... hot on the beach. I don't like it. I'm going back to the hotel.
k) I t 's ..................... ... h ot on the beach! I love it. I'm really relaxed.

3 Put one suitable word in each space.

a) My tea is ...$?(?..............hot to drink at the m om ent.

b) I had to stand at the b a c k ,......................... there weren't any seats left.
c) Thom as h a d ................................................ homework, that he had to stay up late.
d) There w e re ..............................................people in front of us that we couldn't see.
e) Helen missed the b u s ,......................... she took a taxi.
f) There w e r e ..................................................... customers that the shop closed down.
g) The room wasn't la r g e ......................... for so m any guests.
h) H annah w a s ......................... tired that she fell asleep on the train.
i) We h a d ..................................................... m oney that we couldn't even buy a drink.
j) ......................... it was raining, the school picnic was postponed.

88
 GRAMMAR 22 REASON AND RESULT

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) I felt really tired, so I stayed at hom e and had a rest,

because
I stayed a t . hAvyie, c\yui ke\d a rejr£ b tca u jt .I fd t .r^ L L y tired.
b) I didn't use that piece of string, because it was too short,
enough

c) The question was so difficult that I had to ask for help,

such

d) There weren't enough seats for all the guests,

few

e) There weren't enough seats for all the guests,

many

f) We can't put that box in the car as there isn't m uch space,
little

g) I haven't got enough tim e to do all my work,

too

h) I've got such a lot of work that I can't go out.

so

i) She had lots of children and didn’t know what to do.

many

j) It was such a good play that the audience cheered,

so

89
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Sorry, but I haven't got little tim e.

.5.(3rry, but I .h#Y£}itjOt. cmugk time.................
b) Erica is not enough old to drive a car.

c) Paul has so m uch friends that he's always busy.

d) We had too few tim e to go sight-seeing.

e) It's too h ot that I can 't think!

f) There was too m uch snow that we couldn't travel.

g) It was so a long way that we decided to drive there.

h) So that I had run a long way, I felt exhausted.

6 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) I'm afraid you're n ot fast enough to be in the running team.

I'm afraid you're too ............
b) It's n ot very far to the house, so we can walk.
We can w a lk ..................................................................................................................
c) The film was so long that we missed our last bus.
It w a s ................................................................................................................................
d) Tina felt unhappy and she cried.
Tina felt s o .....................................................................................................................
e) Tom has lots of money, and doesn't know what to do with it.
Tom has s o .....................................................................................................................
f) Jim is too young to get married.
Jim i s n 't ..........................................................................................................................
g) I can't afford to buy this bike.
I haven't g o t .................................................................................................................
h) There are too few plates I'm afraid.
There a r e n 't ...................................................................................................................

90
 GRAMMAR

23 Contrast

Explanations
but, yet and ■ We can use but and although to make a contrast. Although is more typical of
although careful or formal speech or writing.
Maria felt ill, but she went to school.
Maria went to school although she was ill.
The clause with although can com e at the beginning.
Although she was ill, Maria went to school.

■ We can emphasize but and although with still and anyway.

Maria felt ill, but she went to school anyway.
Maria felt ill, but she still went to school.
Although she was ill, Maria went to school anyway.

■ We can use yet instead of but in writing.

Maria felt ill, yet she went to school.

even though and ■ We can use even though like although to give a stronger contrast.
though Even though she felt very ill, Maria went to school.

■ We can use though like although in inform al speech and writing. We often
make two separate sentences and put though at the end.
Maria went to school. She was ill, though.

while and whereas ■ While and whereas can be used in form al speech and writing to compare two
facts and emphasize the difference between them .
While/Whereas some experts expect the Government to win the election, most
believe that the opposition will win.

despite and m Despite and in spite o f are also used to make a contrast. But they are followed
in spite of by a noun or noun phrase (not subject + verb like although). The -ing form of
the verb acts like a noun here.
Despite her illness, Maria went to school.
(NOT Despite she felt ill, Maria ...)
Despite being ill, Maria went to school.
In spite o f her illness, Maria went to school.
In spite o f being ill, Maria went to school.

91
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

however and on the ■ However introduces or com pletes a contrasting sentence. However always has
other hand punctuation before and after.
Maria was ill. However, she went to school.
Maria went to school. She was ill, however.
However is more com m on in formal speech and writing.

■ Note that we cannot say:

However she was ill, Memenwent-te-sekeel.

m On the other hand introduces a contrasting opinion. It is more com m on in

form al speech and writing.
Television has many advantages. It keeps us informed about the latest news,
and also provides entertainment in the home. On the other hand, television
has been blamed for the violent behaviour o f some young people, and for
encouraging children to sit indoors, instead o f taking exercise.

Linking words ■ Words like but, although and however are called 'linking words'.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 47: Linking word

92
 G R A M M A R 23 CONTRAST

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I read the book you suggested. I didn't enjoy it, although/however.

b) In spite of/Although we warned him , Harry still got lost.
c) Although/However I like it here, I w on't stay here long.
d) Cars are convenient. On the other hand/Whereas, they cause pollution.
e) I didn't have m uch tim e, but/however I managed to visit lots of places.
f) Catherine won the race, although/despite falling over.
g) Although/In spite o f the delay, the train arrived on tim e.
h) I didn't m anage to jump over the wall, although/yet I tried twice.

2 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) ...Alt.kW.Htfh. Tim felt tired, he stayed up to finish his homework.

b) Sam didn't like sk a tin g ,......................... he went with his friends all the same.
c) I found French hard at first............................, I soon started to en joy it.
d) Jan e kept r u n n in g ,......................... though she knew she couldn't win.
e) Mike was lost, but h e ......................... refused to look at the map.
f) Carol went to see the f il m ,......................... she had seen it before.
g) the rain, the school sports were a great success.
h) Helen won the swimming com petition, i n ......................... of her cold.

3 Rewrite each sentence beginning as shown. Do not change the meaning.

a) Although it was snowing, we went out for a walk.

Despite ...P.h^. . We v J m t o u t. f o r . .<a..m l K - ...............................................
b) Some experts think prices will fall, but others disagree.
W h ile ...........................................................................................................................................
c) Even though they were losing at half-tim e, City won in the end.
D e sp ite ........................................................................................................................................
d) Despite the heat, Diana wore her w inter clothes.
A lth o u g h ....................................................................................................................................
e) Whereas last summer was good, this summer it's rained all the time.
Last summer was g o o d ..........................................................................................................
f) Jam es had a headache, but he still read until late.
In spite o f ...................................................................................................................................
g) Although Jo n h adn't studied, he did well in the test.
Jo n hadn't stu d ied .................................................................................................................

93
 Explanations
What is a ■ A function is a way of describing language according to its purpose (how it is
function? used). Functions can be short phrases as well as single words. Typical
functions are: offering something, asking for permission, making a
suggestion etc.

■ The same function can be expressed in different ways. Our choice of words
depends on:
- The situation we are in: is it public or private? who else is present?
- The person we are talking to: someone of our own age? how well do we
know them ?
- W hat we are talking about: is the topic sensitive? or is it light and
unim portant?

■ The functions below are classified as form al (= polite), neutral or informal,

but rem em ber that the choice of words depends on m any things. You might
be talking to a friend and you want to borrow a pen, so you are informal.
But if you are talking to the same friend and you want to borrow a large
am ount of m oney you will use more formal language.

Asking for ■ To ask for inform ation we can use an indirect question:
information
Can you tell me what time the bus from Glasgow arrives? (neutral)
Could you tell me what time the bus from Glasgow arrives?
-> O f course. It arrives at 9.30. (neutral)
Would you mind telling me what time the bus from Glasgow arrives?
-> O f course not. It arrives at 9.30. (formal)

■ Note the indirect question form (NOT what tim e doos ...).

Offers Offering help:

Shall I carry this suitcase for you? (neutral)
Let me carry your suitcase. (neutral)
-> Thank you very much. / Thanks, but I can manage.
Offering things:
Would you like a soft drink? (neutral)
-> Yes, please, I'll have an orange jince. / No thanks, it's OK.
Would you like tea or coffee? (neutral)
-> I'd rather have coffee, please. / I'd prefer tea, please. / I don't mind.

94
 G R A M M A R 24 FUNCTIONS

Permission Is it all right if I leave early? (inform al)

Can I leave early, please? (neutral)
-> Yes, o f course.
-> Sorry, but you can't. You have to stay to the end.
Could I possibly leave a bit early, please? (formal)
-> Yes, you can.
May I leave early, please? (formal)
-> Yes, you may.
W hen we reply we often repeat the modal verb, but notice that w hen we
reply to Could I we say can not could.

Promising I'll be back at 11.30. (neutral)

I won't do anything silly! (neutral)
The word will is used in m any functions.

Requests Can you open the window, please? (neutral)

Can you help me? (neutral)
Could you open the window please? (formal)
Will/Would you wait here, please? (formal)
We can reply to a request by agreeing or refusing:
-> Sure. / No problem. / O f course.
-> Actually, it's a bit inconvenient. / I'm sorry but that's not possible.

Requests with ■ Requests with mind are confusing for learners because Would you mind ...
mind means 'Is it a problem for you?'. So we say 'no' if we want to be helpful.
Would you mind helping me?
No, o f course not.
-> Actually, I'm quite busy at the moment. Perhaps later.

■ Note that we use an -ing form after Would you mind.

Suggesting and Let's go to the cinema. (neutral)

advising Why don't we go to the cinema? (neutral)
How about going to the cinema? (neutral)
We could go to the cinema. (neutral)
If we make a suggestion to another person it is advice:
I think you should stay at home. (formal)
I f I were you, I'd stay at home. (formal)

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 9: Future 2
G ram m ar 28: Questions 2

95
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Match what people say (a-j) with the functions (1-10).

a) Would you like a cup of tea?

b) Excuse me, do you know what tim e the museum o p e n s ? .............
c) Actually, I think I'd rather have a Chinese m eal...............
d) I know, we could walk along the river. How about t h a t ? .............
e) Sorry, but I w on't do it ...............
f) That looks difficult. Shall I help y o u ? .............
g) Excuse me, but do you think you could turn your music down a b i t ? ............
h) Well, to be honest, I think you should go to the police...............
i) Is it all right if I go out to the shops for a m o m e n t? .............
j) I'll definitely be there at 6.00. I w on't be la t e !.............

1 Giving advice
2 Asking for inform ation
3 Offering help
4 Offering som ething
5 Asking permission
6 Refusing to do som ething
7 Expressing a preference
8 Making a promise
9 Making a request
10 Making a suggestion

2 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I'm very busy. Let’s/Would vou mind giving me a hand?

b) I f I were you, I'd write/How about you write the letter again.
c) W hy don't we go/going to the theatre tomorrow?
d) Would you mind/Could you close the door please?
e) Do you like/Would you like some more water?
f) I promise / won't do it/I don't do it again.
g) I'm quite good at cooking too. Shall I help/Would I help you?
h) I've a suggestion. Why don't you go/Could you go to the beach?
i) Would I borrow/Could I borrow your ruler?
j) Are you tired? I think you can go/should go to bed early.

96
 G R A M M A R 24 FUNCTIONS

3 Replace the parts in italics with a more appropriate or accurate expression.

a) Look, don't worry about me, there's a bus at 12.30. So I'm back by 2.00, I
promise!
...... I'll bt.back ............................................................................
b) A: Would you like an ice-cream? Or some cake perhaps?
B: / choose ice-cream, please.

c) A: I'm having problems at school. W hat do you think I should do?

B: I talk it over with your parents.

d) A: This suitcase is really heavy, and my back is killing me!

B: Do I carry it?

e) A: I'm not sure what to do this evening. Any ideas?

B: You will go to the cinema, perhaps?

f) A: I've got an appointm ent at the dentist's. Shall I leave school early?
B: Have you brought a note from your parents?

g) Excuse me, I want to catch a bus from here to London. Tell me how much does
it cost.

h) A: I feel really hungry. Have you got anything to eat?

B: Do you like some lemonade?

i) A: It's very hot in here. Are you opening the window?

B: Of course.

j) A: Come on, hurry up! Tidy your room and make your bed!
B: No, I don't! It's not fair!

97
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Please take a seat.

Would yP .tt.M iyid.. t<A\dv)g'............................... a seat?
b) Fruit juice would be better for me.
I .............................................................................. fruit juice.
c) I'd like you to wait for me.
.............................................................................. for me, please?
d) W ill you allow me to leave the room?
.............................................................................. the room?
e) I'd like you to turn off the television.
C o u ld .............................................................................. the television?
f) Let's go for a walk.
.............................................................................. for a walk?
g) I promise not to talk to Richard again.
I .............................................................................. to Richard again.
h) Would you like me to help you?
.............................................................................. you?
i) W hen does the plane arrive?
Would y o u ..............................................................................when the plane arrives?
j) My advice is to see a doctor.
If I .............................................................................. I'd see a doctor.

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word. More than one answer may be
possible.

a) I think you ...f.htif&ld..... spend more tim e on your homework.

b) you help me carry these bags?
c) Excuse m e............................you tell me what street this is?
d) W hat a terrible n o is e !......................... you please be quiet!
e) go skating tomorrow.
f) Would y o u ......................... telling me what tim e it is?
g) Thanks for the offer, but I 'd ......................... stay at home.
h) you sign your nam e here, please, sir?
i) you like another slice of pizza?
j) P le a s e ......................... I leave the table?

98
 GRAMMAR

25 Relative clauses 1

Explanations
Relative clauses Relative clauses are short phrases beginning with words like who, that and which
(called 'relative pronouns') that define or describe people and things. There are
two types:

■ Defining relative clauses: we use these to identify exactly which person or

thing we m ean. The inform ation is necessary for the sentence to make sense.
The doctor who treated me told me not to worry.
In this example there is more than one doctor and we only know which one
by the relative clause.

■ N on-defining relative clauses: we use these to give extra inform ation. The
inform ation is n ot necessary for the sentence to make sense. To show this in
writing we use commas.
Pablo Picasso, who died in 1973, was a painter and sculptor.

Relative pronouns m which, that

Which refers to things and that refers to people and things. That is more
com m on, especially in speech.
The bus which goes to Cairo leaves from here.
The woman that we spoke to gave us directions.
The road that we took led to an ancient temple.

■ who and whom

Who and whom refer to people.
In formal speech and writing we can use whom instead of who where who is
the object of the sentence (see below). We can also use whom after a
preposition. However, this is becom ing less com m on and in m odern English
speakers rarely use whom - instead they use who or that.
The people who live next door make a lot o f noise.
The people that live next door make a lot o f noise.
It was the same boy whom I met yesterday.
('I' is the subject, 'w hom ' is the object)
No one knows by whom the victim was shot.
(after the preposition 'by', but very rare in m odern English.)
No one knows who the victim was shot by.
(norm al usage in speech and writing)

■ whose
Whose shows that som ething belongs to someone.
The girl whose case had been stolen went to the police station.

99
 INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Leaving out the ■ To understand whether you can leave out the relative pronoun you first need
relative pronoun to look at w hether the relative clause refers to the subject or object of the
sentence.

A relative clause that refers to the subject of the sentence:

The doctor who treated me told me not to worry.
The doctor (subject) treated me (object).

A relative clause that refers to the object of the sentence:

The doctor that/who/whom I spoke to told me not to worry.
I (subject) spoke to the doctor (object).

■ We can leave out the relative pronoun in a defining relative clause that refers
to the object.
The doctor I spoke to told me not to worry.

■ We cannot leave out the relative pronoun in a defining relative clause that
refers to the subject.
The doctor who treated me told me not to worry.

■ In a non-defining relative clause we must keep the relative pronoun.

Pablo Picasso, who died in 1973, was a painter and sculptor.

■ We can also leave out the relative pronoun after a superlative.

That was the best meal (that) I've ever eaten!

100
 G R A M M A R 25 RELATIVE CLAUSES 1

Practice

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) An old man, who/which was carrying a suitcase, knocked at the door.

b) The winner, which/whose bike was an unusual design, won a medal.
c) The girl who/which spoke to me turned out to be in my class.
d) The museum, which/whose was in a beautiful building, was closed.
e) A policewom an that/which we asked told us how to get there.
f) The boy whose/whom house I was staying at was an old friend.
g) The last person which/whose pen I borrowed didn't get it back.

2 Complete each sentence with who, whose or that.

a) The friend ...... house I stayed in is com ing to stay with us.
b) The g u id eb o o k ......................... we bought explained everything.
c) The c o u p le ......................... house I bought both worked in my office.
d) I'd like you to tell m e ......................... you were talking to.
e) The g ir l......................... ruler I had borrowed wanted it back.
f) I can't rem em b er......................... I lent my bike to.
g) Do you k n o w ......................... Catherine works for?

3 Decide whether the clause in italics is Defining or Non-defining. Write D or N

next to each sentence.

a) The girl who was waiting was becom ing im patient. .......... J?...
b) The room, which was enormous, was filled with lines of chairs........................
c) The students, who were late, waited in the playground. ................
d) The food which was left was eaten the following day. ................
e) A tall girl, who was wearing a hat, came into the room. ................
f) The dog, which was lying on the sofa, had long pointed ears. ................
g) The train which leaves at 8 .0 0 doesn't stop at Bath. ...............

4 Underline relative pronouns which can be left out in these sentences.

a) The book that Jo h n was reading was a bit frightening.

b) The travel agency w hich sold me the ticket was near my office.
c) In the end, our holiday was the best that we had ever had.
d) The dentist who I go to isn't very expensive.
e) The film which we saw last week was m uch better than this one.
f) The people who were leaving couldn't find their coats.
g) The garden, which wasn't very large, was full of flowers.

101
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Rewrite each formal sentence as an informal one, ending with the word given.

a) These are the.boys with whom I went on holiday.

These arc the boys I vJmt m holiday with
b) This is the letter for w hich I've been waiting.
...................................................................................................................................................for.
c) That is the shop from w hich Sue bought her bike.
...............................................................................................................................................from.
d) That is the hotel at w hich I stayed.
....................................................................................................................................................at.
e) Tim is som eone to w hom I hardly ever write.
....................................................................................................................................................to.
f) Do you know by whom this book was written?
...................................................................................................................................................by?
g) Ravenna was the most interesting town in which we stayed.
....................................................................................................................................................in.
h) United were the best team against which we played.
.......................................................................................................................................... against.

6 Add a relative pronoun to each sentence.

a) Friday was the last tim e I saw Jim .

... Friday, vj.as.. the..Last..time.. that J . sftyJ.Jiyyi,...................................
b) The island we visited was extrem ely beautiful.

c) The girl I m et was a friend of Philip's.

d) The meal we ate w asn't very tasty.

e) Gina was the first person I asked.

f) The book I read didn't explain the problem.

g) The teacher we usually have was away ill.

h) The friends I m et last night send you their love.

102
 GRAMMAR

26 Relative clauses 2

Explanations
Combining ■ Look at these short sentences.
sentences A bus goes to Cairo. It leaves from here.
A woman teaches us music. She also plays in an orchestra.
We took a road. It led to an ancient temple.
We spoke to a woman. She gave us directions.
We can com bine the sentences using relative clauses.
The bus that goes to Cairo leaves from here.
The woman who teaches us music also plays in an orchestra.
The road (that) we took led to an ancient temple.
The woman (that) we spoke to gave us directions.

■ Note that articles often change (e.g. from a/an to the) w hen sentences are
com bined.
A girl's case was stolen. She went to the police station.
The girl whose case was stolen went to the police station.

A doctor treated me. She told me not to worry.

The doctor who treated me told me not to worry.

I spoke to a doctor. She told me not to worry.

The doctor I spoke to told me not to worry.

■ Note this com m on error: The bus that goes to Cairo it leaves from hare.
W hen we com bine sentences we do n ot repeat the subject by adding another
pronoun (The bus ... it).

Relative clauses The relative clause often has a continuous verb form:
with an -ing form Can all the students who are leaving tomorrow give back their books?
I sent a card to the girl who was living across the street.
In this case we can leave out both the relative pronoun and the verb be.
Can all the students leaving tomorrow give back their books?
I sent a card to the girl living across the street.

What as a relative We can use the relative pronoun what to m ean the thing(s) that.
pronoun We didn't understand what she said. (= the things that she said)
What I want now is a cup o f tea. (= the thing that I want)

103
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) The train which/who goes to Brighton leaves from here.

b) That/What I like best is an afternoon at the beach.
c) I didn't know who/which to ask about my tim etable.
d) The people which/whose luggage was lost had to wait a long time.
e) W here's the ruler whose/that I left on this desk?
f) The shop what/that I went to didn't have any milk.
g) Do you know whom/whose bag this is?
h) Everyone who/which was there will remember the day forever.
i) The second bus, which/whose was full, didn't stop either.
j) Jim was helped by someone who/whom told him the answer.

2 Some sentences have a word which should not be there. Write the word in the
space. If the sentence is correct, put a tick (/).

a) The m an whose his car had been damaged was very angry. I.........
b) That was the longest film I've ever seen. ....................
c) The train w hich it goes to London leaves from here. ....................
d) The policewoman who she stopped me asked me my name. ....................
e) The Eiffel Tower, which it was finished in 1889, is made of iron.......................
f) Everyone that Elena spoke to advised her to try again. ....................
g) The children that they live next door are my friends. ....................

3 Rewrite each pair of sentences as one sentence, and include the word in bold.
Begin as shown, and make any necessary changes.

a) We want to visit a museum. It opens at 12.00.

that
The . . . . that We. vJant, to..visit, opens, at.I?-.00.
b) A boy's bike was taken. He visited the police station,
whose
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
c) A friend met me at the airport. He carried my suitcase,
who
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
d) Tom cooked a meal. It was delicious,
that
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
e) A friend is staying with me. She comes from Paris,
who
T h e .............................................................................................................................................

104
 GRAMMAR 26 RELATIVE CLAUSES 2

f) I found a m an's wallet. He gave me a reward,

whose
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
g) I go to a shop in the centre. It is cheaper,
that
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
h) I went to a girl's party. She phoned me.
whose
T h e .............................................................................................................................................
i) I know someone. This person likes you.
who
I ..............................................................................................................

4 Put one word in each space, or tick (/) the space if the sentence is correct.
a) We sent a present to the c h ild re n .......... ...............living next door.
b) Mike doesn't really k n o w ......................... he wants.
c) I started talking to some b o y s ......................... sitting by the side of the road.
d) I asked M a ry ......................... she was thinking, but she w ouldn't tell me.
e) There were lots of people at the p a r ty ......................... we went to.
f) I don't really k n o w ......................... you're talking about.
g) we need now is a map and a compass.
h) We saw two r a b b its ......................... playing in the garden.
 GRAMMAR

27 Questions 1

Explanations
Yes/No questions Questions with the answer yes or no are formed with an auxiliary verb +
subject + m ain verb. The auxiliary can be do, be, have or a modal verb like can,
will etc.

Present simple Do you live in Prague?

Present continuous Are you sitting comfortably?
Present perfect Have you ever eaten octopus?
Past simple Did you phone Sue?
Past continuous Were you having a bath?
Past perfect Had you already left?
can/could Can you swim? Could you see?
must/have to Must you go? Do you have to go?

Wh- questions We can also make a question with a question word: what, why, when, who, whose,
which and how. After the question word we use the same structure as a Yes/No
question: auxiliary verb + subject + m ain verb.

Present simple When do you usually leave?

Present continuous What are you doing?
Present perfect Why have you stopped?
Past simple How did you feel?
Past continuous Where were you living?
Past perfect Who had you told?
can/could What can I do? Where could he go?
must/have to What must I do? What do I have to do?

Question words as Som etim es the question word is the subject of the sentence. In this case we do
the subject not use do/does/did.

Who did you meet in England? ('you' is the subject)

Who met you at the airport? ('w ho' is the subject,
'you' is the object)

What do cats eat? ('cats' is the subject)

Who eats seafood? ('who' is the subject,
'seafood' is the object)

106
 G R A MM A R 27 QUESTIONS 1

Negative A positive question could have a yes or no answer.

questions Do yon like dogs?
-> Yes, I do. / No, I don't.
We use negative questions w hen we expect the answer will be no. In social
situations this makes it easier for the other person to reply politely. Compare:
Do you like Mexican food?
-> No, not really (the answer seems very strong)
Don't you like Mexican food?
-> No, not really. (the same answer seems more polite)

Short answers To make a short answer we repeat the auxiliary verb.

Do you speak French? Yes, I do.

Have you seen this film? No, I haven't.
Did you stay long? No, I didn't.
Will you be late? No, I won't.
Have you got a pen? Yes, I have.
Can you drive? No, I can't.

107
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Write a question for each answer.

a) .yP.H-.. Willy. J j e t .. H-J?.?. Get up? At about 7.30 usually.

b) ...I was reading War and Peace.
c) ...I went there to buy some food.
d) ...So far I've only eaten breakfast.
e) ...Now you have to put it in the
oven!
f) ...Yesterday? I felt absolutely awful.
g) ...I'm washing my hair. I can't
talk, sorry.
h) ...Because I haven't paid the
electricity bill!
i) ...My bike? I left it at school.
j) .........................................................................................My party? All my friends are
com ing.

Write a who or what question for each answer.

a) ...W k o ..liv es...y m t ..d o o r?..................... ......... ...A family of three lives next door.
b) ...I play with my little brother.
c) ...Mrs Dawson teaches me maths.
d) ...I usually eat a sandwich for lunch.
e) ...Horror films frighten me.
f) ...I talk m ost to my friend Dina.
g) ...I sit next to Maria in English.
h) ..................................................................................... ...Music helps me study.

Write a short answer for each question, beginning as shown.

a) Have you been ill long? No, ...L .h ^ y e -V lt.......................

b) Are you waiting for me? Y e s ,...................................................
c) Did you go to the cinem a? Yes, ...................................................
d) W ill you be here tom orrow? Yes, ...................................................
e) Did you have to pay a lot? N o ,...................................................
f) Can you help me with this problem? N o ,...................................................
g) Do you know where the theatre is? Y e s ,...................................................
h) Is George going to be there? N o ,...................................................

108
 GRAMMAR

28 Questions 2

Explanations
Tag questions: A tag question is a short phrase at the end of a statem ent that turns it into a
form question. Tag questions are formed using auxiliaries (do, be, have or a modal).
A positive statem ent has a negative tag, and vice-versa.
You speak French, don't you? (negative tag)
You don't speak French, do you? (positive tag)

Here are some examples of tag questions showing different verb forms and a
m ixture of positive and negative tags.

Present simple You don't know the answer, do you?

Present continuous We're enjoying ourselves, aren't we?
Present perfect He's moved house, hasn't he?
Past simple You didn't tell her, did you?
Past continuous I wasn't driving fast, was I?
Past perfect She hadn't met him then, had she?
can They can't be here yet, can they?
could You couldn't give me a hand, could you?
should You shouldn't do that, should you?

Tag questions: use Negative tags: if we use a negative tag we expect the answer will be yes.
A: You speak French, don't you?
B: Yes, that's right, I do.

The in ton ation on the tag can either rise or fall:

- if it rises then it is a real question - the speaker is n ot sure and needs
inform ation. The other person will continue speaking afterwards.
A: You speak French, don't you?
B: Yes, that's right, I do. I learned while I lived in France when I was a student.
- if it falls then it is just a question for confirm ation - the first speaker
wants to check inform ation and will continue speaking afterwards.
A: You speak French, don't you?
B: Yes, that's right, I do.
A: Good, because we need someone to translate this email which we've just
received.

Positive tags: if we use a positive tag we expect the answer will be no.
A: You don't speak French, do you?
B: No, sorry, I don't.
The in ton ation can rise or fall just like with a negative tag.

109
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Problems with ■ The tag for I am is aren't. The tag for let's is shall.
tags I'm a fool, aren't I?
Let's go to the cinema, shall we?

■ After an imperative we use will you? or won't you?

Sit down, will you? Sit down, won't you?
The imperative with be also uses will or won't.
Be quiet, will you? Be quiet, won't you? This is an order!
The imperative with have also uses will or won't.
Have a seat, won't you?

Reply questions We can use a short question to reply to what someone says. We do this to show
interest, surprise or uncertainty. The m eaning is like Really? or Is that true?
I've never eaten spaghetti.
-> Haven't you? (surprise)
We're leaving at 6.00.
-> Are we? (not sure)
The reply question uses an auxiliary verb like a tag question, but there is no
change of positive to negative.

Indirect questions ■ We can be more polite by beginning a question with a short phrase like:
Could you tell me ... ? Do you know ... ?

■ The word order of an indirect question is like a statem ent, not like a direct
question.
direct: Where is the post office?
indirect: Could you tell me where the post office is? (NOT where is the post
office)
direct: When does the film start?
indirect Do you know when the film starts? (NOT when does the film start)

m Yes/No questions use if

direct: Is this the right street?
indirect: Do you know if this is the right street?

110
 G R AM M AR 28 QUESTIONS 2

Practice

This unit also includes further practice for Grammar 27.

Add a short answer to each sentence.

a) Have you ever been to Brazil? No I h a v e n 't

b) Do you like sausages? Y e s ,.............................................
c) Are you com ing to the m atch tomorrow? Y e s ,.............................................
d) Did Helen phone you today? No, .............................................
e) Has Jack done his homework? Y e s ,.............................................
f) Can Robert and Sue skate? Y e s ,.............................................
g) Will you be late? No, .............................................
h) Has Julie got a brother? No, .............................................
i) Is that your house? Y e s ,.............................................
j) Did Jan e give you that book? No, .............................................

2 Add a reply question to each sentence.

a) We've got a test tomorrow. ...........................?

b) I don't understand this sentence. ....................................................?
c) Fiona phoned me last night. ....................................................?
d) I don't like ice-cream. ....................................................?
e) Tom is leaving tomorrow. ....................................................?
f) There's a policem an at the door. ....................................................?
g) Lisa has just had a baby. ....................................................?
h) I haven't eaten Chinese food. ....................................................?
i) There isn't any milk in the fridge. ....................................................?
j) I m et David in France. ....................................................?

3 Add a tag question to each sentence.

a) We're nearly there, . . . t i r c n t W c ?

b) You haven't got a spare pen, .............................. ?
c) You're com ing to my p a rty ,.............................. ?
d) You w on't be l a t e , .............................. ?
e) Harry's f if te e n ,.............................. ?
f) Kate and Pat live in L eed s,.............................. ?
g) You don't feel well, .............................. ?
h) You like f i s h , .............................. ?
i) Richard's bought a new b ik e ,.............................. ?
j) I shouldn't tell you t h i s ,............................... ?

Ill
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Make a new sentence with a tag question which has the same meaning as the
first sentence, beginning as shown. Make any necessary changes.

a) I'm sure that Paul doesn't like football.

P a ul ... d.Q&yC.t. li.te.foptbci.il..............
b) I'm checking that you've got a sister.
Y o u .................................................................................................. , ..........................
c) I don't think that you've done your homework!
Y o u .................................................................................................. , ..........................
d) I'm angry that you sat next to Ellen!
Y o u .................................................................................................. , ..........................
e) I'm surprised that the guests have arrived.
The g u e sts.................................................................................... , ..........................
f) I'm checking that your name is Jo h n .
Your n a m e .................................................................................... , .........................
g) I'm surprised to m eet you and think that your nam e m ight be John.
Your n a m e .................................................................................... , ..........................
h) You're certain that you didn't leave your wallet on the desk.

i) You're surprised that W illiam has got married.

W illia m ......................................................................................... , ........................................
j) You're checking that this book is by M artin Aimless.
This b o o k ......................................................................................, ........................................

5 Underline the best sentence in each context.

a) W hy did you forget your keys! You are silly!

1 I didn't tell you to forget them , did I?
2 I told you n ot to forget them , didn't I?
b) Ugh! I can 't believe it! I'm sure they must taste horrible!
1 You like eating snails, don't you?
2 You don't like eating snails, do you?
c) If we go to Brazil, we m ight have problems with the language.
1 You speak Portuguese, don't you?
2 You don't speak Portuguese, do you?
d) I told you to keep the party a secret. It's supposed to be a surprise for Stella.
So, I just want to make sure.
1 You didn't tell her, did you?
2 You told her, didn't you?

112
 G R A M M A R 28 QUESTIONS 2

e) Well, Mr Robinson, I think it's tim e you told the police the truth. You see,
we've found your fingerprints on the murder weapon.
1 You didn't murder Lord Chumley, did you?
2 You murdered Lord Chumley, didn't you?
f) Only two m inutes to the end of the m atch and United are still 5 -1 in the
lead. It looks certain now.
1 United aren't going to win, are they?
2 United are going to win, aren't they?
g) I haven't see Ann for ages. She's working abroad I think.
1 She's got a job in France, hasn't she?
2 She hasn't got a job in France, has she?
h) I just can 't answer this question. It would be nice to have some help.
1 You could help me, couldn't you?
2 You couldn't help me, could you?

6 Rewrite each question, beginning as shown. Do not change the meaning.

a) W hat's the time?

Could you tell me ..............................................................
b) W hat does this mean?
Do you k n o w .........................................................................................................................
c) How m uch does this cost?
Could you tell me ...............................................................................................................
d) W hat tim e does the museum open?
Do you know .........................................................................................................................
e) Am I in the right seat?
Could you tell me ...............................................................................................................
f) W here's Asham Street?
Do you k n o w ........................................................................................................................
g) Is this Trafalgar Square?
Could you tell me ..............................................................................................................
h) W hen does this bus leave?
Do you k n o w ........................................................................................................................

113
 it and there

Explanations
Introducing new We often use there to introduce new inform ation. Typical structures are:
information som ething exists: There are many possibilities.
som ething happens: There's a football match every Saturday.
num ber or am ount: There are twelve students in this class.
modals: There could/may/shouldn't be a problem.
There seems/appears to be: There seems/appears to be a mistake.

We can also use it to introduce new inform ation. Typical structures are:
times, days, dates: It's one o'clock. It's Tuesday.
the weather: It's raining. It rained all night.
opinions: It was a difficult choice.
adjectives: It's strange that we've never spoken before.
It looks like: It looks like the sun is going to come out this
afternoon.
It seems/appears: It seems/appears (that) our new teacher is Jane.

■ Note these structures with look, seem and appear. Look is usually followed by
as if + subject + verb, or by like + noun phrase.
It looks as if Carol has won. She looks like a real champion.
Seem and appear are followed by (that) + subject + verb.
It seems (that) the Brazilians are going to win.
It appears (that) one o f the customers called the police.

Referring back It refers back to som ething already m entioned.

There is a shop at the end o f the street. It is open every day.
Notice in this example how the new inform ation is introduced with there.

Referring to a There can refer to a place.

place A famous writer used to live there.
Who is that over there?

it's and its It's is a contraction of it is or it has. Its is the possessive form of it.
I like this hotel. It's (= it is) comfortable and its restaurant is good.
It's (= it has) got a lovely swimming-pool, too.

they're and their They're is a contraction of they are. Their is the possessive form of they.
Nancy and Dominique have arrived. They're both wearing the same dress!
Ask them to leave their coats in the hall.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 46: Possession

114
 G R A MM A R 29 I T AND THERE

Practice

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Are their/there any eggs in the fridge?

b) It's/Its really cold this m orning.
c) Peter says they're/there arriving at about 5.00.
d) I like this bike but its/it's wheels are too small.
e) Is there/they're anybody their/there ?
f) It's/Its a pity we missed the opening of the film.
g) Patrick and Bridget have sold their/they're house.
h) W hat a lovely dog. W hat's it's/its name?

Put it or there in each space.

a) is a tree in the garden. ...M . .........is an apple tree.

b) looks as i f .....................is going to rain.
c) is strange t h a t .....................are no restaurants in this town.
d) 'W ho's that at the door?' ' ................... is only me!'
e) 'W hich house is yours?' ' ...................is the one at the end of the street.'
f) seems to be som ething under the cupboard, but what i s .....................?
g) appears t h a t .....................was n o b o d y .....................when I phoned.

Rewrite each sentence, ending as shown, so that it has a similar meaning to the
first sentence, and so that it contains it or there.

a) Near the hotel is a small restaurant.

7 ? f^ . near the hotel.
b) You went to Thailand for your holiday too, which is strange.
.............................................................................................................................to Thailand
for your holiday too.
c) My road has a big tree at the end of it.
............................................................................................................................. road.
d) Brian seems to have left.
.............................................................................................................................has left.
e) Today is really cold!
.............................................................................................................................today.
f) Budapest is a long way from here.
.............................................................................................................................to Budapest.
g) Your torch hasn't got any batteries in it.
.............................................................................................................................torch.
h) We appear to be lost again!
............................................................................................................................ lost again!
 GRAMMAR

30 Place and position

Explanations
in, inside, out, ■ In describes som ething contained by som ething else.
outside There are some cups in that cupboard.
Inside has the same m eaning but is used for emphasis.
Luckily there was nobody inside the burning house.

m Out m eans 'away from the inside' and also 'n ot in the place where you
usually are'.
Close the door on your way out.
I'm sorry, Kate's not here right now. She's out. (= she's not at home)
Outside means 'out of a particular room or building, but still near it'.
Kate's outside in the garden. I'll just call her.

Expressions with There are m any expressions with in. This is a selection. Note that sometimes the
in definite article the is not used.

countries My parents are in Canada at the moment. (no article)

cities My sister lives in Madrid. (no article)
streets Jack lives in Garden Avenue. (no article)
roads She was walking in the road, not on the pavement.
'th e m irror' Tony could see his face in the mirror.
'hole/crack in' There was a hole in my shoe.
'hand ' Ellen had a bunch o f flowers in one hand.
'arm chair' She sat in an armchair.
'th e country' Paul and Mary live in the country, not in the city.
hospital Sally is ill and is in hospital. (no article)
prison Keith stole some money and ended up in prison. (no article)

on On describes a thing touching the surface of another thing.

Don't leave your bag on the floor.
There's a photograph o f London on the wall.

Expressions with There are m any expressions with on. This is a selection.
on
transport There were few passengers on the plane/bus/train.
'chair' She sat on a chair.
'television' What's on television/the radio this evening?
'w all' Let's hang this picture on that wall.
injuries Tim cut his foot on a piece o f glass.
'left'/'rig h t' There's a cinema on the left.
'side' There are small houses on this side o f the street.
'pavem ent' She was walking in the road, not on the pavement.

116
 G R A M M A R 30 PLACE AND POSITION

at, in or to? m At and in are both used to describe a person's position. A t shows a general
location at a point or place. In is used with the nam e of a container, place or
area to show that som eone or som ething is inside it. Study these examples.
We met at the airport. (the place in general)
We met in the airport building. (inside the building)
I'll see you at the cinema. (the place in general)
I'll see you in the cinema. (inside the building)
We arrived at Prague Airport. (the place)
We arrived in Prague. (the city)

m To is used with verbs of m otion.

Last night we went to the cinema.
Could you take this letter to the post office?
I sent a parcel to my sister.

Expressions with There are m any expressions with at. This is a selection, and note th at sometimes
at the definite article the is n ot used.

'th e begin n in g'/'th e end' There's a cafe at the end o f the street.
'the fro n t'/'th e back' Do you sit at the front or at the back o f the class?
'school' John isn't at school. (no article)
'hom e' He's at home. (no article)
'work' Mr King wasn't at work yesterday. (no article)

above/below, ■ Above/below m ean 'higher/low er than '. They can be used w ithout an object.
over/under You can see the top o f the tower above the trees.
From the mountain, I could see the lake below.

Over/under m ean 'directly above/below'. They both need an object.

The alien spaceship hovered over the building.
I keep my suitcase under my bed.

■ Over can also be used like 'across' or 'covering'.

There is a footbridge over the motorway. (= across)
There was a plastic sheet over the hole in the roof. (= covering)

next to/beside, ■ Next to and beside m ean 'exactly at the side of'. Beside can be more formal.
near/by Maria sits next to Paula.
Come and sit beside me on the sofa.

m Near means 'close to'. By m ean 'at the side of' and is often used in
descriptions of rooms.
Tom's house is near the sports centre.
There was a table by the window. H e was standing by the door.
We had a holiday near the sea. (close to the sea - a few kilometres away)

opposite ■ Opposite means 'exactly on the other side of' a space.

There is a baker's opposite our house.

117
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) There's a small shop at/by the end of the road.

b) Paula was standing on/with one foot.
c) Laura has moved at/to Barcelona.
d) D on't walk at/in the road! It's dangerous!
e) From the plane we could see the m ountains below/under.
f) Brian spent his holiday at/in Hungary.
g) W hen the horse came to a small stream it jumped above/over it.
h) Julia's house is at/on the other side of the street.
i) Lisa cut her foot at/on some broken glass,
j) Tim was sitting in/on an armchair.

2 If the word underlined is not appropriate, write a new word in the space. Tick (/)
the space if the word is correct.

a) Jane's sister has a job at M anchester Airport. ........... / . ..........

b) I m et David yesterday by the city centre. .........................
c) Ellen had a large hole at her left boot. .........................
d) Jack sits in the back of the class. .........................
e) There was a small table at the bed. .........................
f) The robber was holding a gun in one hand. .........................
g) There was a beautiful portrait hanging at the wall. .........................
h) W illiam didn't feel well and his doctor sent him to hospital...................................
i) The children usually sit at the back seat of the car. .........................
j) To reach our village we take a road above the mountains. .........................

3 Complete each sentence with one suitable preposition.

a) Maria lives ............... Bellingham Road.

b) Can you put the plates b a c k ......................... the shelf please?
c) Please d on't s ta n d ......................... your desks!
d) I'd really like to l i v e ......................... the country.
e) Go down this street, and you'll see the c in e m a ......................... the right.
f) The police searched the building but there was no o n e ............................
g) I m et A n n a ......................... the bus yesterday.
h) Sorry, George isn't here at the m om ent. H e 's ............................
i) Alice wants to know w h a t's ......................... television this evening.
j) Just as Tom a rriv ed ......................... the bus stop, the bus left.

118
 G R A M M A R 30 PL ACE AND POSITION

4 Complete each sentence with one suitable preposition.

a) The statue was holding a sword ...I Q ............... one hand.

b) W hat's o n ......................... the cinem a this week?
c) W hen I lo o k ......................... the mirror, I don't recognize myself!
d) W hat have you g o t ......................... your bag?
e) Pete found someone's w a lle t......................... the pavement.
f) My fam ily moved from the c o u n try ......................... the city.
g) You've got a small h o l e ......................... your pullover.
h) The burglar c lim b e d ......................... the fence and into the garden.

5 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Karen is living at/in London Street.

b) Maggie sits by/next to Sally in the physics class.
c) I want to send this letter at/to Brazil.
d) W hen I opened the box, there was noth in g in/inside.
e) Exactly by/opposite the cinem a, there's a really good restaurant.
f) We had a holiday in a small village by/near M onte Carlo.
g) Paula lay down at/on the floor to do her exercises.
h) We had a lovely meal in/on the plane.

6 Complete each sentence with one suitable preposition.

a) Bye for now. I'll see you ...# .£ ............... school tomorrow.
b) We put a b la n k e t......................... the injured m an to keep him warm.
c) It's n ot far. We're g e ttin g ............................
d) We found our cat h id in g ......................... a car.
e) Daniel hung his c o a t ......................... the back of a chair.
f) I decided to go to the s h o p s ......................... my bike.
g) W hat tim e is the n e w s ......................... the radio?
h) I decided to visit m y g ra n d m o th er......................... hospital.

119
 Consolidation 3

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) We arrived early, so that we/in order to get tickets.

b) It was too/enough long to wait, so we went hom e.
c) Tim and Helen have arrived, and they're/there waiting outside.
d) The boy which/whose bike I borrowed had forgotten about it.
e) We went to the beach for/so that a swim.
f) Ann felt lonely because/so no one had invited her to the party.
g) Despite/Although I felt tired, I worked until late.
h) We spent a lovely holiday in/into the country.
i) Yesterday was so/such cold th at I stayed at hom e,
j) However/In spite o f the rain, we went for a walk.

2 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Although it was late, we decided to go for a walk.

It was late .........to go for a walk.
b) Jo h n is som eone with whom I used to work.
Jo h n is som eone I ....................................................with.
c) The exam was so difficult that I couldn't finish it.
It w a s ....................................................difficult exam that I couldn't finish it.
d) Although it was raining, we worked in the garden.
D e sp ite ...................................................... we worked in the garden.
e) Let's spend the afternoon at the beach.
H o w ....................................................the afternoon at the beach?
f) Ann's house has got four large bedrooms.
....................................................four large bedrooms in Ann's house.
g) We m ight feel hungry, so we'll take some sandwiches.
W e'll take some sandwiches so that w e ................................................... hungry.
h) The cat hasn't com e hom e, w hich is strange.
....................................................that the cat hasn't com e hom e.
i) Harry can 't afford to go on holiday.
Harry hasn't g o t ....................................................to go on holiday.
j) W here's the N ational Museum?
W o u ld ....................................................telling me where the National Museum is?
 G R A M M A R 31 CONSOLIDATION 3

3 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

A case o f mistaken identity

W hen Diana got off the train, (1) . .. 3 .. .. . was a woman waiting for her
( 2 ) .............the platform . ' ( 3 ) ...............?' she asked. '( 4 ) ...............a car w aiting for
you ( 5 ) ............... ' Diana was n ot very surprised, ( 6 ) ............. she thought that her
aunt must have been ( 7 ) .............busy to m eet her ( 8 ) ...............the station.
( 9 ) .............she did n ot recognize the wom an, ( 1 0 ) ...............was dressed very
formally, and had a small briefcase ( 1 1 ) .............her arm, she was ( 1 2 ) ...............
tired after the journey that she was happy to get ( 1 3 ) .............the car. The
woman, ( 1 4 ) ............., just said a few words to the driver, and then walked away.
Diana wondered ( 1 5 ) .............she was. 'It's strange that she didn't even introduce
herself,' she thought.

1) A who B there C whose D it

2) A below B to C on D in
3) A You Diana, B You're Diana, C Are you Diana D You aren't
are you isn't it Diana
4) A There's B Theirs C Its D It's
5) A out B in C inside D outside
6) A so B despite C too D as
7) A so B too C enough D very
8) A at B to C in D for
9) A However B Since C In spite of D Although
10) A sh e B who C and D whose
11) A at B in C under D by
12) A enough B so C too D very
13) A with B by C at D into
14) A however B despite C although D in spite of
15) A whether B there C who D however

4 Complete each sentence with one suitable preposition.

There was another woman (a) ...P.Q...............the bus, and Kate sat
(b ) her and started chatting. She said she was going
(c ) Forbes Road too. 'I've got an interview ( d ) ........................... a place
called M urcott House,' said Kate. 'Is it ( e ) ......................... the bus stop?' 'It's not
far. It's ( f ) ......................... the right ( g ) ........................... the end of the street,' the
woman replied. 'In fact, I live ( h ) ............................W hen I look out of my
window, I can see people working ( i ) ............................' W hen they arrived
( j ) ......................... the stop, they got off and walked up the street together.

121
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 What would you say in these situations?

a) You want to know if Andrew has ever been to America. Ask him.

b) You w ant to know if Andrew has ever been to America. Ask Amanda.
Has AtWre-W..ever been. tc.Antericq?
c) You w ant to know if Rita likes rap music. Ask Isabel.

d) You want to know if Rita likes rap music. Ask her.

e) You want to know if Nigel enjoyed the film . Ask him.

f) You want to know if Nigel enjoyed the film. Ask Petra.

g) You want to know if Maria is going to London next summer. Ask her.

h) You want to know if Maria is going to London next summer. Ask Patricia.

i) You want to ask Patricia if you can borrow her m obile phone. Ask her.

j) You want to ask Patricia if she could lend you her m obile phone. Ask her.

6 Complete each sentence, using the verb given where necessary.

a) '(have got) ...y.Q&.Y&.&Q.i'............... ........a book, haven't you?' 'Yes, thanks.'

b) 'They'll be back by 6 . 0 0 , ....................................................?' 'I expect so.'
c) '( g o ) ....................................................for a walk, shall we? 'Good idea!'
d) 'You (le a v e )....................................................now, are you? Stay a bit longer.'
'Sorry, I can't. I have to catch the bus.'
e) 'Jim and Sara have seen the f il m ,.................................................?' 'Yes, I think so.'
f) 'You can m eet Helen at the s ta tio n ,................................................... ?' 'Yes, of
course I can.'
g) '( b e ) ....................................................here yesterday, were you?' 'No, I wasn't.'
h) 'You don't happen to know the t im e ,................................................... ?' 'Sorry, I
d on 't.'
i) 'B oth drivers were driving too f a s t ,................................................... ?' 'Yes, that's
right.'
j) 'You (fo rg e t)....................................................the milk, did you?' 'No. Here it is.'

122
 G R A M M A R 31 CONSOLIDATION 3

7 Rewrite each pair of sentences as one sentence. Do not change the meaning.

a) Sue read a book. She really enjoyed it.

w h ich
Sue .f t . k wh r . . . . CMl l y. ....................................................enjoyed.
b) Some friends visited me. They brought me a present.
who
The frie n d s..............................................................................................
c) I stayed in a hotel. It was cheaper than this one.
that
The h o t e l.................................................................................................
d) I borrowed a friend's bike. He wanted it back.
whose

e) I saw the vase in the shop. I wanted to buy it.

that
I w a n ted ...................................................................................................
f) A girl sings in the group. She's got green hair.
who
The g ir l.....................................................................................................
g) I m et a girl. Her brother is in m y class.
whose

h) We're taking the train. It leaves at 4.30.

that
The t r a in .................................................................................................. .................... at 4.30.
i) A m an knocked at the door. He was selling brushes.
who
The m a n ...................................................................................................
j) I saw a film with Luke. It was interesting.
which
The f i l m ...................................................................................................

123
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

8 Look carefully at each line. Some lines are correct but some have a word which
should not be there. Tick (/ ) each correct line. If a line has a word which should
not be there, write the word in the space.

A case o f mistaken identity

After a few m inutes, the car stopped in front of 1 ...........
a large hotel. The driver who opened the door, and 2 ...Mktf...
said, 'Please follow m e.' They went up in to a lift. 3 ..................
Then there was a long corridor with two or three 4 ..................
doors. Although it seemed strange so that the car hadn't 5 ..................
taken her to her aunt's house, Diana who wasn't surprised. 6 ...............
Her aunt, who she was very rich, owned several large 7 ...............
hotels, w hich she often stayed in them . I suppose she felt 8 ..................
so m uch bored at hom e that she decided to stay here. 9 ..................
'Please you wait here, will you?' said the driver, and 1 0 ...............
disappeared into a room at the end of the corridor. 11 ...............
There seemed to be a lot of people that in one of the 1 2 ...............
rooms. Then the driver, who he hadn't been gone long, 1 3 ...............
cam e back at and asked Diana to follow him . They went 1 4 ...............
into a large room full of people, who all started clapping. 1 5 ...............
There was a poster that it said, 'D iana Harris, Supermodel.' 1 6 ...............
'O h dear,' said Diana, 'I think so there's been a mistake!' 1 7 ...............

Problem 1 Check the different uses of so, too and enough in Grammar 22.
check When do we use so and such ?

2 Check the differences between although, however and despite/in spite of in

Grammar 23.

3 Can you add any more expressions to the list of functions in Gramar 24?
How important is the intonation of your voice in sounding polite?
What do you say in similar situations in your language?

4 Check in Grammar 25 for when you can leave out relative pronouns.

5 Check in Grammar 29 for the meaning of they're, their and there.

6 Check in Grammar 30 for the differences between at, in and to.

124
 GRAMMAR

32 Time expressions

Explanations
in, on and at in
Years in 1999
M onths in January
Seasons in the sum m er
Parts of the day in the morning/afternoon/evening

on
Days of the week on Wednesday, on Friday morning
Special days on my birthday, on Christmas Day

at
Times of the day at 4 .0 0 , at midday, at midnight
'th e weekend' at the weekend
Holiday periods at Christmas/Easter
Meals at breakfast/lunch/dinner
Parts of the day: 'night' at night

Relation to today 5 September the day before yesterday

6 September yesterday
7 September today
8 September tomorrow
9 September the day after tomorrow

Parts of yesterday, yesterday morning yesterday afternoon last night

today and this morning this afternoon tonight
tomorrow tomorrow morning tomorrow afternoon tomorrow night

Calendar ■ In the UK people say the seventh o f September or September the seventh.
references People write 7 September or 7th September or September 7th.
Full dates are written Day/M onth/Year: 7 /9 /0 3 .

m In the US people say September seven and write September 7.

Full dates are written M onth/Day/Year: 9 /7 /0 3 .

for; since and ago We use for and since with the present perfect to talk about tim e. For refers to a
period of tim e and since refers to when it started.
I've lived here for six years. I studied French for two years.
I've lived here since 2001. I've been waiting since 3.30.
Ago means 'before the present'
We arrived five hours ago. I knew that ages ago!

125
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

during or for? During and for are both used to talk about periods of time. During answers the
question 'W hen?'. For answers the question 'How long?'.
/ didn't feel nervous during the performance.
The perform ance lasted for forty-five minutes.

by or until? By means 'on or before'. Until means 'up to'.

We'll be there by 6.00. (perhaps earlier)
I waited for Alex until 6.00, and then I left. (all the time up to 6.00)
Please give m e your homework by Friday. (Thursday would be fine)
I'll be away until Friday. (all the time up to Friday)

on time or in time? On time means 'at the right time'. In time means 'with enough time to do something'.
The plane took o ff exactly on time.
We arrived in time to have a meal before the plane left.

once and one day Once m eans 'at one tim e in my life' and only refers to the past. One day can
refer to the past or the future.
Once I owned a motorbike.
One day I was walking through the town centre when I met fill.
One day I'll be famous!

now and nowadays Now means 'at the present tim e' or 'im m ediately'. Nowadays also means 'at the
present tim e' and is used to make a strong contrast with the past.
Peter used to live in Rome, but now he's living in Florence.
You have to finish ... Now!
Nowadays people are not as polite as they used to be.

Note that the word 'actually' in English does not m ean 'at the present tim e'. It
m eans 'in fact' or 'really'. This is a com m on mistake.

then, afterwards, ■ Then and afterwards are similar. Then is used like 'next' in a sequence, afterwards
after and later is used like 'at a later tim e'. Afterwards can com e at the end of the sentence.
We went to the cinema, and then we had a pizza.
We went to the cinema, and afterwards we had a pizza.
We went to the cinema, and had a pizza afterwards.

■ After is usually followed by an object.

After the film we had a pizza. After that we went home.

■ Later means 'after some tim e'.

Mrs fam es isn't here at the moment. Can you come back later?

at the end, in the ■ A t the end refers to a point in tim e.

end and at last At the end o f the film we all cried.

■ In the end m eans 'after a lot of tim e' or eventually'.

We waited for Tim for ages, and in the end we left.

m At last makes a com m ent that we are pleased a long wait has ended.
At last we can be together!

126
 G R A M M A R 32 TIME E X P R E S S I O N S

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I met Tina a dav/one dav last week.

b) In these days/Nowadays everyone seems to watch too m uch television.
c) This m orning/The morning I was busy in the garden.
d) We have to finish this project by/until the end of the week.
e) Bye. I'll see you the day after tomorrow/the next day.
f) During/W hile the film I remembered where I'd left my keys.
g) Jo h n played tennis, and after/afterwards had a shower.
h) Helen's birthday is in/on January 10th.

2 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) We had lunch, and afterwards we went for a coffee.

A fte r....vV£. h & f L / } . W . 4 . . l & Y & k ,.. v J t . fo r. . c o f f t c . ...........
b) Jill is never late for lessons.
Jill is a lw a y s.................................................................................
c) I w on't leave before 8.00.
I'll be h e r e ....................................................................................
d) I've been living here for three m onths.
I started living h e r e .................................................................
e) W hen we m et for lunch it was 12.00.
We m et for lu n c h .....................................................................
f) W hat do you do in your country on January 1st?
W hat do you do in your country on t h e ........................ ?
g) I'll see you n ot tomorrow but the next day.
I'll see you t h e ............................................................................
h) It's 10.00 and I've been waiting here since 7.00.
I've been waiting h e r e ............................................................ hours.

3 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) Would you like to go o u t ..... dfy..............my birthday?

b) Rita moved to this town four y e a rs ............................
c) I won't phone Jason now. I'll phone h i m .......................
d) I woke up tw ic e ......................... the night.
e) m idnight the frog turned into a prince.
f) People in cities used to take the bus, b u t ......................... most use their cars.
g) Luckily Rachel arrived ju s t ......................... tim e to catch the train.
h) We felt fine in the restaurant, but we both felt i l l ............................
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) I spend the summer at the seaside,

in
I j o to the. sms idc iyi the summer.
b) I started at this school in 1997.
since

c) George had a bath and after that washed his hair,

then

d) Dina left my house at 10.00.

until

e) The train arrived exactly w hen it was supposed to.

on time

f) I w on't arrive later than 2.00.

by

g) Paul tried hard but finally gave up.

end

h) I was too late to say goodbye to Lisa,

time

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) Did you sleep well .............night?

b) the hot weather, we have our meals in the garden.
c) the lesson, Mike and Carmen decided to play basketball.
d) Jo h n hasn't seen C ristin a ......................... three weeks.
e) I know t h a t ......................... day you will be a star!
f) It's very im portant to a rriv e ......................... tim e for the exam ination.
g) The robber ran out of the bank and was arrested s h o rtly .........................
h) There is a lot of noise in our s tr e e t......................... night.

128
 Countable and uncountable nouns

Explanations
Countable and ■ A countable noun has a singular and a plural form. The plural may be
uncountable irregular. We can use numbers with it.
one book, three books one possibility, two possibilities, one piece, four pieces
one person, three people one child, two children one woman, four women

■ An uncountable noun has only one form. We cannot use numbers with it.
work love progress water information English (language)

■ Typical uncountables are:

Materials and substances: plastic, iron, wood, paper, water, air, coffee
Abstract ideas: life, fun, freedom, progress, health, time
Activities: work, travel, sleep, football, help, research
Human feelings: happiness, anger, honesty, hope, respect, courage

■ Note the words below w hich are uncountable in English but countable in
many other languages:
accommodation, advice, behaviour, business, cash, equipment, furniture, health,
homework, information, knowledge, luggage, money, permission, rubbish,
scenery, traffic, travel, weather, work

Countable and ■ Countable nouns can be singular or plural.

uncountable: The book is over there.
grammar The books are over there.
U ncountable nouns are always singular.
French is difficult.
His advice was very useful.

■ W ith countable nouns we can use a/an and some.

Sue has got a book/some books about A ncient Egypt.
W ith uncountable nouns we cannot use a/an.
Sue has got some money to go on holiday this year.
Could I have some information?

some or any? m Some is com m on in positive sentences. Any is com m on in questions and
negatives.
We've got some juice, but we haven't got any glasses.
Have you got any cups?

■ But we can use some in a question if it is an offer or request.

Could I have some more tea, please?
And we can use any in positive sentences if we m ean 'it doesn't m atter
which'.
I'm free any day next week.

129
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

■ Any always has the m eaning of 'n o lim it'. Compare:

Is there something I can do to help? (I know what to do)
Is there anything I can do to help? (I'll do whatever I can)
Have you got some letters for me?
(There are particular letters I am expecting)
Have you got any letters for me?
(I have no idea if you have letters for me or not)

many and much Many is used for countable nouns and m uch is used for uncountable nouns.
They are used m ainly in questions and negatives.
How many chairs are there? There aren't many cushions.
How much money have we got? There isn't much water here.

Change of ■ Some words can be countable or uncountable with a change in meaning. The
meaning countable m eaning is specific and the uncountable m eaning is general.

a fish (the anim al) some fish (a portion of food)

a business (a com pany) business (in general)
a noise (a specific noise) noise (in general)
a hair (a single piece) hair (all together)
a painting (one object) painting (the activity/hobby)
a work (a work of art) work (in general)
a loaf (a loaf of bread) some bread (in general)
a coffee (a cup of coffee) some coffee (the material)
a paper (a newspaper) some paper (the material)
a wood (a small forest) some wood (the material)
an iron (for pressing clothes) some iron (the material)
a glass (for drinking) some glass (the material)

■ Look at these examples:

I heard a strange noise. I can't stand noise.
I bought a painting last week. Do you like painting?
Diana had a very good education. Education is very important.
A knowledge o f boats is useful. Knowledge is the key to success.
Can you buy a loaf from the shop? Can you buy some bread from the shop?

Other problems ■ One group of nouns only has a plural form and takes a plural verb: clothes,
contents, feelings, glasses (for your eyes), jeans, stairs, trousers
My trousers are too tight. The stairs are very steep.

■ One group of nouns can be followed by either a singular or plural verb: army,
audience, class, company, crowd, family, government, group, public, team
The Government has/have decided to resign.

■ The word 'news' is followed by a singular verb.

The news is on.

■ The word 'police' is followed by a plural verb

The police are coming.

130
 G R A M M A R 35 C O U N T A B L E A N D U N C O U N T A B L E N O U N S

Practice

1 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) How m uch/How many pasta have we got?

b) W here is/are my new trousers?
c) I put some/any chocolate somewhere, but where is it?
d) Peter went to buy a/some glass so he could fix the broken windows.
e) I'm afraid we haven’t got m uch/m any time.
f) How much/How many furniture shops are there?
g) I've found the milk but I can 't find a/some glass.
h) Mary's advice was/were n ot very useful.

2 Put one word in each space. Put a dash (-) if the space should be blank.
a) My trousers need ironing. Have you got ...{WV............... iron?
b) Could you go to the baker's and b u y ......................... loaf, please?
c) I'd l i k e ......................... inform ation about trains to Paris.
d) Louise h a s ......................... very good health.
e) The war e n d e d ......................... years ago.
f) Vanessa b o u g h t......................... paper and read it on the bus.
g) Could you give m e ......................... advice, please?
h) Do you k n o w ......................... people in this village?

3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence and contains the word in bold.

a) Let me tell you what I think you should do.

advice
Let me .................................................
b) I need a clean pair of trousers,
any
I haven't got .......................................................................................
c) There isn't a lot of water in the pool,
much
...................................................................................................................... water in the pool.
d) I have to wash my hair,
washing
My hair ..........................................................................................................................................
e) The book didn't contain any inform ation,
in
The inform ation .........................................................................................................................

131
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Choose the best alternative, 1 or 2, to complete each sentence.

a) The fire is going to go out. Can you go and get .^.9.9.4. ........................
1 a wood 2 some wood
b) m oney all over the floor!
1 There was 2 There were
c) Lemonade? Sorry, no, we haven't g o t .................................................................
1 some 2 any
d) Peter k e e p s...............................................................at the bottom of his garden.
1 a chicken 2 some chicken
e) The inform ation we were g iv e n .................................................................
1 were very useful 2 was very useful
f) people were there on the bus?
1 How many 2 How much
g) Look at Rita's hair................................................................. !
1 It's green 2 They're green
h) I've called the police a n d .................................................................
1 they're on their way 2 it's on its way
i) The assembly hall was full o f .................................................................
1 a noise 2 noise

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) I wanted to have a bath but there wasn't any hot ....VV.^felT..........

b) W hen is t h e ......................... on? I haven't heard any today.
c) Tim's eyesight was bad and he had to have n e w ............................
d) Laura had to pay extra at the airport because she had too m u c h .....................
e) If you want to make an om elette there are s o m e ......................... in the fridge.
f) You can 't cut that with a knife. You need s o m e ............................
g) We need some bread. Could you go and buy a la rg e ............................
h) W hen the burglar ran out of the house he was arrested by a ...........................

132
 GRAM M AR

34 Articles
| j r
1
• 0*

Explanations
Indefinite article: We use a/an when the listener does n ot know w hich person or thing we are
a/an talking about. Compare:
Tim works in a factory. (we don't know w hich factory)
Tim works in the factory down the road. (we know w hich factory)

If we refer to som ething for the first tim e it will be new inform ation for the
listener and so we use a/an. Other references to the same thing use the
because now the listener knows what we are talking about.
I've bought a new mobile phone. It's great. The phone connects to the Internet.

We use a/an to describe som ething.

It's a lovely day. Kazakstan is an enormous country.
Note these two ways of saying the same thing:
An ocelot is a wild animal, similar to a leopard.
Ocelots are wild animals, similar to leopards.

We use a/an to describe the job or the character of a person.

Mary is an engineer. Peter is a fool!

A/an m ean 'one', so we cannot use a/an with uncountable nouns.

I've got a brother and a sister. (not two)
Can you give me some information? (not tm information)

Note that a/an are unstressed, and are pronounced h i and /an/.

Zero article We use zero article with plurals and uncountable nouns w hen we are talking
(no article) generally. Compare:
Dogs are not allowed in this shop (dogs in general)
The dogs next door bark all night. (some particular dogs)
Milk is good for you. (milk in general)
The milk on the top sh elf is fat-free. (we know w hich milk)

Here are some examples showing the use of zero article to talk generally:
Materials: This chair is made o f plastic and leather.
Food and drink I love chocolate. I don't like orange juice.
Abstract ideas: War is a terrible thing.
Languages: Spanish is spoken by about 3 0 0 million people.
Activities: Speaking is not permitted during the examination.

Zero article is used with m ost countries, states and cities.

Marie comes from France.
Los Angeles is in California.
But countries which are a group or plural have a definite article.
We left the United Kingdom and crossed to the Netherlands.
Note also that Great Britain has zero article.
133
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

■ Zero article is used with geographical areas, lakes, m ountains and islands.
We visited Lake Victoria. It's in East Africa.
They climbed Mt. Everest in record time.
Helen spent her holidays on Crete.

■ Zero article is used with m ost streets.

I bought this dress from a shop in Bond Street.
But we use the for the phrase the High Street (this means the main shopping
street in a town).

■ Zero article is used with names of buildings with a place name before.
We visited Blenheim Palace and Coventry Cathedral.
But we use the w hen there is a phrase with o f after the noun.
We visited the Houses o f Parliament.

■ Zero article is used with names, but the is used with titles.
Carol Parker is the Minister o f Communications.

■ Zero article is used with meals when we refer to them in general.

D inner is at 7 .3 0 .
But compare with these examples where we are not talking generally:
At the end o f the conference there was a dinner. (m entioned for first time)
The dinner they serve here is really fantastic. (we know which dinner)

■ Zero article is used with general historical references

Prehistoric Europe/Ancient Rome is a fascinating period o f history.

m Zero article is used with by for general forms of transport.

We went there by car.
But compare with these examples where we are not talking generally:
We went there in a really old car. (m entioned for first time)
We went there in the car my sister uses. (we know which car)
Note also that we say on foot.

■ Zero article is used with certain buildings, where the purpose of the building
is more im portant than the place itself. Compare:
Jim is in prison. (which prison is not important)
My company is rebuilding th e prison. (one particular building)
Words of this type are:
be in or go to hospital, prison, bed, class, court
be at or go to work, school, university, sea
with 'hom e' be at home, go home

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 33: Countable am

uncountable nouns

134
 G R A M M A R 34 ARTICLES 1

Practice

See Grammar 35 for activities including the.

Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Have you ever visited United Kingdom?

.Hm z .you.tvtr, visited,' the..United /kingdom?....
b) On our trip, we visited the Canterbury Cathedral.

c) Love is wonderful thing.

d) The pets are not permitted in this hotel.

e) Rabbit is small wild furry anim al with long ears.

f) The New York is in United States of the America.

2 Put a/an or leave the space blank.

a) ....77..... love makes the world go round.

b) Sheila has g o t .............German car.
c) Rita works i n .............office i n .............. West Street.
d) I've g o t .............friend who i s ...............electrician.
e) Paul goes t o .............special school f o r ...............m usicians.
f) Jack is i n .............hospital and can't go t o ...............school.
g) Valerie wants to go t o .............university and study to b e .............. doctor.

3 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Mary teaches English.

Mary ...b f...^.^. .................................. English teacher.
b) Charles has a factory job.
Charles w o rk s....................................................factory.
c) You are not allowed to park here.
................................................... n ot allowed here.
d) Fabio is on a ship at the m om ent.
At the m o m e n t....................................................sea.
e) We walked to the station.
We went t o ....................................................foot.
 Explanations
Definite article: the ■ We use the when it is clear w hich thing or person we are talking about. The
points below explain this in more detail. Compare:
The war between the two countries lasted for six weeks.
(we know w hich war)
War is a terrible thing.
(war in general, so zero article)

■ We often use the when we refer to som ething that we m entioned before,
using a/an.
We saw a good film last night. It was the new film by Berghini.
But we can use the for the first tim e that we refer to som ething if it is clear
from the context w hich one we mean.
Where's the newspaper?

■ We often use the with phrases including of. Compare:

The film was about the love o f a girl for her cat.
Love is a wonderful thing! (love in general, so zero article)

■ We use the when there is only one of som ething. It is clear which one we
mean.
How many astronauts have landed on the moon?

■ We use the for nationalities and other groups.

I really admire the Italians.
The old, the sick and the unemployed need our special care.

m Note these other uses of the:

Playing musical instrum ents: Do you play the guitar?

Time: In the past/in the future
But: at present
Superlatives This is the biggest one. / You are the first.
Fixed phrases The sooner the better.
Names of ships We sailed on the Neptune.
Oceans The Pacific, the Atlantic
Rivers The Amazon, the Danube

m The is usually pronounced /Qs/ before consonants and /Si:/ before vowels.
The beginning. The end.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 38: Making

comparisons

136
 G R A M M A R 35 ARTICLES 2

Practice

1 Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) W here's an/the electric heater? I can 't find it.

b) W hat happened at an/the end of a/the film?
c) David has an/the appointm ent at a/the optician's.
d) A n/T he old person sometim es feels lonely.
e) Peter owns a/the largest model plane in a/the world.
f) Luckily a/the fire brigade soon came and put out a/the fire.
g) Harry's m other bought him a/the guitar for his birthday present.
h) I'm thinking of buying a/the new pair of trousers.
i) In the end there was a/the war between the two countries.
j) I didn't know an/the answer to a/the question, so I left it out.

2 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) Frances is a very good pianist.

Frances .................................very well.
b) Poor people need help from the Governm ent.
The Governm ent sh o u ld .......................................................................... poor.
c) Tracey's bike is faster than everyone else's.
T racey 's.......................................................................... fastest.
d) Tom has a doctor's appointm ent.
T o m .......................................................................... doctor's.
e) The film was about an artist's life.
The f i l m .......................................................................... of an artist.
f) The only goal of the m atch was scored by Italy.
The only goal of the m a tc h .......................................................................... Italians.

3 Put a/an or the in each space or leave the space blank.

a) President is largest cruise ship in . . worl d.

b) Everyone i n .............class agreed t h a t ...............happiness was im portant.
c) T h e re 's.............strange person a t ...............door.
d) Someone who s a w .............robbery c a lle d ...............police.
e) A t .............beginning o f .............. f il m ,...............tall m an sat in front of me.
f) W hen I arrived a t .............station, I a t e ...............sandwich and waited for
.............train.
g) person w i th ...............good education usually g e t s .............. good job.
h) Have you s e e n .............new film a t .............. Embassy cinem a?

137
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

I
Practice

Includes practice of Grammar 34 and 35.

Put a/an/the in each space, or leave the space blank.

a) Chinese eat ..?!........lot of ...rr........rice.

b) most people thought t h a t .............. Beatles w e re ...............very good
group.
c) I usually d r in k .............glass o f .............. milk i n .............. morning.
d) W h a t's .............difference b e tw e e n ...............rabbit a n d .............. hare?
e) first person who cro sse s.............. finishing line i s ...............winner.
f) p la y in g ...............guitar i s ...............in te re stin g .............. hobby.
g) Rebecca got o n ...............bus and b o u g h t.............. ticket.
h) T h e r e 's .............newspaper shop a t ...............end o f .............. street.
i) I n .............past, m ost o f ...............population lived i n .............. country.
j) I n e e d e d .............new pair of trousers so my m other gave m e .............. money.

2 Correct the errors in these sentences by adding or removing a/an/the.

a) Could you get loaf of bread from baker's?

Could..you. .get..a . Loaf. of. bread.from the..baker's?.....................
b) The m ilk is good for the children.

c) The Jo h n is at a work at m om ent.

d) We travelled to the Hungary by a car.

e) Have you got a brother or the sister?

f) War between two countries was longest in the history.

g) W ho was first astronaut who walked on m oon?

h) Nile is longest river in world.

138
 G R A M M A R 35 ARTICLES 2

3 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) We travelled there by train,

on
Wc twyellget' ikcrc oyi the- tmivi.
b) There isn't a larger size than this one.
largest

c) Clara sings for her living,

singer

d) People who are unemployed often feel depressed,

the

e) Anna is learning to be a guitarist,

play

f) Mike is an office-worker.
works

g) Marie is a Frenchwoman.
France

h) David is still working,

at

4 Put a/an/the in each space, or leave the space blank.

(a) ...A ..... friend of m ine, Sally M ilton, wanted to becom e ( b ) .............dancer
when she was ( c ) .............girl, ( d ) ...............every m orning before ( e ) ...............school
she used to practise in ( f ) .............living room at ( g ) ...............hom e, ( h ) ...............
dancers need ( i ) .............lot of ( j ) ...............exercise, so Sally used to go to
( k ) .............gym two or three times (1 ).............. week. In ( m ) .............. end she got
( n ) .............job in ( o ) ...............theatre com pany and becam e ( p ) ...............actress. In
( q ) .............fact, ( r ) .............. last week I saw her in ( s ) ...............programme on
( t ) .............television!

139
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) I didn't expect to see Darrel.

................................... last person I expected to see.
b) Do you have a dog in your house?
D o ..............................................................................hom e?
c) Nick teaches chemistry.
Nick i s ..............................................................................teacher.
d) My friends gave me a wonderful present.
.............................................................................. gave me was wonderful.
e) The Australian capital is Canberra.
C a n b erra .............................................................................. Australia.
f) The French lesson is the first tomorrow.
.............................................................................. French.
g) Som eone is phoning you.
There's som eone o n ................................................................................
h) We saw a very entertaining film last night.
.............................................................................. was very entertaining.

6 In each pair of sentences, fill in one space with the and the other space with a
dash (-) to show no article.

a) 1 For me, .....T!.... football is my life.

2 . . . f e . . football in the second division is a much lower standard.
b) 1 They say t h a t .............love makes the world go round.
2 They say t h a t .............love of a m other for her child is the strongest kind.
c) 1 .............inform ation in this article will be very useful for my project.
2 .............inform ation about the Government's defence plans is hard to find.
d) 1 .............students in my new class all seem very friendly.
2 .............students should be in their classes by 9.00.
e) 1 I n e e d .............help!
2 Thanks very m uch f o r .............help you gave me yesterday.
f) 1 .............computers in the January sale are not too expensive.
2 These days everybody needs to know how to u s e .............computers.
g) 1 .............English are famous for their strange sense of humour.
2 .............English programmes are quite easy to find on satellite TV.
h) 1 Many of my friends are stu d y in g .............business at university.
2 My father is involved i n .............business of buying and selling houses.

140
 GR AM M AR

36 Determiners and pronouns

Explanations
all, some ■ all
All is usually followed by a plural noun and verb.
All students are expected to arrive on time.
In the expressions all day, all night, all the time, the noun is singular.

We can also say All (of) the ... , and in this expression we can replace the by a
possessive adjective (my etc.).
All (of) the tickets for the match had been sold.
All (oft my friends have bikes.
Not is also used with all.
Not all students have bikes.
Not all (of) my friends have bikes.

All is also used as a pronoun at the beginning of a sentence.

All I want is some peace and quiet!
All I need is £ 4 0 0 ! All I have is £ 5 0 !
All is not norm ally used as a single-word object. Instead we use everything.
Tell me everything that happened on your holiday.
(NOT Toll me all that happened ...)

■ some
Some is used in the same way. Some is n ot used with not.
Some students are expected to help.

no, none m no
We can use no with a singular noun or a plural noun.
No students arrived on time for the last lesson!
No student arrived on time for the last lesson!

We do not use no if there is another negative word. In this case we use any.
I didn't see any students arriving on time for the last lesson.

m none
We do not use No o f ... or No the . . . . Instead, we use none o f the or none on its
own.
None o f the guests are here yet.
'Were there any letters for m e?' Sorry, none for you. '
Note that in the first example there is a plural verb 'are'. This is more
com m on, although a singular verb is possible.

141
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

To emphasize the idea of none we can use none at all, or not one, or not a ... .
'How many people were surfing?' -> 'None at all! '
'How many people were surfing?' -> 'Not one! '
'How many people were surfing?' -> 'Not a single one!'

O ther examples:
Not one person has done any homework!
I h aven't had a single phone-call today.

each, every The m eaning of each and every is similar and often either word is possible. They
are both followed by a singular noun.
Each person in the room was wearing a hat.
Every person in the room was wearing a hat.

m each
We use each w hen we think of the members of a group separately, one by
one.
She spent some time talking to each person in the room.
Each is often used with one.
There were ten people in the room. Each one was wearing a hat.
Each o f ... can be used.
Each o f you can carry one parcel.
Each can be used after the subject, or at the end of a sentence.
My sisters each have their own room.
My uncle gave my brother and I $ 5 0 each. (= gave $50 to each of us.)

■ every
We use every when we think of all the members of a group together.
Every box was wrapped in coloured paper.
We cannot say every of.
We cannot use every after the subject, or at the end of a sentence.

both, either, neither ■ both

Both refers to two things and means 'th e one and the other'. It is used with a
plural noun and verb. Note the structures and positions.
Both people/Both the people/Both o f the people in the room were wearing
hats.
The people in the room were both wearing hats.
There were two people in the room. Both (o f them) were wearing hats.
Both o f you can help me.
You can both help me.

142
 G R A M M A R 36 DET ERMINERS AND PRONOUNS

■ either
Either means 'this one or the other one'. It is followed by a singular noun
and verb.
We can paint it green or blue. Either colour matches the walls.
But note that w hen we use either with the words 'end' or 'side' then the
m eaning changes to both.
There are trees on either side o f the street.
We can use either of.
Either o f the books will be very useful.

m neither
Neither means 'n ot this one or the other one'.
We can't paint it green or blue. Neither colour matches the walls.
There are trees on neither side o f the street.
Neither o f these books will be very useful.

SEE ALSO

Grammar 45: Pronouns

143
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) There were none/no people at the bus stop.

b) My two brothers each/every have their own car.
c) Not one/Not no student has com e late this week!
d) Some of/Some restaurants charge extra for bread.
e) Sorry, but I can't hear either/neither of you properly.
f) W hen I got on my bike I noticed that both tyres/every tyre were flat.

2 Put one suitable word in each space.

a) I sent letters to ten people, b u t ................................... 0YI&........ replied!

b) I'm sorry, but there a r e ......................... tickets left for the concert.
c) I ate for breakfast was a banana.
d) I t r ie d ......................... the supermarkets, b u t ........................... one was closed.
e) I had two phone calls, but there w e re ......................... for you, I'm afraid.
f) Both roads lead to the city centre. You can t a k e ......................... one.

3 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in bold.

a) All the dogs in the garden were barking,

every
... E v .w y .. .. m . t k & .g M .d m -.. M a s ., h a r k i n g , ........................................................................

b) Nobody at all cam e to the meeting,

single

c) Not one of my friends has got a car.

none

d) This chair is n ot com fortable, and nor is this other one.

neither

e) There weren't any boys in the class,

no

f) We only want to listen to a few CDs.

all

g) The two books are interesting,

both

144
 G R A MM A R 36 DET ERMINERS AND PRONOUNS

4 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) These books aren't interesting.

None . .. o f . $ ! & . $ . . b o o k s ..U / e t r t m t c r c s t i n g ,
b) You have only ten m inutes left.
A ll.......................................................................................................................................
c) The hotels were both unsuitable.
N e ith e r.............................................................................................................................
d) No one replied to m y letter.
Not a ..................................................................................................................................
e) Paul and his brother David are ill.
B o t h ...................................................................................................................................
f) Nobody in the team played badly.
A ll.......................................................................................................................................
g) The police searched all the houses in the street.
E v ery ..................................................................................................................................
h) Not all the questions in the test were easy.
S o m e ..................................................................................................................................

5 Underline the correct continuation of each sentence.

a) We looked at two different houses but ...

1 both of them were too small. 2 either of them was too small.
b) Liz invited a dozen guests to her party but ...
1 no turned up. 2 none turned up.
c) Helen and Mark are well behaved, but please let me know if ...
1 both of them misbehave. 2 either of them misbehaves.
d) M ichaela feels so tired because she ...
1 didn't sleep for a single m om ent. 2 slept all for a m om ent.
e) Write down the num ber of the car on this list ...
1 each tim e one passes. 2 all the tim e one passes.
f) How many presents did you get on your birthday? ...
1 One at all. 2 None at all.
g) There were ten people standing at the bus stop and ...
1 all people had umbrellas. 2 each one had an umbrella.
h) We wrote all our answers on the blackboard but ...
1 no one of us was right. 2 none of us was right.

145
 GRAM M AR

37 J Adjectives and ad
Explanations
Adjectives Adjectives describe a noun and are used in front of nouns. They have the same
form for singular and plural. They do not change for male and female.

Order of ■ W hen we have more than one adjective, we use this order:
adjectives
O pinion lovely, difficult
Size large, long
Age old, second-hand
Shape round, square
Temperature hot, cold
Colour green, blue
Material wooden, plastic
Purpose (what it is for?) swimming pool
Final noun swimming pool

Here are some examples:

An old leather football boot. (age, material, purpose, noun)
A lovely green silk shirt. (opinion, colour, material, noun)
It is n ot advisable to put more than three adjectives together.

In the 'm aterial' and 'purpose' categories we can have nouns used as
adjectives: plastic, steel, swimming, football.

Gradable Look at this sequence:

adjectives
b o ilin g s — hot warm cool cold- -freezing

Adjectives in the middle of the sequence are called 'gradable'. We can make
them stronger or weaker with words like very, a bit, extremely.
Adjectives at the end of the sequence are called 'non-gradable'. We cannot
make them stronger or weaker because they are already extreme. But we can
emphasise them with absolutely.
It was absolutely boiling in Athens last week. (NOT very boiling)

Adjectives ending Adjectives ending -ing describe som ething that we are reacting to (outside
-ing and -ed
Adjectives ending -ed describe our feelings and reactions (inside us).
My work was tiring. It made me tired.
This film is interesting. I'm interested in the film.
Others of the same kind are: excited/exciting, embarrassed/embarrassing,
worried/worrying, bored/boring.

146
 G R A M M A R 37 A D JE CT IV E S AND AD VERBS

Adjectives with be, ■ Adjectives can be used on their own, w ithout a noun, after these verbs.
become, feel, look This beach is fantastic! Sue has become rich.
I feel terrible! You look ill!
If we use more than one adjective, note the use of com m as and the word
'and':
Sue has become happy and rich.
Sue has become happy, rich and famous.

one ■ We can use one instead of repeating a noun.

I like your new coat. It's a really lovely one!

Adverbs ■ Adverbs describe a verb. An adverb says how (quickly), when ( tomorrow ) or
where (over there) som ething happens.
Many 'how ' adverbs are formed by adding -ly to an adjective.
slow - slowly quick - quickly careful - carefidly

m Some adverbs have the same form as adjectives. Examples include: fast, hard,
early, late, high, low, right, wrong.
This train is very fast, (adj)
This train goes fast, (adv)
It was a very hard question, (adj)
We worked hard, (adv)

■ Note that the adverb hardly is n ot related to the m eaning of hard.

I could hardly stand up. ('hardly' = alm ost not)

■ Remember that frequency adverbs com e after be and auxiliaries, but before
other verbs.
Katherine is never late. She has never arrived late.
Katherine never arrives late.

Adverbs of degree ■ Adverbs of degree are used with adjectives to describe how much.
(intensifiers) Peter is very/really/extremely happy at his new school.
Other adverbs of degree are: a little, a bit, quite, terribly.

[ - » SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 3: Present time 2

147
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Put each group of words into the best order.

a) old a plastic large bag green

o[ Iflrjc old jre m .plastic bag
b) wooden square two tables

c) red a dress silk beautiful

d) silver a of jugs antique pair

e) bowl small a plastic

f) winding road country long a

g) boots some old football dirty

h) cotton long a skirt yellow

i) squeezed cold juice a freshly glass orange of

2 Underline the correct adjective in each sentence.

a) I can 't drink this tea! It's warm/boiling.

b) Look at that skyscraper! It's large/giganticl
c) Jill couldn't drive any further that day as she was so tired/tiring.
d) I love summer evenings when at last it feels cool/freezing.
e) The first part of the film was really excited/exciting.
f) That was the best play I've ever seen. It was good/fantastic.
g) You look worried/worrying. Is anything the matter?
h) We w on't go cam ping until the weather is more boiling/warmer.
i) If you feel bored/boring, why don't we go to the cinem a?
j) I didn't think you were interested/interesting in ancient history.

148
 G R A M M A R 37 A D JE CT IV ES AND ADVERB S

3 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) The old couple lived together and were happy,

happily
.T h e . o ld c o u p l t l i y t d . h a p p ily ., t o g e t h e r . .....................................................

b) This has been hard work for you.

worked

c) Chris and Paul are slow walkers,

walk

d) Georgia is a good pianist,

plays

e) Sue is a graceful dancer,

dances

f) Kate is ill.
well

g) Michael's skating was wonderful,

skates

h) Mary is a careful writer,

writes

i) Alex didn't sleep well,

slept

j) Ann completed the course with success,

successfully

149
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Complete each sentence with one of the words from the box. Use each word
once only.

extremely fast good happy hard hardly

ill quite terrible well

a) W hen I heard that Suzannah had passed her driving test I was really

b) Jack dances v e r y ......................... and never steps on people's feet.

c) Alan was so tired that he c o u ld ......................... keep his eyes open.
d) The hotel w a s ......................... , but we didn't like the food in the restaurant.
e) Alison was e x tre m e ly ......................... and spent a m onth in hospital.
f) Jo n n y was driving t o o ......................... and was stopped by the police.
g) It's n ot a wonderful film, but i t ' s ......................... good.
h) Gina worked v e r y ......................... and was given an extra holiday.
i) W hen I realized I h adn't paid for the coat, I f e l t ............................
j) I can 't afford to buy that bike because i t 's ......................... expensive.

5 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Peter has been working very hardly.

Peter Was bem working very jwrd-
b) My sister bought me a blue lovely woollen sweater.

c) This book I'm reading is extrem ely excellent.

d) David felt badly because he'd shouted at his mother.

e) Everyone in the team played good.

f) Too m uch exercise can make you feel tiring.

g) Paula felt happily when her exams were over.

h) Hans has arrived late at school never.

i) One boxer hit the other really hardly right on the chin.

j) I'm not really interesting in this car.

150
 S3
GRAM M AR

38 Making comparisons

Explanations
Comparatives and Comparatives compare two separate things.
superlatives: Mary is a better player than Monica.
meaning Superlatives compare one thing in a group with all the others.
Sarah is the best player in the team.

Comparatives and ■ One syllable

superlatives: form Comparative adjectives with one syllable are norm ally formed by adding -er
to the adjective. In one syllable words ending with one consonant, the final
consonant is doubled. Words ending in consonant + -y change -y to
long - longer big - bigger dry - drier
Superlative adjectives are norm ally formed by adding -est to the adjective.
long - the longest big - the biggest dry - the driest

■ Two or more syllables

Comparative adjectives with two or more syllables are norm ally formed with
more.
modern - more modern interesting - more interesting
Superlative adjectives are norm ally formed with most.
modern - the most modern interesting - the most interesting

Some adjectives with two syllables can be formed in either way.

common com m oner the com m onest OR
common more common the most common
Other examples include: quiet, tired, clever, polite, simple.

m Note from the examples above that the is used with superlatives. The +
superlative can also be used w ithout a noun.
Sarah is the best swimmer.
Sarah is the best.

Irregular forms Note the following irregular forms:

good better the best
bad worse the worst
far farther/further the farthest/furthest
little less the least
m uch/m any more the most
And there is a special use of old to describe family members that has an irregular
form:
old elder the eldest
This is my elder brother, fane is their eldest daughter.

151
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Adverbs In general adverbs follow the same rules as adjectives, although many comm on
short adverbs can make comparatives in two ways.
Could you drive slower, please?
Could you drive more slowly, please?
Can you work quicker?
Can you work more quickly?
Adverbs that can use both forms like this include: early, far, fast, hard, late, loud,
quick, slow.

Making ■ Than is used with comparatives.

comparisons Mary is better than Monica.
Mary is a better player than Monica.

■ Note that when we compare actions, we use an auxiliary at the end of the
sentence.
Mary plays better than Monica does. (NOT ... tfam-Memea-phiys)
You've done more work than I h ave. (NOT ... than I have done)
We can also say:
Mary plays better than Monica.
You've done more work than me.

m just as ... as is used w hen we compare two equal things.

Mary is just as good as Cathy.
Mary is just as good a player as Cathy.

u not as ... as is used w hen we compare two things that are not equal.
Cathy is not as good as Mary.
Cathy is not as good a player as Mary.

m As well as saying more than, we can also say less than.

This gam e is more interesting than the last one.
I think this gam e is less interesting than that one.

Intensifiers We can use adverbs of degree to make comparisons. Adverbs of degree include: a
bit, much, a lot, far.
This house is much/a lot/far bigger than that one.
The Italian film was much more interesting than this one.
That film was far less frightening than this one.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 37: Adjectives am

adverbs

152
 G R A M M A R 38 MAKING COMPARISONS

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) The fish was so tasty as/as tasty as the meat.

b) This book is the most interesting/the more interesting I've ever read.
c) This temple is the eldest/oldest in Europe.
d) That dress is a lot longer than/that the other one.
e) N othing is worse/worst than being stuck in a traffic jam.
f) That skyscraper is one of the taller/tallest buildings in the world.
g) The test wasn't as hard as/hard as I thought.
h) Actually, today I feel more bad/worse than I did yesterday.
i) Our journey took longer than/the longest we expected,
j) Could you work more quietly/more quieter please?

2 Complete each sentence with a comparative or superlative form of the adjective

in bold. Include any other necessary words.

a) The Nile is . . . $ ? £ . . ( ? . ! .............. ...... river in the world.

long
b) I was disappointed as the film was than I
expected,
entertaining
c) Most planes go a lot trains.
fast
d) Yesterday was one of days of the year.
hot
e) I think this book is m uch the other one.
good
f) The twins are the same height. Tim is Sue.
tall
g) The first exercise was easy but this one is
difficult
h) The M editerranean is not the Pacific Ocean.
large
i) This classroom i s ............... the one next door.
big
j) This i s .................................... television programme I've ever watched.
bad

153
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) David is a better runner than Paul.

Paul is not $9.9.4..$ . [[fl
b) Nobody in the class is taller than Alison.
Alison is t h e ..............................................................................................................................
c) I haven't w ritten as m uch as you.
You've w r itte n ..........................................................................................................................
d) Jane's hair isn't as long as Sophie's.
Sophie's hair i s .........................................................................................................................
e) No student in the school is noisier than I am!
I'm t h e .........................................................................................................................................
f) This exhibition is m uch more interesting than the last one.
The last exhibition was n o t ................................................................................................
g) This is as fast as the car can go.
The car c a n 't .............................................................................................................................
h) Kate ate m uch less than Andrew did.
Kate d id n 't ..................................................................................................................................

4 Put one suitable word in each space.

a) Our team i s .....................................................g o o d ...........................your team.

They're both the same.
b) This is one o f ..................................................... famous paintings in the world.
c) Everyone d id ......................... w o rk ...........................P h ilip .............................
d) You're not a safe driver! You should d riv e ......................... slowly.
e) Ann is t a lle r ......................... Mike but their son Dave i s ...........................tallest in
the family.
f) W hat an awful book. It's one o f .....................................................interesting I've
ever read.
g) It makes no difference, because this road is bad
......................... that one.
h) Today is cold yesterday, so I'm wearing my shorts.

5 Correct the spelling of these words where necessary.

a) bigest f) fater k) fiter

b) greattest g) smalest 1) tighter
c) shorter h) longest m) newest
d) likeliest i) hardder n) heavier
e) tallest j) wettest o) widder

154
 G R AM M AR 38 MAKING COMPARISONS

6 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Could you n ot talk so fast, please?

Could you .......... , please?
b) The last film we saw was more frightening than this one.
This f i l m .........................................................as the last one.
c) Nobody in the class cooks better than Sam.
Sam i s .........................................................in the class.
d) You ran a lot faster than I did.
I didn't r u n .........................................................you.
e) Small cars are more econom ical than large cars.
Large cars a r e .........................................................small cars.
f) Skating isn't as exciting as skiing.
Skiing i s .........................................................skating.
g) Richard doesn't work harder than Alan.
Alan works ju s t .........................................................Richard.
h) Jack isn't as interested in football as his brother is.
Jack's b r o th e r .........................................................in football than he is.
i) Bill is the youngest in the family.
Everyone else in the fa m ily .........................................................Bill.
j) I haven't eaten as m uch as you.
You've e a t e n ...........................................................

155
 GRAMMAR

39 Phrasal verbs 1

Explanations
Understanding ■ The term 'phrasal verb' means a norm al verb like get, look, take followed by
phrasal verbs one or two prepositions like back, off, up etc. Look at these examples:
1 Please take this note to my teacher.
(norm al verb m eaning: 'to move som ething from one place to another')
2 Take o ff your shoes before you come in.
(phrasal verb m eaning: 'to remove som ething')
3 We took o ff in the middle o f a storm.
(phrasal verb m eaning: 'w hen a plane goes up into the air')

W hen the preposition is added the m eaning of the original verb changes.
Sometimes there is still a relationship and you can guess the m eaning (see 2
above), sometim es there is a new m eaning that is com pletely different (see 3
above).

■ There are different types of phrasal verbs, depending on whether there is one
preposition or two, and whether the verb and preposition can be separated.
In this book Grammar 38 and 39 cover different types.

■ There are m any phrasal verbs, and only a few com m on ones are given in
these two units. W hen you see a new phrasal verb for the first tim e you
should study the con text of use, and check the m eaning in a dictionary.
Phrasal verbs are particularly com m on in inform al writing and speech.

Verbs with three Most of the verbs in the list below need an object, and the object can only
parts com e at the end, after both the prepositions:
I'm looking forward to my holidays.
W ith verbs marked with an asterisk * there is no object, and the final
preposition is not used.
catch up with* (reach someone by going faster)
You can rest now and catch up with us later.
You’re going too fast! I can't catch up!

cut down on* (reduce the am ount of)

Sheila has decided to cut down on holidays this year.
You're eating too many sweets. You should cut down.

drop in on* (visit for a short time)

Let's drop in on David while we're in Paris.
The next time you're nearby, please do drop in!

get along/on with* (have a friendly relationship with)

fam es doesn't get on well with his maths teacher.
We work in the same office, but we don't get on.

156
 G R A M M A R 39 PHRASAL VERBS 1

keep up with* (move at the same speed as)

You're going too fast! I can't keep up with you.
Patty finds this class difficult, and ca n ’t keep up.

live up to (be as good as someone expects)

The film didn't live up to our expectations.

look forward to (think you will enjoy)

I'm looking forward to going on holiday this year.
Note that to is a preposition here and so is followed by the -ing form of the verb.

look out onto/over (have a view of)

Our hotel room looks out onto the lake.

put up with (accept w ithout com plaining)

I can't put up with all this noise!

run out of* (have no more of)

I think the car is about to run out o f petrol!
There isn't any more milk. We've run out.

Verbs with two These phrasal verbs take an object (the word for this is 'transitive'). The object
parts: transitive must com e after the preposition, not between the verb and the preposition (the
and inseparable word for this is 'inseparable').
call for (com e to your house and collect)
We'll call for you about 8 .0 0 so please be ready. (NOT eetU-feu for)

call on (visit for a short time)

I called on Professor Jones and wished her a Happy Birthday.

deal with (take action to solve a problem)

Could you deal with this customer's problem please?

get at (try to say, suggest)

Helen couldn't understand what her boss was getting at.

get over (recover from)

Peter was ill with flu, but he's getting over it now.

head for (go in the direction of)

The escaped prisoner is thought to be heading for London.

join in (take part in, contribute to)

W hen Alex started singing, everyone joined in.

see to (pay attention to, often m eaning 'repair')

The brakes on your car need seeing to.

stand for (tolerate)

I will not stand for so much talking!

take after (be similar in appearance or character)

Karen takes after her mother. They're very similar.

157
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Complete each sentence (a-h) with an ending (1-8).

a) If you have any kind of problem, just call me and I'll deal
b) I've been so busy lately that I've decided to c u t .............
c) Ann and Sue are really lo o k in g .............
d) Our teacher told us that she would not s ta n d .............
e) Nearly everybody says that Mark ta k e s .............
f) Jackie is very friendly and generally g e t s .............
g) Half-way through the race, Martin found that he couldn't k e e p ............
h) We were told that the concert was going to be good but it didn't li v e ............

1 for cheating in our end-of-term test.

2 on well with the people she works with.
3 with it as soon as I can.
4 after his father's side of the family.
5 down on the am ount of tim e I spend watching television.
6 up with the others any more.
7 up to our expectations at all.
8 forward to seeing you both again in July.

2 Underline the correct preposition in each sentence.

a) Can you explain that again? I don't know what you're getting by/with/at?
b) He's a very strict teacher. He doesn't stand for/up/with any bad behaviour in
class.
c) I enjoyed London, but it didn't really live up to/with/for my expectations.
d) I smoke 20 cigarettes a day, but I'm trying to cut off/through/down.
e) I thin k she has got over/by/down the break-up with her boyfriend.
f) I'll call by/in/for you at eight o'clock, and then we'll go to the party together.
g) I'm going crazy! I can't put off/up/down with so m uch confusion!
h) I'm lucky, I get on/off/over really well with my colleagues.
i) If you miss too m any lessons, it's difficult to catch over/up/with.
j) It's difficult to keep along/by/up with changes in bio-technology,
k) My car needs a service - the engine needs seeing in/to/at.
1) The printer is working, but it's run away/out/down of ink.

158
 G R A M M A R 39 PHRASAL VERBS 1

3 Complete each sentence with a suitable form of one of the phrasal verbs in the
box. Use each one once only.

catch up with cut down on drop in on get on with

keep up with (not) live.up to look forward to run out of

a) The book you lent me . . . .Q p .. ...... my expectations.

b) Any tim e you're in the area, feel free t o ....................................................us.
c) Sorry, we h a v e ....................................................orange juice. Would you like some
water?
d) U nfortunately Susie d o e s n 't....................................................her new neighbours.
e) Bill left before I did, but I ran a n d ....................................................him.
f) I'm re a lly ....................................................my holiday in Italy next week.
g) It was a difficult class, and I c o u ld n 't....................................................the other
students.
h) You s h o u ld ....................................................smoking if you can 't stop completely.

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it does not contain the words in italics, but does
contain a phrasal verb.

a) Brian and his m other are very similar.

....?. rM I..t.rtk&s. M f. fh&C;
b) There isn't any food leftl

c) Mike and Tom aren't very good friends.

d) Jean is very good at handling people's problems.

e) The handlebars on my bike need fixing.

f) Julia was very ill, but she's recovered now.

g) W hat exactly are you suggesting1

h) Paul's new school wasn't as good as he expected it to be.

159
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) Som eone needs to look at the central heating system,

seeing
The central_.heating,.system needs seeing, to..............................
b) Let's pay a surprise visit to Julia while we're here,
drop

c) We're going in the direction of Paris,

heading

d) Our hotel room has a view of the m ain road!

looks

e) Two children started playing, and then the others played too.
joined

f) We paid a visit to m y aunt on her birthday,

called

g) I'm afraid that we haven't got any eggs left,

run

h) M onica will com e and collect you at 6.30.

call

i) Nobody understood what I was trying to say.

getting

j) I can 't bear so m uch air pollution!

put

160
 GR AM M AR

40 Phrasal verbs 2

Explanations
Verbs with two These phrasal verbs take an ob ject (the word for this is 'transitive'). This object
parts: transitive can com e after the preposition or between the verb and the preposition (so the
and separable verbs are 'separable').
We brought up this child. We brought her up.

In general, as in the examples above, object phrases tend to be put after the
preposition while pronouns (such as you, it, him, her, us, them ) are always put
between the verb and the preposition.

bring tip (look after a child until adult)

Tom's aunt brought him up after his parents died.

call o ff (cancel)
The school called o ff the match because o f bad weather.

clear up (make clean and tidy)

Could you help me clear up the room after the party?

cut o ff (be disconnected during a phone-call)

I'd just got through to Delhi when I was cut off.
This is usually used in the passive.

fill in (com plete by writing)

Could you fill this form in with all your details, please?

give up (stop doing something)

Paul had to give up gymnastics because o f injury.

knock out (make unconscious)

Bryson knocked his opponent out in the second round.

let down (disappoint, fail to keep a promise)

Ann said she would help, but she let me down.

look up (find inform ation in a reference book)

I looked this word up in a dictionary and in an encyclopedia.

pick up (collect in a car)

The taxi will pick you up at 6 .3 0 .

put o ff (postpone)
The weather was bad, so they p ut o ff the match for a week.

put up (provide accom m odation in someone's house)

A friend in Prague p ut me up for a couple o f nights.

161
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

take up (start a hobby or activity)

Sam has just taken up parachuting.

try on (put on clothes to see if they are suitable)

I tried the coat on, but it was too big and the wrong colour.

turn o n/off (begin or stop operating electrical equipm ent)

D on't forget to turn o ff the light before you go to bed.

wash up (clean plates, knives and forks etc.)

After the party, Martin washed up all the glasses.

Verbs with two These phrasal verbs do not have an object.

parts: intransitive
break down (stop working, especially cars)
The car broke down when we were on the motorway.

drop out (stop before you finish)

Two o f the runners dropped out half-way through the race.

get on (make progress)

Nina likes her new college, and is getting on well,

get away (escape)

One o f the burglars was caught, but the other got away.

grow up (change from a child to an adult)

I grew up in a small town in Peru.

set off/out (begin a journey)

We set o ff early to avoid the traffic.

take o ff (when a plane leaves the ground)

Our plane took o ff more than three hours late.

turn up (arrive, often unexpectedly)

We invited twenty people, but only five turned up.

SEE ALSO

Gram m ar 39: Phrasal verbs

162
 GRAMMAR 40 PHRASAL VERBS 2

Practice

Complete each sentance with one suitable word.

a) Jess asked if she could help me ...MfH.ffa.........up the dirty dishes.

b) I need a dictionary, so I c a n ......................... up this word.
c) If I were you I 'd ......................... off early because Edinburgh is a long way.
d) Our m eeting tom orrow has b e e n ......................... off, I'm afraid.
e) I'm not sure about the size of this coat, so can I ......................... it on?
f) Robert had t o ......................... in a form, giving all his personal details.
g) You'll never guess w h o ......................... up at our school party last week!
h) Six people applied for the job, but one of t h e m ......................... out.

2 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) D on't leave the lights on when you leave the school,

tu rn
........ Turn the,.lights. off,yJh&yi.you,..le&vc. the,. school,....................
b) Jack arrived half-way through the lesson,
tu rn

c) You can stay with us for a week,

put

d) Marta is doing well in her English class,

get

e) Lidia spent her childhood in Uruguay,

grew

f) How do you start the computer?

turn

g) Carol checked the dates in an encyclopedia,

look

h) Surfing is a great sport. W hen did you start doing it?

take

163
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete each sentence (a-h) with an ending (1-8).

a) It's very cold and wet at the m om ent so we've put ....3 .....
b) Mary's parents were quite strict and brought h e r .............
c) Your room is very untidy! Could you c le a r .............
d) I was talking to Helen w hen suddenly we were c u t .............
e) Zoe tried to persuade her m other to g iv e .............
f) Tim started painting his room this m orning and he's getting
g) If you like, we could com e and p ic k .............
h) A branch of a tree fell and k n o ck e d .............

1 it up please, and put everything away.

2 Peter out for a few m om ents.
3 off our garden party until next week.
4 up smoking, but she didn't have m uch success.
5 on very well so far.
6 off and I couldn't get her number after that.
7 you up in our car at about 7.00.
8 up to be very polite and obedient.

164
 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) I think my school is just as m od/better than yours.

b) There are enough apples for one each/every.
c) Sharon has been working very hard/hardly.
d) Could you give me an/some inform ation, please?
e) This is the best/better ice-cream in the world!
f) I've been working in this com pany for/since three m onths.
g) There are no/none eggs left in the fridge.
h) The news is/are on in a few m inutes.

2 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Life on the farm

I was (1) ....I?..... by m y uncle and aunt and ( 2 ) .............on a small farm in the
west of England. I think it was better ( 3 ) .............living in a city, because
( 4 ) .............day I ran about in the open air. ( 5 ) ...............I went to school,
( 6 ) .............I did was play on the farm all day. ( 7 ) .............. my aunt and uncle
worked with the animals, and although they worked very ( 8 ) ............., they
always explained ( 9 ) .............things to me. They didn't have ( 1 0 ) ...............money,
but they ( 1 1 ) .............well with everyone, and we didn't have ( 1 2 ) .............. of the
problems of living in the city. I always felt ( 1 3 ) .............on the farm. There was
( 1 4 ) .............noise or pollution, and it was ( 1 5 ) ...............peaceful. That's probably
why I became a farmer when I was older.

1) A lived up to B taken after C grown up D brought up

2) A grew up B joined in C turned up D put off
3) A as B more C than D the
4) A every B in C for D both
5) A by B nowadays C in time D until
6) A every B each C none D all
7) A Either B Both C Neither D All
8) A hardly B harder C hard D hardest
9) A interests B interesting C interest D interested
10) A much B lots C many D too
11) A dropped in B got along C kept up D dealt with
12) A much B none C no D any
13) A happily B a happy C happy D the happy
14) A any B no C none of D not
15) A too B m uch C really D as

165
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) These classrooms aren't very large.

None ...$ £ .$ & $ & : ....................................... classrooms are very large.
b) Luca w on't leave here before the end of April.
Luca will be h e r e ...............................................................the end of April.
c) We don't allow sm oking in this cinem a.
N o ............................................................... in this cinem a.
d) Can you tell me what you think I should do?
Can you give m e ...............................................................?
e) You've been waiting longer than I have.
I haven't been w a itin g ...............................................................you have.
f) It's 4 .0 0 now, and I started waiting here two hours ago.
I've been waiting h e r e ...............................................................2.00.
g) All classrooms must be kept clean.
E a c h ...............................................................must be kept clean.
h) Most of the class walks to school.
Most of the class com es to s c h o o l.................................................................
i) This is as far as we can go along this road.
We can 't g o ............................................................... along this road.
j) The fire brigade arrived too late to save the burning house.
The fire brigade didn't a rriv e ...............................................................to save the
burning house.

Rewrite each sentence so that it contains a form of a phrasal verb using the word
in bold. Make any other necessary changes.

a) You can com e and stay with me.

put
...............................................................................
b) Carlos can 't stand the traffic anymore,
put

c) Peter is making good progress at university,

get

d) I'll tidy up the room if you do the washing-up.

clear

166
 G R A M M A R 41 CONSOLIDATION 4

e) We're going in the direction of Madrid,

head

f) W hy don't you search for this word in the dictionary?

lo ok

g) Jan e is very similar to her father,

take

h) Kelly's father is trying to stop smoking,

give

Look carefully at each line. Some lines are correct but some have a word which
should not be there. Tick ( / ) each correct line. If a line has a word which should
not be there, write the word in the space.

Holiday problems
Last m onth we decided to drive to Scotland for a 1 ............/ . .........
few days, for a short holiday. We were the really 2 ... t h ? : ...........
looking it forward to a quiet rest in the country. 3 .......................
Unfortunately, a lots of things went wrong. First 4 .......................
of all, the car was broke down just after we had left 5 .......................
hom e, and we had to phone a garage and then 6 .......................
wait by the side of the road for hours ago. By the 7 .......................
tim e the car had been repaired, it was too m uch late 8 .......................
to go on, so we went the hom e. The next day we set 9 ........................
off more early to avoid the traffic, but we had forgotten 1 0 .......................
that it was a public holiday. Every one single person 11 ........................
in the country must have had the same idea, so we 1 2 .......................
found ourselves in a long traffic jam. We after decided 1 3 .......................
that the best thing to do was to take after a different 1 4 .......................
road, and look up for a hotel. First we got lost on 1 5 .......................
a narrow country road, and then the car once ran 1 6 .......................
out of the petrol. Finally, we gave up and went hom e 1 7 ........................
for the second tim e. 1 8 .......................

167
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Put one suitable word in each space, or leave the space blank.

W hile Lara was visiting (a) ..... United States, she decided to go by
( b ) ...................plane from ( c ) .....................New York to ( d ) .....................West Coast.
She had already stayed w ith her friends ( e ) ...................two weeks, and they'd
told her that ( f ) ...................C alifornia was a ( g ) .....................more exciting. 'It's
( h ) ................... warmer, and you'll be able to swim in ( i ) .................... Pacific
O cean!', they said. Lara didn't have ( j ) ...................inform ation about flights, so
she went to ( k ) ................... travel agent's next door to (1 ).....................block of flats
where she was staying. She discovered that there were two flights ( m ) ..................
next m orning, but she couldn't get ( n ) ...................seat on ( o ) .....................of them.

7 For each question, com plete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Nobody at all picked up the litter.

Not ...........................person picked up the litter.
b) There isn't any cheese in the fridge.
There i s ....................................................in the fridge.
c) People who are rich aren't necessarily happy.
T h e ....................................................not necessarily happy.
d) Jane's drawing is beautiful.
Jan e d raw s......................................................
e) I haven't seen a worse film than this one.
This i s ....................................................I have ever seen.
f) Helen left Paris in July.
Helen stayed in P a ris....................................................July.

8 Put one suitable word in each space.

a) You work ......... h a rd e r........ .................. I do.

b) I n ......................... future, people will live lo n g e r........................... they do now.
c) Alex p la y s ......................... guitar i n ........................... rock band.
d) There i s ......................... hot water left, but there i s n 't .............................
e) He could go now he'd answered ......................... the questions o n ..........................
sides of the form.
f) Jogging i s n 't ......................... in te re stin g ........................... playing tennis.
g) I'll wait h e r e ......................... 6.00, so try and be h e r e ...........................then.
h) That was great! It was t h e ......................... meal y o u 'v e ...........................cooked!

168
 G R A M M A R 41 CONSOLIDATION 4

9 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) I'm really interesting in the travel.

I 'm . reqlly.. interested, iyi. tmvcL ...........................
b) Kate's brother is doctor.

c) I ate a food with Jack, and after that I went hom e.

d) The milk is good for you.

e) Can you give me an advice?

f) I've looked in the box. All is broken, I'm afraid.

g) They will have finished the new hospital until the end of May.

h) There's a police waiting outside.

i) I com e to class w ith the feet.

j) Your hair are very beautiful.

Problem T Time words like for, since and ago are linked to the use of tenses. Check Grammar
check 4, 5, 6 and 7.

2 The same word can be countable and uncountable with a change of meaning.
Which words of this kind do you know? Check with Grammar 33.

3 Compare the uses of articles with articles in your language (if it has articles).
Note that the choice of article can depend on meaning and context. Check with
Grammar 34 and 35.

4 Avoid using more than three adjectives together. Note the difference between
hard and hardly. Check with Grammar 37.

5 What is the difference between comparative and superlatives? Are they used in
the same ways in your language? Check with Grammar 38.

6 Phrasal verbs can have many meanings, so check in a dictionary. Make sure that
you know where in the entry for the main verb you can find the phrasal verbs (it
is right at the end of the entry, after the various meanings of the main verb used
alone).

169
 GRAMMAR

42 Verbs followed by -ing or infinitive 1

vBL■
> *, W-
Explanations
W hen you learn a new verb, it is advisable to check in a dictionary whether it is
followed by the -ing form (also called the gerund) or an infinitive with or
w ithout to. If the infinitive is w ithout to it can be called a bare infinitive.
Grammar 42 and 43 include some of the most com m on verbs, but these are
only a selection.

Verbs followed by ■ Some verbs can be followed either by an -ing form, or to + infinitive, and
-ing or infinitive: there is little or no change in m eaning. Verbs in this list include:
little or no change begin, continue, not bear, hate, intend, like, love, prefer, start
of meaning
W hen she stood up, the President began to speak/speaking.
Some people at the back continued chatting/to chat.
I can't bear listening/to listen for a long time.
W hat do you intend doing/to do about it?
I don't like watching television. I prefer reading/to read.
I think you should start practising/to practise now!

■ There can be a small difference between like to do and like doing. To +

infinitive suggests that som ething is a good idea although you don't
necessarily enjoy it. The -ing form shows you enjoy something.
I like to have a short walk after my evening meal.
I like listening to the radio.

■ Note that with 'prefer' we prefer one thing to another thing. If the things are
activities, the -ing form is used.
Tom prefers reading to watching television.

m Hate doing is more com m on, except in the fixed expression 'I hate to tell you
this, but ...'.
I hate doing the washing-up!
I hate to tell you this, but we've missed the last train!

■ W hen we use the modal verb would with like, love, prefer and hate we must
use to + infinitive.
I'd like to go to Portugal this summer.
I'd prefer to do it myself, i f you don't mind.

Verbs followed by Some verbs can only be followed by the infinitive with to. These include:
to + infinitive afford, ask, choose, happen, help, manage, offer, refuse, wait, want

170
 GRAMMAR 42 V E R B S F O L L O W E D BY - I N G OR I N F I N I T I V E 1

I can't afford to go to the cinema twice in one week.

In the end, Laura chose to study Economics.
Do you happen to know the time?
Could someone help me to carry this? *
(Help is also used w ithout to. Could you help me carry this?)
Jim can't manage to come this evening.
I offered to give her a lift, but she said she'd ordered a taxi.
The manager refused to see me.
There are some people waiting to see you.
W hat do you want to do this evening?

Verbs followed by Some verbs can be followed by the infinitive with to, or a that clause. It is
to + infinitive, or possible to leave out that in everyday speech. These verbs include:
t/iot-clause agree, decide, expect, hope, learn, pretend, promise, seem, wish

We decided to go home. We decided (that) we would go home.

Mike expects to win. Mike expects (that) he will win.
I hope to see you later. I hope (that) I'll see you later.
Helen pretended to be ill. Helen pretended (that) she was ill.

■ Note that if we use a ffoaf-clause we follow the tense rules of reported speech.
So, for example, will changes to would in the past:
Sarah agrees to meet you after school.
Sarah agrees that she will meet you after school.
Sarah agreed to meet me after school.
Sarah agreed (that) she would meet me after school.

■ There is a small difference between learn to and learn that.

At school Graham learned to speak French, (learn a skill)
A t school we learned that the Earth goes round the Sun. (learn inform ation)

■ Note the two forms of seem. It + seem + f/iaf-clause is very com m on.
You seem to know the answer!
It seems that you know the answer.

u Wish followed by to + infinitive has a similar m eaning to want.

I wish to leave early today.
Wish followed by a that-clause usually includes would or could.
I wish (that) I could leave early.
I wish (that) my teacher would let me leave early.

SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 11: Reported speech 1

G ram m ar 12: Reported speech 2
G ram m ar 43: Verbs followed
by -ing or infinitive 2

171
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the errors in these sentences. Some sentences do not have errors.
Rewrite each sentence that has an error and tick (/ ) the sentences which are
correct.

a) Jim can't afford going to the cinem a twice a week.

cavit,.afford, to, jo,,to„ the, cincym,,jMyct, a,.Wee/c,..........
b) David wishes leaving the room.

c) Are you waiting to use the phone?

d) I'd really like going swimming on Saturday.

e) Emma pretended leaving, but waited outside.

f) Jam es agreed to m eet me at the beach.

g) My bike seems having som ething wrong with it.

h) The director refused answering Helen's phone call.

2 Complete each sentence with a form of one of the verbs from the box. Use each
verb once only.

afford bear continue expect happen

learn ieve offer prefer pretend

a) Jo h n really ....(-OVCS.........spending all day at the beach.

b) I'm com pletely broke, so I c a n 't ......................... to go on holiday.
c) Excuse me, but do y o u ......................... to know the way to Old Street?
d) W e ......................... our team to win, but they were badly beaten.
e) C a ro ly n ......................... to speak French and German when she was at school.
f) Even when the exam iner told him to stop, R o b e rt......................... speaking.
g) I'm sorry, but I c a n 't ......................... to listen to this awful music!
h) Last week C h r is ......................... to help me paint my bike.
i) P a u l......................... to have a bad leg so he didn't have to go to the gym.
j) Sam u su a lly ......................... playing football to doing homework.

172
 GRAMMAR 42 V E R B S F O L L O W E D BY I N C OR I N F I N I T I V E 1

3 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) My teacher wouldn't let me leave early.

My teacher refused ...........................................................
b) Jill sang without stopping for an hour.
Jill co n tin u e d ..............................................................................................................................
c) Apparently you've passed the exam.
It se e m s.........................................................................................................................................
d) Richard thinks he's going to do well.
Richard e x p e c ts..........................................................................................................................
e) W hat are your plans for the summer?
W hat do you in te n d ..............................................................................................................?
f) Clearing up my room is som ething I dislike!
I h a t e ..............................................................................................................................................
g) Liz said she'd go to the cinem a with me.
Liz ag reed .....................................................................................................................................
h) Tina and Brian are getting married.
Tina and Brian have d ecid ed ................................................................................................
i) See you later, I hope.
I h o p e .............................................................................................................................................
j) W hat do you fancy doing this evening?
W hat do you w a n t................................................................................................................. ?

4 Complete each sentence with one of the words from the box.

agreed asked chose decided hate

hopes like refused seems want

a) Greg often ....£ ? £ WU ...... to be worried.

b) I ......................... to tell you this, but we've lost all our money.
c) Do y o u ......................... to go for a walk this afternoon?
d) I ......................... Ann to wait for me, but she didn't.
e) K a trin a ......................... to becom e a cham pion skater.
f) The police o ffic e r ......................... to listen to my explanation.
g) P e te r......................... to work on Saturday instead of on Friday.
h) I 'd ......................... to see you again some time.
i) After a lot of thought, Jim fin a lly ......................... to spend his holiday in Peru.
j) I asked my teacher for help, and s h e ......................... to give me extra lessons.

173
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) W hat are you thinking of doing?

intend
Wktft do yoii intend., to do?
b) I find getting up early unbearable!
bear

c) I'll see you in the m orning, I expect,

to

d) 'I'll be back at 6 .0 0 ,' said Susan,

promised

e) Pat was taught to drive when he was young,

learned

f) 'Would you like me to help you?' I asked Joe.

offered

g) Ellen didn't have enough m oney for the ticket,

afford

h) 'I w on't help!' said Tom.

refused

174
 G RA M M AR

43 Verbs followed by -ing or infinitive 2

Explanations
Verbs followed by Some verbs can be followed either by an -ing form, or to + infinitive, and there
-ing or infinitive: is a change in m eaning. Study the examples below carefully.
change of
remember and forget
meaning
We use remember/forget doing (or remember/forget followed by that-clause) for
memories of the past (the action happens before the remembering). We use
remember/forget to do for actions som eone is/was supposed to do (the
rem em bering happens before the action).
I rem ember telling you! (tell 4- remember)
Then I remembered that you were out. (go out <r remember)
Remember to take your keys! (remember -> take)
I'll never forget learning to drive! (learn <- forget)
I forgot that I'd promised to phone you. (promise forget)
Sorry, I forgot to post your letter. (forget -> post)

mean
We use mean doing (or mean followed by that-clause) w hen one thing results in
or involves another. We use mean to do to express an intention.
Keeping fit means taking exercise every day! (= involves)
W hen I miss the bus, it means that I have to walk to school. (= involves)
Jan meant to watch the programme, but she forgot. (= intended)

stop
We use stop doing when we end an action. We use stop to do when we give the
reason for stopping.
Jo has stopped learning French. (= gave up learning)
We stopped to look at the view. (= in order to look)
Stop is not followed by a ffraf-clause.

try
We use try doing w hen we do som ething and see what happens. We use try to do
when we make an effort to do something, but don't necessarily succeed.
I f you have a headache, try taking two o f these pills. (= experim ent)
Peter tried to lift the table, but it was too heavy. (he failed in this case)
Try is not followed by a that-c\mse.

Verbs followed by m Some verbs can be followed by an object + ing, or an infinitive w ithout to.
-ing or infinitive There is a change in m eaning. These verbs are sometimes called 'verbs of
without to: change perception' and include:
of meaning feel, hear, listen to, see, watch

m If we see or hear only part of the action, or it continues, we use the -ing
form. If we see or hear the whole action from beginning to end, we use the
infinitive w ithout to.
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Compare:
I could feel my hands shaking with fear! (continuing action)
I fe lt the building m ove! (completed action)
We watched foe eating his lunch. (part of the action)
We watched foe eat his lunch. (whole action)

■ These verbs can be used with a ffoaf-clause with a change of meaning.

I feel that this is the time to resign. (= believe)
We heard that you were ill. (= receive news)
I saw that it was too late. (= realize)

Verbs followed by Some verbs can be followed either by another verb in an -ing form or a noun.
-ing or noun These include: dislike, enjoy, fancy, *can't help, *keep, mind, practise, can't stand.
Those marked * have two meanings.
I dislike going out in the rain.
I really dislike my new boss.
Everyone enjoys going to parties.
I enjoyed this lesson.
Do you fancy going to the cinema?
I fancy a swim!
I can't help feeling hungry.
I can't help myself! (= I can't stop)
Keep this. D on't throw it away.
Sue keeps phoning me late at night. (= continues with a bad habit)
Do you mind waiting?
Do you m ind cold weather?
I must practise speaking French more often.
Julia practises the violin every day.
I can't stand waking up early.
I can't stand hot and spicy food.

Verbs followed by ■ Some verbs can be followed either by another verb in an -ing form, or a
-ing, or noun, or noun, or a that-clause. These include: admit, deny, imagine, suggest.
tfjaf-clause The Minister admitted taking a bribe.
Paul admitted that he was wrong.
Tina denied stealing the money.
Both men denied that they had done anything wrong.
Imagine travelling to another planet!
Do you really imagine that I want to see you again?
I suggest going for a pizza.
I suggest that we go for a pizza.

■ Suggest can also be followed by should.

I suggest that we should go for a pizza.
SEE ALSO
' ' ‘S
G ram m ar 42: Verbs follow*
by -ing or infinitive 1

176
 G R A M M A R 43 V E R B S F O L L O W E D B Y - I N C OR I N F I N I T I V E 2

Practice

Contrasts with verbs from Grammar 42 are included here.

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Tom suddenly realized he'd forgotten to lock/locking his door.

b) On the way back we stopped to have/having some tea.
c) Could you stop to talk/talking, please.
d) Learning a language means to be/being interested in another culture.
e) Ann tried to open/opening the window, but it was too high to reach.
f) Please remember to take/taking the dog for a walk.
g) Cathy says she'll never forget to sky-dive/sky-diving for the first tim e.
h) I don't really remember to start/starting school when I was five.

2 For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Would you like to go to the beach?

Do .................................. going to the beach?
b) The boy admitted stealing the bike.
The boy a d m itted ............................................................... stolen the bike.
c) W hy don't we wait for the bus?
...............................................................waiting for the bus.
d) David often interrupts me.
D a v id ...............................................................me.
e) Is it all right if you com e back later?
...............................................................com ing back later?
f) Think what being a m illionaire would be like!
...............................................................a m illionaire!
g) It's not m y fault if I eat a lot.
I ...............................................................eating a lot.

3 Underline the correct verb in each sentence.

a) Helen enjoyed/chose to learn French.

b) I really can't stand/afford to travel by plane.
c) Do you mind/want com ing back in half an hour?
d) Tina suggested/meant to buy some potatoes, but she forgot.
e) Emily denied/refused opening the office safe.
f) Bill admitted/agreed making a serious mistake.
g) My parents disliked/decided to send me to a different school.
h) I really like/fancy a trip to the country.

177
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Complete each sentence with a form of one of the verbs in the box.

deny enjoy expect imagine manage mean

fey practise pretend refuse

a) If you ...PXy...............to work a bit harder, I'm sure you'll pass the exam.
b) K e v in ......................... to have toothache, and left school early.
c) The builders are n ot sure of the exact date, b u t ......................... to start work
soon.
d) E m m a ......................... to call you last week, but she forgot.
e) The woman arrested by the p o lic e ......................... robbing the bank.
f) You s h o u ld ......................... speaking to an audience, to gain confidence.
g) It's interesting t o ......................... myself living on a desert island.
h) I phoned the director six times, but s h e ......................... to speak to me.

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) D on't ..... .. to buy some milk on your way hom e.

b) If I'm late, i t ......................... I have to wait until the next lesson begins.
c) I ......................... throwing the ball, but I didn't break the window.
d) Paul c a n 't ......................... thinking about his favourite team.
e) L is a ......................... forgetting where she put her keys.
f) G in a ......................... to clim b in through the window, but it was locked.
g) I ......................... playing with my friends when I was little.
h) I c a n 't ......................... walking hom e in the rain! It's horrible!

178
 GRAMMAR

44 Verbs followed by prepositions

Explanations
Verb + preposition ■ Some verbs are followed by a particular preposition. You can check this in a
dictionary. Some com m on examples are given below.

About
dream I dreamed about Harry last night,
know Do you know a lot about economics?
talk W hat are you talking about?

laugh Don't laugh at me.

look Look at that beautiful cherry tree!

For
apologize I must apologize for being late,
apply Jill has applied for a new job.
ask W hy don't we ask for the bill?
look I'm looking for the bus station,
pay Sheila paid for my ticket,
wait I'll wait for you outside.

In
believe Do you believe in ghosts?
succeed Helen succeeded in collecting £ 3 5 for charity.

Of
accuse Albert was accused o f spying,
remind This city reminds me o f Buenos Aires,
taste Does your coffee taste o f soap?

On
depend I might come. It depends on the weather,
rely You can rely on Ann to work hard.

To
belong Does this belong to you?
explain Could you explain something to me please?
lend Brian lent his car to me for the weekend.
We can also say: Brian lent me his car.
listen You're not listening to me!
talk Ellen was talking to her mother on the phone.

179
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

■ In questions the preposition usually goes at the end.

W hat are you talking about?
Who are you looking for?
W hat are you listening to?

be + adjective + Note that in the list below the following adjectives occur twice: angry, annoyed,
preposition pleased, sorry. One of the prepositions is used when they refer to people and one
when they refer to things (this is shown in the list).

About angry (+ things), annoyed (+ things), excited, happy, pleased

(+ things), right, sorry (+ things), upset
Helen is excited about winning the prize.
I'm sorry about your difficulties. Can I help?

At bad, good
Dora is really good at maths.

For famous, late, ready, sorry (+ people)

Our city is famous for its beautiful buildings.
I was sorry for George when he came last in the race.

From different
This room is different from the other one.

In interested
Are you interested in computers?

Of afraid, fond, frightened, full, jealous, tired

My sleeping bag was full o f ants!

On keen
I'm not very keen on fried food.

To kind, married, used

Ellen is married to Jack.

With angry (+ people), annoyed (+ people), bored, pleased (+ people)

I'm really angry with you.

180
 GRAMMAR 44 V E R B S F O L L O W E D BY P R E P O S I T I O N S

Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) Fiona is very different ...jX.Q.wy..........her sister.

b) Please try and lis t e n ......... my instructions.
c) My hom e town is famous .........its peaches.
d) Excuse me, but does this umbrella belong you?
e) W hat exactly was Alistair talking .................... ?
f) I think we should a s k ..................... . some inform ation,
g) Gemma is very k e e n ........................ growing her own vegetables.

2 Complete the sentences with one word from list A and one from list B.

A apologizes belongs depends knows laughs reminds succeeds

B about at for in of on to

a) I don't like him . I think he ... ... ........me behind my back.

b) I'll be surprised if he walking to the top of the
mountain.
c) Isabel sends her love a n d ....................................................not contacting you.
She's been really busy.
d) It's difficult to know when the bus will come. I t ....................................................
the tim e of day.
e) She's very intelligent. S h e .............................. a l o t ..................... econom ics and
things like that.
f) This dictionary isn't m ine. I think i t ....................................................Jorge.
g) This m u s ic .............................. m e .....................the tim e I spent in India.

3 Complete the sentences with one word from list A and one from list B.

A right good famous interested frightened kind annoyed

B about at for in of to with

a) I w a s ........r i g U t ...............ftb o u l: the train times. It does leave at 16.30.

b) I love science, but I'm not v e r y ...............................................m athem atics.
c) Istanbul i s ...............................................the beautiful Blue Mosque.
d) Are y o u ...............................................American movies from the fifties?
e) I 'm ...............................................Paul. He should have called me, but he hasn't.
f) Eliza is v e r y ...............................................her dog. She walks it every day.
g) I know it's ridiculous, but I'm q u ite ...............................................spiders.

181
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) Dick found his work boring,

bored
Dick. vJtts bored yjitW kis iVdr/c.
b) This town is a bit like Glasgow,
reminds

c) Sara has a good knowledge of biology,

knows

d) I'm trying to find the art gallery,

looking

e) I like cream cakes,

fond

f) Sue is Adrian's wife,

to

g) Dina always treats animals kindly,

kind

h) Ugh! This cake has a rubbery taste!

rubber

i) You make Lisa feel jealous!

is

j) Our new house makes me feel excited!

about

182
For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) You've made me angry.

I ........................................ you.
b) I'd like my lunch now.
I 'm ..............................................................................for lunch.
c) Geography is Richard's best subject.
Richard is v e r y .............................................................................. geography.
d) The bad news made me feel upset.
I ..............................................................................the bad news.
e) My dog was in my dreams last night!
I ..............................................................................my dog last night.
f) Sue is a reliable person.
You c a n .............................................................................. Sue.
g) Jack borrowed my bike for the weekend.
I lent m y .............................................................................. for the weekend.
h) The dark makes me afraid.
I 'm .............................................................................. the dark.

Complete each sentence with one suitable verb and preposition.

a) We asked our teacher to ......... a difficult p ro b le m ........ t.Q........ us.

b) The ring I fo u n d ..................................................... an old lady in my block of flats.
c) We may com e to your party, but i t ..................................................... our finding a
babysitter.
d) W hen Joe flew to Australia, his a u n t ..................................................... his ticket.
e) H arry .............................. to his n eig h b o u rs.....................his bad behaviour.
f) Y o u .............................. m e .....................my brother. You're very alike!
g) T o n y ..................................................... passing his driving test at the first attempt.
h) See you in a m inute! I ' l l ..................................................... you outside the cinema.

Complete each part sentence (a-g) with one of the endings (1-7).

a) Ellen is n ot really interested 1 at making new friends.

b) The hotel was d iffe re n t............. 2 about losing my new calculator.
c) Little Suzie was je a lo u s............. 3 for another big meal.
d) I was really a n n o y e d ............. 4 in learning how to ski.
e) Paul is very k e e n ............. 5 of her new sister at first.
f) Jane is really g o o d ............. 6 from what we expected.
g) I don't think I'm re a d y ............. 7 on collecting old bottles.
 GRAM M AR

45 Pronouns

Explanations
Indefinite Words like everyone, anything etc. are called indefinite pronouns. They refer to
pronouns people, things or places w ithout saying exactly who, what or where they are.

People: someone anyone everyone no one

Things: something anything everything nothing
Places: somewhere anywhere everywhere nowhere
Time: sometime anytime (all the time) (never)

■ In the 'People' list we can make a form with -body with no change in
m eaning: somebody, anybody, everybody, nobody.

m Indefinite pronouns are followed by a singular verb, but we refer back to

them in a sentence with they/them/their.
Someone is waiting for you. They have been waiting for some time.
Som eone phoned, and I told them you were out.

someone, anyone Words with some- and any- follow the rules given in Grammar 33:
etc.
■ Some is com m on in positive sentences and any in questions and negatives.
There's som eone at the door. Som ething is worrying me.
Does anyone know the answer?
There isn't anybody at home.

m But we can use some in a question if it is an offer or request.

Can I ask you som ething?

■ And we can use any in positive sentences to mean 'it doesn't matter which'.
We can go anyw here we want during our holidays.

■ Some has the idea of a definite idea, and any has the m eaning of 'no limit'.
Compare:
Is som eone coming to collect you? (there must be a particular person)
Is anyone coming to collect you? (anyone at all)
Have you got som e letters for m e? (There are particular letters I am
expecting)
Have you got any letters for m e? (I have no idea if you have letters
for me or not)

everyone, no one Words with every- m ean all the people, things or places in a group.
etc. Everybody likes Sue.
Everything in the room was red.

Every one (two words) has a different m eaning. It means each single one and is
used to give emphasis. In pronunciation, both words have equal stress.
There were ten chocolates in the box and you've eaten every one!

184
 G R A M M A R 45 PRONOUNS

Everything is used as a single word subject instead of all.

E v ery th in g has gone wrong. (NOT All has gone wrong)
A ll m y p la n s have gone wrong.

Words with no- m ean no people, things or places.

No o n e know s the answer.
N obody is at home.
T h ere is n o th in g to eat.

Double negatives are not used.

No one knows. (NOT No one doesn't know)

Reflexive Reflexive pronouns are used for actions that we do to ourselves.

pronouns: myself I have cut m yself. We enjoyed ourselves.
etc. Did you cut y o u rself? Have you hurt yourselves?
H e cut h im self. T hey introduced them selv es.
S h e introduced h erself.

Verbs often used in this way include: cut, enjoy, hurt, introduce, kill.
At the end o f the play, Cleopatra kills h erself.
But other verbs are not norm ally used with a reflexive pronoun, even though
they are in other languages. Examples: change (clothes), complain, decide,
dress, feel, meet, relax, remember, rest, sit down, stand up, wake up, wash, worry.

Reflexive pronouns are also used for emphasis.

Jon cooked all the food h im self, (no one helped him)

Impersonal one In norm al conversation we use you to refer to 'people in general'.

As you get older you tend to forget things.
You ta ke the train to the airport from the Central Station.

But in formal speech and writing we can use one with this m eaning. This is
considered over-formal by m any speakers.
O ne takes the train to the airport from the Central Station.

There is a possessive form one's.

O ne's luggage is carried in a special compartment.

If one is used as a subject, all later references also use one.

O ne takes the train to the airport from the Central Station and o n e can reserve
one's seat in advance.
If you use one, you must continue to use it. Do not m ix one and you.

In everyday speech it is more com m on to use you or a passive than to use one.
You can reserve seats in advance.
Seats ca n b e reserv ed in advance.
- » SEE ALSO

G ram m ar 33: Countable and

uncountable nouns

185
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) There isn't anvone/no one in the garden.

b) Excuse me, could you move? I can't see anything/something.
c) There is anything/nothing to drink.
d) There's anyone/someone to see you outside.
e) You can do anything/something you want.
f) Anyone/Someone stole the money, but we don't know who.
g) I don't know anything/nothing about it.
h) No one/Someone would tell me the answer, so I guessed.
i) I've lost my bag and I can't find it somewhere/anywhere.
j) I must have put my bag somewhere/anywhere, but I don't know where.

2 Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first
sentence.

a) There was noth in g I could do.

I couldn't .....................................................................................
b) I know Mary better than anyone.
No o n e ..................................................
c) No one was on tim e yesterday.
E v ery o n e...........................................................
d) I haven't got any work.
I've g o t ......................................................................
e) There's som ething I'd like to ask you.
May I ........................................................................
f) We're all m ilk drinkers here!
Everybody...............................................................
g) W hen I phoned, there was no reply.
No o n e ...........................................................
h) Are we going to be driven there?
I s .....................................................................
i) I make new friends wherever I go.
Everyw here.........................................................
j) You had a call this m orning.
S o m e o n e ...............................................................

186
 G R A M M A R 45 PRONOUNS

3 Complete each sentence so that it includes a suitable form of one of the verbs
from the box, and a reflexive pronoun.

behave blame cut on joy express hurt introduce talk

a) Have a good holiday, both of you! And ........ yourselves

b) Our teacher told us to stop shouting and t o ...............
c) W hen I fell off the horse, I d id n 't ....................................
d) Beth knows a lot of French, but c a n 't ............................. .......................easily.
e) Let m e ........................................................I'm Susan Perry.
f) The accident wasn't your fault. D o n 't ............................
g) W hen I ......................... t o ........................... , other people stare at me!
h) W hile Tom was picking up the broken glass, he

Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in bold.
a) The box isn't empty.
so m eth in g
There's something in the box.
b) All the people were dancing.
everyone

c) I feel annoyed.
so m eth in g

d) We haven't got any food.

n o th in g

e) The office is empty.

n o one

f) Julia is very popular.

everybody

g) You can have whatever you like.

an y th in g

h) The best place is hom e.

N ow here

187
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

a) That's an easy question! f r Y ^ y b o v l y knows the answer!

b) I s ......................... the matter? Can I help you?

c) is wrong with the car, and it w on't start.
d) T h e re 's ......................... to see you. Shall I ask them to wait?
e) They in tro d u ced ......................... as Helen and Ann.
f) never really knows what will happen, does one?
g) I've done so far today has gone wrong!
h) you could say would make me change my mind, I'm afraid.
i) Did you do it all b y ............................
j) Yes, I did it b y ............................

6 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) Someone spoke to me, but I can 't remember its name.

,5om ^p,v\e . S p o k e 't o .. m e ;, . b u t ,, I . c o [ \ t t , r e m e m b e r , t h e i r , m m e _ ,

b) All in the garden has been growing a lot lately.

c) Carol didn't do nothing yesterday.

d) There isn't no one waiting for you.

e) Pete and Kate enjoyed themselfs at the party.

f) One fills in an application form, and then you wait for an answer.

g) We need to do some shopping. There isn't som ething in the fridge.

188
 1

GRAMMAR

46 Possession

Explanations
's (apostrophe s) ■ We use apostroph e's to show that som ething belongs to a person. We can
use th e 's form w ithout a following noun if the m eaning is clear.
This is J im ’s scarf. This is J im ’s.
Those are Helen's gloves. Those are Helen's.
W here is the director's office?

m An apostrophe is sometim es used when som ething is part of another thing.

W hat is the book's title?
W hat is this plant's nam e?

m W ith plural nouns we add the apostrophe only.

Those are the stu dents' coats.

m A special use o f 's is to refer to someone's hom e, a shop nam e or a place

name.
George bought this melon in the greengrocer's / in Sm ith's.
I went to the doctor's and the dentist's on the sam e day.

m If there is no possession, we do not use an apostrophe. Note this com m on

mistake: Apple's sold hero.

■ Note that an apostrophe can also be a short form of is or has.

It's a lovely day. (It's = It is)
It's got a battery. (It's = It has)

of and compound m We use o f to show that one thing belongs to or with another thing.
nouns The end o f the street. (NOT the stroot's end)
The last twenty pages o f the book. (NOT the book's last twenty pages)

■ Compound nouns are formed from two nouns together. The first noun is like
an adjective and describes the second noun.
I saw the shirt in a shop window.
I bought some new football boots.

■ Compound nouns are very com m on in technical descriptions.

Loosen the corner brackets first.

m Sometimes a hyphen is used to join the words. Check in a dictionary to see

when a hyphen is used.
I bought a chocolate ice-cream.

189
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Possessive ■ Possessive adjectives are used before nouns. They are:

adjectives my your her its his our their

m We do n ot use an article ( the or a ) with a possessive adjective.

Peter is my cousin. He doesn't live in our town.

■ We can add own to a possessive adjective for emphasis.

Paul cooks all his own meals.
This isn't my own bike. I've borrowed it from a friend.

Possessive ■ Possessive pronouns are used instead of a possessive adjective and noun.
pronouns They are:
mine yours hers his ours theirs

■ Possessive pronouns stand on their own. They are not used with another
noun.
This is my bike. (possessive adjective + noun)
This bike is m ine. (possessive pronoun)

■ Note that there is no apostrophe in possessive pronouns ending in s.

Whose keys are these? Are they yours or m ine?
Yours are on the table. These are m ine.

Double possessive There are two com m on situations where we use two possessive forms together.
Both are when we describe the relationship between people.

1 o f and apostrophe
Jo is a friend o f my brother's.

2 o f and possessive pronoun

I met a cousin o f m ine at the party.
A com m on usage of this structure is to describe things owned by people.
Do you like this new hat o f m ine?

p H SEE ALSO

Vocabulary 6: Compound
words

190
 GRAMMAR 46 POSSESSION

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Jane m et a friend of her/hers in the street.

b) Lucy does all herself/her own decorating.
c) Are these scissors your/yours?
d) The desk next to the window is my/mine.
e) Chris and Anna introduced me to a neighbour of their/theirs.
f) Excuse me, is this your/yours seat?
g) David asks if you've seen that old coat of his/him.
h) Pete has borrowed my/mine bike.
i) We haven't brought our/ours books with us.
j) The dog is black and white, and its/it's ears are very long.

2 Put an apostrophe where necessary.

a) Tell M onica its Elenas turn, n ot hers.

Tell Monica it’s Blenefs tuxyit not■ kers.
b) Alices younger brothers called Bill.

c) Tims sandwiches were tastier than ours.

d) The films beginning is good but its ending is weak.

e) Are these keys yours or hers?

f) Barbara fills in the patients record cards at the doctors.

g) W hen its raining, everybodys raincoats get wet.

h) The managers assistant reads all the customers letters.

i) Your sisters dog runs faster than ours.

j) Ones our teachers car and the others a visitors.

191
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Make two compound words from the words listed.

a) football cheese boot sandwich

football boot............... ckttst saydwick
b) window pocket coat shop

c) gate garden light bicycle

d) departm ent cottage store country

e) engine singer rock fire

f) post sharpener office pencil

g) ground report school football

h) assistant shop station railway

For each question, complete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Naomi is a friend of my sister's.

Naomi is ...W y^ S L ftC K S .................................friend.
b) These shoes belong to Sam.
T h e s e ............................................................... shoes.
c) I m et one of m y friends outside the school.
I m et a ............................................................... outside the school.
d) This is m y favourite programme on television.
This i s ............................................................... programme.
e) W hat are your teachers called?
W h a t ............................................................... names?
f) Have you got a thing for opening tins?
Have you g o t ...............................................................?
g) Those bikes belong to our neighbours.
T h o s e ...............................................................bikes.
h) I put my books on the table in the kitchen.
I put my b o o k s ...............................................................table.

192
 GRAMMAR 46 POSSESSION

5 Underline the errors in these sentences. Rewrite each sentence.

a) There are two bus stop's near my house.

... Ih zrt a rc.Mo. ..b.HJ.. ..nmr..my..hn.w.z.........................................................................................
b) Our cat sleep's all day in it's bed.

c) Have you m et the sister of Jane?

d) Creature's like these live at the sea's bottom .

e) This book is the m ine.

f) Those are two friends' of my fathers.

g) Everybodys drawing's were better than our's.

h) Are these your's or m ine glove's?

i) The house stand's on it's own at the street's end.

j) I noticed these shoe's in a window's shop.

193
 GRAMMAR m l. i n T .

47 Linking words
Li
'‘ P’,«'
iil:'

Explanations
This unit includes words and phrases used to organize ideas in speaking and
writing. Notice the position of the words in the example sentences. Sometimes a
word comes in the middle of a sentence to join two clauses, such as and. Other
tim es the word or phrase comes at the beginning of a sentence and is followed
by a com m a in writing or a pause in speech, such as First o f all, ....

and, both, too, ■ A nd is used to join words or parts of sentences. To emphasize the fact that
as well, also there are two things we can use both ... and.
Helen put on her coat a n d picked up the suitcase.
Helen picked up both her suitcase a n d her umbrella.

■ Too, as well, as well as and also are used to describe two actions at the same
tim e. Note the positions.
Helen picked up her suitcase a n d her umbrella too.
Helen picked up her suitcase a n d her umbrella as well.
Helen picked up her suitcase as well as her umbrella.
Helen picked up her suitcase, her coat a n d also her umbrella.

For example, m Note the possible positions of For example.

such as Diet varies from place to place. For exam ple, in hot countries, people tend to
eat more fruit.
In hot countries, for exam ple, people tend to eat more fruit.

■ We use such as in the middle of a sentence to give examples. It is the same as

like. Such as cannot be used at the beginning of a sentence.
In hot countries, such as Greece, people tend to eat more fruit.

First (of all), ■ We can use First (o f all) to begin a list of points in formal speech and writing.
secondly etc., For other points we use Secondly etc.
finally Television has changed our lives in several ways. First o f all, it has ... .
Secondly, more people ... . Finally, it has changed the way t h a t ... .

m To introduce our final point in formal speech and writing we can say In
conclusion.
In conclusion, we can say that television has both good and bad features.

/4s well as this, These are used in formal speech and writing to show that we are adding a point.
besides this The m eaning is 'and' but the phrases comes at the beginning of a sentence.
Television has changed our lives in several ways. First o f all, it has .. . .
Secondly, more people ... . As well as this/Besides this, more people ... .

194
 GRAMMAR 47 LINKING WORDS

In fact, actually In fact and actually are used to give more detail, or to give surprising
inform ation.
Dave has several dogs. In fact, he's got four. (more detail)
I thought Gina was a doctor but, in fact, she's a vet. (surprise)
I thought Gina was a doctor but, actually, she's a vet. (surprise)

In my view, These are used in formal speech and writing to introduce our own ideas.
personally Some people believe that television has killed the art o f conversation. In my
view/Personally, I think it gives people something to talk about.

either, or m Either ... or is used to describe a choice or an alternative.

We can either go to the cinema, or stay at home.
E ither we can go to the cinema, or we can stay at home.
(NOT Or we can go ...)
Note that the structure Or... or... does not exist in English. It is possible to
begin a sentence with Or only when we com plete som eone else's sentence.
A: ‘We could go to the cinema I suppose ...'
B: '... or we could stay at home and watch a video.'

Instead (of) m We use instead (of) to m ean 'in the place of som ething else'.
Instea d o f cooking I ordered a take-away meal.
Jill came to the party instead o f her sister.

m At the end of a sentence, instead is used w ithout of.

I didn't cook. I ordered a take-away meal instead.

except Except and except for m ean 'n o t including'.

They gave presents to everyone except me.
We have painted all the house, except (for) the front door.

even ■ We use even to say that som ething is surprising.

Sam studies very hard. He even gets up at 5 .3 0 to study!
Even Sam found the exam difficult.

■ Even is also used to emphasize comparative adjectives.

This question is even h a rd er than the last one.

Time words with The tim e words since, yet and while have a com pletely different m eaning and use
other meanings as linking words. W ith this use they are more com m on in writing.

since m eaning 'as' I couldn't swim, since I had a cold.

yet m eaning 'although' No one replied to my knock, yet all the lights were
on.
while m eaning 'although' The first two buses were full, while the next was
completely empty.

195
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Mrs Davis taught us except for/instead o f Mr Taylor.

b) We can either/or wait here, or phone for a taxi.
c) Helen plays the guitar and also/too writes songs.
d) In Scandinavian countries, for example/such as Finland, they have very cold
winters.
e) Everyone in the team played badly also/except Sam.
f) All the shops were closed, since/yet it was a public holiday.
g) Jack studies and/both geography and history.
h) The Peakworth tent is strong and waterproof, since/yet light to carry.

2 Rewrite each sentence so that it has a similar meaning and contains the word in
bold.

a) Debra visited both the castle and the museum,

too
Vebm . visited. tkccastit nyuA.. too...
b) Jill was the only person who came late,
except

c) Although I said it was raining, it isn't!

fact

d) Karen hurt her leg, so she couldn't play tennis,

since

e) My opinion is that smoking is bad for you.

view

f) I ate the chocolate cake and the apple pie.

as well as

g) Daniel played in goal, in his brother's place,

instead

h) Finally, I'd like to thank the head teacher, Ann Coles,

in

196
 G R A MM A R 43 LINKING WORDS

3 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Nowadays there are m any good reasons for using bicycles (1) ....Q ..... cars to
travel in city centres. ( 2 ) ............., bicycles are ( 3 ) ...............silent and clean,
( 4 ) .............are easy to park. ( 5 ) ..............., using a bicycle ( 6 ) ...............keeps people
fit. However, city centres must ( 7 ) .............have cycle lanes ( 8 ) ...............be free of
private cars completely. Some large cities, ( 9 ) .............Amsterdam in the
Netherlands, are already organized in this way. ( 1 0 ) ............., a com bination of
the use of bicycles with very cheap or free public transport solves the problem
of traffic jams and makes the city centre a more pleasant place.

1) A b u t B except for C instead of D such as

2) A As well B First of all C In fact D Personally
3) A both B and C too D as well
4) A also B for example they C except D and as well as this
5) A And B Yet C W hile D Secondly
6) A and B both C also D too
7) A in conclusion B either C besides this D both
8) A such as B yet C also D or
9) A such as B as well C in my view D while
10) A personally B finally C for example D actually

Complete each sentence with a word or phrase from the box. Use each word or
phrase once only.

actually as well as this both either

except instead personally such as

a) Everyone ......................... Julia remembered to bring their dictionaries.

b) We've repaired the roof, a n d ............................................ we've repainted the
whole house.
c) , I don't think that there are aliens or flying saucers.
d) I managed to l o s e ............................................ my passport and my wallet.
e) I was going to go to the cinema, but I went to the theatre

f) People think that Tim is shy, b u t ............................................ he's very talkative.

g) Some illn esses,............................................ the com m on cold, do not have a cure.
h) We're going t o ............................................ go camping, or stay with some friends.

197
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete the spaces (a-j) with the words (1-10).

(a) I'd like to thank everyone who has helped with the school play.
(b ) the actors, and the stage hands, have worked very hard, and
everyone who made the costum es worked hard ( c ) ............... I would ( d ) ..............
like to thank all those who have sold tickets. This year we had an ( e ) ............
larger audience than last year, and ( f ) .............Tuesday evening, every single seat
was sold. This year the play ran for a week ( g ) .............for two days. We did not
have a lot of tim e for rehearsals, and ( h ) .............the play was a great success.
( i ) ............., I feel that we should congratulate all the actors for their wonderful
performance, ( j ) ............., I'd like to give Judy Walker, the director, this present
from everyone at the school.

1 even
2 yet
3 as well
4 except for
5 first of all
6 in conclusion
7 also
8 personally
9 both
10 instead of

198
 GR AM M AR

48 Capital letters and punctuation

Explanations
Capital letters Capital letters (also called upper-case letters) are used:
to begin a sentence This is a beautiful place.
for names of people Jim, Helen
for addressing people Mrs Jones, Uncle Peter, Mum
for personal pronoun I I saw Ellen last night.
for titles of books etc. 'War and Peace' is a great book.
for names of places France, Hungary
for calendar inform ation Wednesday, March, New Year's Day

In book and film titles, small words like and, a/the and prepositions do not
usually have capitals, unless they are at the beginning.
'Four Weddings and a Funeral' is a funny film.

Some words can be written with capitals, or in lower-case. These are:

names of the seasons in Spring, in spring
decades the Fifties, the fifties
jobs Sanderson was a good president, (general use)
Paul met President Brunswick. (job title)
compass points I live in the north o f Scotland. (description)
Sally works in the Far East. (place name)

Full stop (.) Full stops are used at the end of a sentence. They are also used in
abbreviations to show that letters in a word are missing.
e.g. etc.
Full stops are often left out after the abbreviations Mr and Mrs.

Comma (,) A com m a in writing represents a brief pause in speech. It is also used in lists,
except for the last two items where we use and.
I bought some bananas, some oranges and some potatoes.
If the last two item s of the list are long then we do use a com m a.
All day we cleaned the floors, washed the walls, and tidied the house.

Linking words at the beginning of a sentence are followed by com mas.

First o f all, this can be dangerous.
Linking words in the middle of a sentence have commas before and after.
Ann, on the other hand, did not agree.

Commas are used with non-defining relative clauses.

Tony, who is usually late, turned up at 1 0 .3 0 .

Commas are used in direct speech.

Jim said, 'I'll be late.'

199
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

But they are not used after reporting verbs in reported speech.
Jim said he would be late.

■ Commas can not be used to join sentences directly, w ithout any other
changes. Look at this example.
Two men were walking down the street. They were carrying a box.
These two sentences cannot be joined simply by changing the full stop to a
com m a.
Two men were walking down the street, they were carrying a box.
But there are other ways to com bine the sentences. For example:
Two men were walking down the street, carrying a box.
Two men carrying a box were walking down the street.

Semi-colon (;) ■ We can join two sentences with related meanings using a semi-colon.
Road users annoy pedestrians; pedestrians annoy wad users.
A sem i-colon is also used to separate long item s in a list.
Students are asked not to leave bicycles by the entrance; not to leave bags in the
sitting room; and not to leave coats in the dining room.

Colon (:) m A colon introduces item s in a list.

There are two rules: one, don't do it; two, don't get caught.
It can also introduce an explanation of the previous part of the sentence.
Finally, we had to stop: we were tired and it was dark.

Speech marks ( '') ■ Speech marks (also called quotation marks) are used with direct speech.
(«
Punctuation goes inside. They can be single or double.
'It might rain later,' I explained.
"Why are we leaving so early?" Helen asked.

■ Titles of books, films, plays etc. are put inside single quotation marks.
Punctuation is put outside in this case.
We went to a perform ance o f Ibsen's 'Ghosts'.
However, in printed text, the titles of books, films, plays etc. are usually put
in italics.

Question mark (?) ■ Question marks only occur after the question.
and exclamation What's the time?
mark (!)
m Exclam ation marks are used in inform al writing, but are not considered
appropriate in formal writing.
You'll never guess what! I've just got engaged!

SEE ALSO

Grammar 25: Relative clau<

Grammar 47: Linking word

200
 GRAMMAR 48 C A P IT A L LE TTE RS AND PUNCTUATION

Practice

Underline the sentence which is punctuated correctly.

a) 1 'Would you m ind telling me where we are?' Petra asked.

2 'Would you m ind telling me, where we are Petra asked?'
3 'Would you m ind telling me, where we are,' Petra asked?
b) 1 I agreed, that a cottage in the m ountains, would be better.
2 I agreed that a cottage in the m ountains would be better.
3 I agreed that a cottage, in the m ountains would be better.
c) 1 Angela who arrived after I did, asked me w hen the play finished?
2 Angela, who arrived after I did, asked me w hen the play finished.
3 Angela, who arrived after I did asked me, w hen the play finished.
d) 1 Peter told me, not to wait and said 'I'll see you later.'
2 Peter told me not to wait and said, 'I'll see you later.'
3 Peter told me n ot to wait and said I'll see you later.
e) 1 In the end I w ent hom e, I was wet and hungry, and felt ill.
2 In the end I went hom e; I was wet and hungry; and felt ill.
3 In the end I went hom e: I was wet and hungry and felt ill.
f) 1 I bought some flour, some eggs, two lemons and some sugar.
2 I bought some: flour, some: eggs, two: lem ons and some sugar.
3 I bought some flour some eggs two lem ons, and some sugar.

2 Rewrite each sentence putting in any necessary capital letters.

a) we're m eeting uncle david on tuesday evening at eight.

Were. mcetiv\g..!Ky\jde.X).o\vid. on. Tvtesd$y.. evening,..o\t..eight.,
b) last february i met mrs wilkinson for the first tim e.

c) tim lives in the south of france near cannes.

d) we saw a great film at the abc called 'the remains of the day'.

e) we went to a party at mrs harrisons' house on new year's eve.

f) julia's reading 'a portrait of a lady' by henry james.

201
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Rewrite each group of words so that it contains the punctuation listed.

a) First of all who is going to carry the suitcase asked Emilie

(one full stop, one com m a, one question mark, speech marks)
First. of.. fl.ll,.. .1Vkd.is. go iny,.to. cflrry. the. suitcase,?' _asked EmiLU.
b) Kate said she'd be on tim e but I didn't believe her
(one full stop, one com ma)

c) Jam es said that he'd missed the train got lost and been arrested
(one full stop, two commas)

d) W hen the bell rang our teacher stood up and said Stop writing please
(one full stop, three commas, speech marks)

e) On the other hand we could go to the cinem a couldn't we said David

(one full stop, two comm as, one question mark, speech marks)

f) Good m orning Alan said Tina how do you feel today

(one full stop, one com m a, one question mark, speech marks, one capital
letter)

g) If I were you I'd ask for some help or perhaps start again
(one full stop, two commas)

h) The old stadium was eventually demolished very few people went there and
it was becom ing dangerous
(one full stop, one com m a, one colon)

202
 2

GRAMMAR

49 Spelling and pronunciation 1

Explanations
Adding -ing to ■ One-syllable words w hich end in one vowel and one consonant double the
verbs last consonant.
swim/swimming put/putting
Compare these words w hich do not double the consonant:
shoot/shooting lift/lifting

■ Two-syllable words w hich end in one vowel and one consonant double the
last consonant when the stress is on the second syllable.
begin/beginning control/controlling
Compare these words with the stress on the first syllable.
wonder/wondering threaten/threatening
One exception to this rule in British English is travel/travelling.

■ Words w hich end in one vowel, one consonant and -e drop the final -e.
write/writing leave/leaving

Words ending in The suffix -ful has only one /.

-ful beautiful successful
W hen -ly is added to make an adverb, the I becom es double.
beautifidly successfidly

-ie or -ei? There is a useful rule: i before e except after c.

field niece
but receive
But note that this rule only works when the sound is 'ee' /i:/. For exam ple in
this word the sound is different and e comes before i:
reign

Silent letters m Many words contain letters w hich do not form a sound. These are sometimes
referred to as 'silent letters'. The silent letters are underlined.
bt/mb doubt plumber thumb
kn knee knife know
ps psychology psychiatrist
sc descend ascend

m q and u
The letter q is always followed by u.
question squid acquire

203
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Practice

Words com m only spelled wrongly are also included here.

Correct the spelling where necessary.

a) decideing ...... ..................................... g) thier

b) swiming ............................................ h) beatiful
c) foto ............................................ i) reciept
d) qestion ............................................ j) begining
e) whistle ............................................ k) phychiatrist
f) knowen ............................................ 1) sucesfull

Use the letters in brackets to make a word which fits the space.

a) Sue said she'd (n e h o p )..... p.hQV\&........................ me but I haven't

(iredvece) .................... a call yet.
b) W hen the referee blew the (stew lih )............................................the players left
the (edlif) ................................................
c) Ellen (feclyslu su cs)............................................ completed the course in nuclear
(sh ip scy )...............................................
d) I didn't (w o n k )............................................ how to cut the string without a
(in k e f)................................................
e) The police arrested the (itfe h )............................................as he was
(n eg v ia l)............................................ the bank.
f) Jim asked a (siq o n tu e )............................................, but his teacher wasn't
(n ilsig en t)...............................................
g) At the (n ig en g ib n )............................................ of the film, I had a poor
(w iv e)............................................ of the screen.
h) These ancient (m u lco sn )............................................ are
(y itb u elfu al)............................................ made.

Write each verb with an -ing ending.

a) control .............. .......g) upset .........................................

b) thicken ....................................................h) hook .........................................
c) grip ....................................................i) write .........................................
d) choose ....................................................j) improve .........................................
e) fly .................................................... k) swim .........................................
f) make .................................................... 1) ride .........................................

204
 GRAMMAR 49 SPELLING AND PRONUN CIAT ION 1

4 Correct the spelling in this letter.

Dear Becky,
I'm sory that I haven't writen to you for so long. I'm afriad I've been very
bussy at shool, and I haven't had m uch tim e for writeing leters. Last week I
finised my exam enations, so now I'm geting redy to go on holyday.
I was wundering wether you wood like to com e to stay for a fiew days? You
cann meat my freinds, and we coud all go swimeing. The wheather is realy good
now hear in Italy, and I'm shure you will engoy yourshelf.
Best wishes,
Silvia

5 Correct these words commonly spelled wrongly.

a) tom m orow ....tP.WMrrOyd .....................................

b) Wensday ................................................................
c) advertisment ................................................................
d) neihbour ................................................................
e) thrugh ................................................................
f) greatfull ................................................................
g) neccessarry ................................................................
h) dissappointed ................................................................
i) wheather ................................................................
j) rember ................................................................
k) libary ................................................................
1) anser ................................................................

6 Underline the silent letter/s in these words.

a) debt j) autumn
b) exhibition k) answer
c) high 1) daughter
d) knife m) half
e) lamb n) light
f) psychologist o) salmon
g) receipt p) whole
h) what q) would
i) yacht r) writing

205
 GRAMMAR

50 Spelling and pronunciation 2

Explanations
Same sound, In English one particular sound can be spelt using different letters. In each
different spelling group below the sound underlined is the same.

Vowels
company brother love trouble rubbish blood
road most home though low
earth further word hurt
wait great late weight
now shout drown plough

C onsonants
relation shock sure conscious delicious
church furniture watch
leisure measure confusion

Same Different words can have exactly the same pronunciation. Com m on examples
pronunciation, are:
different spelling court/caught stair/stare sore/saw allowed/aloud
and meaning lesson/lessen find/fined waste/waist fare/fair
warn/worn wait/weight no/know two/too

Words which look Some words may have only a letter or two difference to other words, but they
similar have a com pletely different m eaning. Be especially careful with these commonly
confused words:
later/latter quiet/quite
recent/resent accept/except
through/thorough formerly/formally
insure/ensure lose/loose

Words with a Some words are particularly difficult to spell because they seem to have a
syllable which is syllable w hich is n ot pronounced. The examples below show how many
not pronounced syllables are actually pronounced in speech:
temperature (3 syllables) library (3 syllables)
Wednesday (2 syllables) vegetable (3 syllables)
people (2 syllables) interesting (3 syllables)

Nouns and verbs Noun advice practice

with c and s Verb advise practise

How to improve Use a dictionary to check the pronunciation of new words.

spelling Relate the spelling of new words to words you already know.
Make lists of the words you usually spell wrongly. Test yourself or ask friends
to test you.
Read widely to give you experience of the way words are spelled.

206
 G R A M M A R 50 SP ELLING AND PRONUN CIAT ION 2

Words com m only spelled wrongly are also included here.

Find pairs of words with the same sound underlined.

1 com pany
b) plum 2 measure
c) heart 3 furniture
d) catch 4
e) phone 5 rule
f) sure 6 brown
g) doubt 7 toast
h) food 8 confusion
i) caution 9 park

2 Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Please stop looking at me like that! It's very rude to stair/stare.

b) I think you should practice/practise diving every day.
c) The doctor gave M artin a through/thorough exam ination.
d) Could you give me some advice/advise about language courses?
e) We wanted to go by train, but we couldn't afford the fair/fare.
f) Could you wait a m om ent? I'm not quiet/quite ready.
g) Reading allowed/aloud is hard unless you have tim e to check first.
h) Sorry I didn't com e to your party, but I just felt two/too tired.
i) You can have model J6 or model J8, but the later/latter is more expensive,
j) The back of the chair is nearly falling off - it's really lose/loose.

3 Tick (/) if a pair of words rhymes.

a) sweet/eat i) chose/bruise .......
b) worse/horse ....... .......................j) low/go .......
c) worn/torn ....... .......................k) abroad/afford .......
d) lose/loose ....... .......................1) quite/diet .......
e) tea/bee ....... .......................m) friend/leaned .......
f) thought/short ........ ..................... n) blood/food .......
g) later/latter ....... .......................o) weight/height .......
h) word/heard .......

207
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Correct the spelling in this letter.

Dear Silvia,
Thanks for your leter and your invittation to Italy! I've never traveled abraod
before, and I'm realy looking forwerd to staying with you and your familly. I've
spokken to my parrents and they've aggreed. They say they're going to phone
soon to discus the arangements.
I've dicided to have some Italian lesons so that I can practice when I come to
Italy. I'd like you to write some simple sentances for me. Please note my new
adress. We moved last weak and now I've got a m uch biger bedroom,
best wishes,
Becky

5 Correct these words commonly spelled wrongly.

a) vegtable ..VegtttibLc
b) langage
c) qeueu
d) recieve
e) peple
f) beatiful
g) intresting
h) biscit
i) cieling
j) difrent
k) knowlige
1) indipendant

There is another word with exactly the same pronunciation as the word given.
Write it in the space.

a) ate .................... ............. h) nun ......................................

b) been ................................................... i) peace ......................................
c) Czeck ................................................... j) pear ......................................
d) flour ................................................... k) right ......................................
e) hole ................................................... 1) rose ......................................
f) mussel ................................................... m) sew ......................................

g) no ................................................... n) stare ......................................

208
 Consolidation 5

Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Paula keeps talking about that new bike of hers/her/her's.

b) I asked my teacher for help, but she refused to help/helping me.
c) David isn't interested at/for/in collecting stamps.
d) Sue couldn't swim although/as she had a bad cold.
e) It's really dark. I can 't see anything/something/nothing.
f) I really en joy to spend/spending tim e with you!
g) Ann is n ot very good at/by/for French.
h) Helen hasn't told me anything/nothing about the trip.

2 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

An unfortunate misunderstanding
Last year we (1) to have an expensive holiday, so we ( 2 ) .............to visit
some friends, Brian and Ann, who ( 3 ) .............to live by the sea. They ( 4 ) ...............
to put us up for two weeks, and as we always ( 5 ) .............seeing them , it
( 6 ) .............to be a good idea. They asked us if we ( 7 ) .............. sleeping on the
sofa, and said that they would ( 8 ) .............to make us com fortable. We ( 9 ) .............
to get there by bus, and when we arrived we could ( 1 0 ) .............Brian and Ann
sitting in the garden. They ( 1 1 ) .............to be glad to see us, but it was obvious
that they hadn't ( 1 2 ) .............to see us. They said that we had ( 1 3 ) .............. to tell
them when we were arriving, and they ( 1 4 ) .............asking us how long we were
going to stay. We ( 1 5 ) .............feeling embarrassed, so the next day we went
home.

1) A continued B couldn't afford C liked D promised

2) A fancied B tried C wished D decided
3) A m eant B kept C hoped D happened
4) A offered B admitted C enjoyed D intended
5) A denied B imagined C enjoyed D preferred
6) A began B seemed C imagined D expected
7) A minded B suggested C wanted D remembered
8) A practise B mean C learn D try
9) A suggested B tried C managed D started
10) A watch B see C keep D wait
11) A intended B pretended C expected D suggested
12) A preferred B forgotten C promised D expected
13) A forgotten B denied C seemed D chosen
14) A loved B wanted C kept D couldn't stand
15) A imagined B m inded C couldn't help D seemed

209
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 For each question, com plete the second sentence so that it means the same as
the first, using no more than three words.

a) Jeff was the only student who forgot the test.

Everyone remembered the test ...ZK t& p.t.J& ff.. .......................
b) Roberta knows this town better than anyone.
N o ....................................................this town better than Roberta.
c) These two pairs of gloves belong to the twins.
These a r e ....................................................gloves.
d) Andy wouldn't carry m y bag.
A n d y ....................................................m y bag.
e) Peter is reliable.
You c a n ....................................................Peter.
f) Serena is one of my brother's friends.
Serena i s ....................................................my brother's.
g) The snow began yesterday evening.
I t ....................................................yesterday evening.
h) Do you think you could close the window?
Would you m in d ....................................................the window?

4 Look carefully at each line. Some lines are correct but some have a word which
should not be there. Tick (/ ) each correct line. If a line has a word which should
not be there, write the word in the space.

W inning a million
Life changed com pletely for Carol Miles when she won 1 ........... ............
£ 1 ,0 0 0 ,0 0 0 in the lottery. 'I decided that to buy a ticket 2 .......
while I was waiting for take the bus. I didn't get excited 3 .......................
about it, because I didn't expect me to win. In fact, I 4 .......................
com pletely forgot it to check my numbers, until a 5 .......................
friend reminded for me to do it. You can imagine how 6 .......................
surprised I was!' Carol had often been dreamed about 7 .......................
being rich, but she has got discovered that having lots 8 ........................
of m oney doesn't always m ean being happy. 'I can't 9 ........................
en joy for anything now. W hen I go out with my friends, 1 0 .......................
for example, they either expect me to pay or the bills, 1 1 .......................
or they're angry with me when I offer to pay it. Some 1 2 .......................
people they are jealous of my good luck, I think, and 1 3 ........................
accuse me of thinking only about money. Nobody seems 1 4 .......................
to have understand. I thought I would en joy myself, but 1 5 ........................
everyone has started to treat me with differently, except for 1 6 .......................
one friend of m ine who has asked me to lend it him £ 1 0 ,0 0 0 !' 1 7 .......................
210
 G R A M M A R 51 CONSOLIDATION 5

5 Complete each sentence with one suitable word.

An afternoon at the bus station

Hannah had been waiting (a) ...fQX...............a colleague of ( b ) ...........................
father's to collect her from the bus station for more than an hour, and she was
tired ( c ) ......................... waiting. There was ( d ) ........................... else there, and it had
( e ) ......................... raining. A friend of ( f ) ........................... had lent her an umbrella
to take on her trip, but she ( g ) ......................... to be getting wet. Perhaps her
father was angry ( h ) ......................... her, she thought, or had simply
( i ) ......................... to collect her. Her m obile phone wasn't working and there
wasn't ( j ) ......................... a phone-box in the bus station. W hy did
( k ) ......................... always go wrong w hen she travelled by bus? (1 )...........................
the bus was crowded and she felt very uncom fortable, or it ( m ) .........................
stopping and the journey lasted for hours. Suddenly she ( n ) ......................... a car
stopping outside, ( o ) ......................... was waving at her. It was her father!

6 Rewrite this letter, correcting the spelling and adding any necessary capital
letters and punctuation.

17 Harford Street,
Bilsworth,
BK3 4JG
Tel: 081 4 3 6783

dear david
it was grate too here from you after so long i enjoied hearing all youre knews
i didn't reallize that you'd spent a year abbroad you must have had a realy good
tim e in greece ive dicided to go their next sumer praps we coud go twogether
ive had a fantastick year at colidge the work is harder than the work we did at
scool but its more intresting im studing bussiness adm inistration and computer
sience at the m om m ent ive also maid lots of new freinds
im thinkeing of com m ing to bristol for a few days to vissit m y sister woud
you like to m eat you coud show me the sites and we coud talk abowt our old
scooldays
why dont you give me a ring and we coud discus it it woud be wunderfull to
see you agane
best wishes
ellen

211
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

7 Put one suitable word in each space.

a) o f ................ going out to lunch, we stayed at home.

b) There were a dozen oranges in the bowl but you've e a te n .........................
......................... one.
c) I thought it was Wednesday today, b u t .....................................................it's
Tuesday!
d) , I would like to thank everyone who has given
help.
e) Ted is a fr ie n d ..................................................... brother's, but isn't a friend of

f) Jo e bought two shirts and a ja c k e t .......................................................

g) I really like this new coat o f ............................W here did you buy it?
h) Kate fell over and c u t ......................... on a piece of broken glass.
i) I suppose it d ep e n d s......................... w hether you b e lie v e ...........................UFOs
or not.
j) The test was so hard t h a t ......................... our teacher didn't know the answers.

Problem 1 What is the difference between these pairs of sentences? Check with Grammar 43
check if you are not sure.
a) I tried to take an aspirin.
I tried taking an aspirin.
b) I rem em ber to do my homework.
I rem em ber doing my homework.
c) The boys stopped having a rest.
The boys stopped to have a rest.

2 The same verb or adjectives can be followed by different prepositions. Check

these meanings in a dictionary:
a) You rem ind me of my brother.
Can you rem ind me about the test?
b) We're pleased with him .
We're pleased for him .
We're pleased by him .

3 Only use one in formal speech and writing. Don't mix one and you.

4 Remember that using an apostrophe can mean that a letter is missing ( it's = it is)
or it can show possession (Ann's hat).

5 The best way to improve your punctuation and spelling is through wide reading.
Make lists of words you often spell wrongly.

212
 VOCABULARY

1 Dealing with vocabulary

When you find a If you are reading and you find a word you do n ot know, do n ot im m ediately
new word use a dictionary. Ask yourself:
■ Is this an im portant, useful word?
■ Do I need to know the exact m eaning?

If the word seems im portant, and you have tim e, then of course use a dictionary
and add the word to your vocabulary notebook.
If the word seems unim portant, or you are reading just for pleasure, or you
don't have tim e, then you can:
■ leave it and com e back later
■ try to guess the m eaning of the word from the con text
■ compare the new word with other words that look similar, then guess
■ ask someone

Making the most Choose a dictionary which has all the inform ation you need. To use a
of your dictionary dictionary effectively you need to know:
■ how to find words in alphabetical order
■ what the abbreviations in each entry mean
■ how to look for words if you don't find them at first (e.g. look further down
in the same entry to find other words in the fam ily or the collocation you
are looking for)
■ when to carry it with you
■ when to use it and when not to use it (you m ight get bored if you use it too
m uch)

Keeping a Many people, when they find a new word, just write the translation at the side
vocabulary of the page and do nothing more. But this is not the best way to learn a word:
notebook first it is hard to remember words in isolation, and second you need extra
inform ation about how the word is used, not just its basic m eaning. So it is a
good idea to keep a vocabulary notebook where you can review and revise new
words. For each word in the book you m ight want to include:

Definition
Gram m atical class (e.g. noun)
Pronunciation
Translation
Collocation (words which com bine with the m ain word)
An example sentence that shows how the word is used
Frequency (m any dictionaries have a system to show how com m on it is)
Formal or inform al

213
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

If you put the words in a notebook it will be easier to remember them . But if
you organize the words inside the book then it is even better. Here are some
ideas:

■ Record words in alphabetical sections.

■ Make sections for different large topic areas like ‘Families and Friends',
'Hobbies and Interests', 'Places'.
■ Make a 'Lexical set'. This is a small group of words based on one specific
topic.
Garden
lawn hedge shed flowerbed
You can write this as a word spider:

flO Y Jtrbtd

L a r in ,

Make a 'Word fam ily'. This is a group based on word form ation,
beauty noun
beautiful adjective
beautify verb
Make sections for idioms and special expressions.
Make sections for words that are useful to you personally, or that interest
you, or that cause you problems.

214
^•

VOCABULARY

2 Word formation 1

Words can be formed by adding a prefix to the beginning or a suffix to the end.
There are many prefixes and suffixes are included in this unit and in Vocabulary 3.
Examples of prefixes: un-, dis-, im-, mis-
un- + certain uncertain dis- + appear disappear
im- + possible impossible mis + understand m isunderstand
Examples of suffixes: -ness, -fill, -less, ship
happy + -ness happiness care + -ful careful
end + -less endless friend + -ship friendship
Words of two or more syllables ending in -y change -y to -i. See Grammar 49.

Add a word from the box to the prefix in each sentence to make a negative
word.

advantage agree appear employed fortunately

interesting patient understanding

a) I didn't read all of the book because I found it un

b) Cycling has one dis................................It makes you feel h ot and sweaty.
c) Sue had a ticket for the theatre, but u n ............................. she fell ill that night.
d) Terry can't stand waiting in queues, because she's very im ................................
e) My brothers always dis.............................w hen it's tim e to do the washing-up.
f) After Jack lost his job, he was u n ............................. for three m onths.
g) Oh, I com pletely dis............................. with you. I think it was a great film.
h) Because of a m is............................., half the class went to the wrong classroom.

2 Complete the word in each sentence with a prefix from the box.

out- over- under- re-

a) My alarm clock didn't go off, and so I slept this m orning.

b) Pete packed some shirts and socks, s o m e ................... wear, and his jeans.
c) It's very cold this m orning, so wear y o u r ................... coat.
d) Our team was c o m p letely ................... played by the team from Wales.
e) I've decided t o ...................write my letter, because I made too m any mistakes.
f) S te v e ................... cooked the meat, and it was burnt in places.
g) I have to go to the library today a n d ................... new my ticket.
h) The staff went on strike because they w e r e ...................paid and overworked.

215
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Complete the word in each sentence with a suffix from the box. Make any other
necessary changes to the word.

-er -let -ess -hood -ship -ful -ery

a) After two years of friend.... fh-ll?..... , Kate got to know David really well.
b) If you don't speak the language you feel more like a foreign.....................
c) Sarah spent a very happy ch ild ...................on a small island.
d) I asked a steward................... what tim e the plane arrived, but she didn't know.
e) Every teenage...................knows that parents worry a lot.
f) D on't forget to add a spoon................... of sugar, and some milk.
g) We live in a beautiful neighbour...................on the outskirts of the city.
h) Tina picked up a h an d ...................of snow, and threw it in my face.
i) Under the floor there was a rumbling sound of m achine.....................
j) The college sent Sue a small book....................describing its courses.

4 Complete each sentence with a noun made from the verb given.

a) There are over one m illion . . . k V \ t S ........... j n this city.

inhabit
b) Greg often suffers f r o m ............................................ in the school holidays.
bore
c) This is the ta lle s t............................................ in the whole of the country.
build
d) Some students can't find su ita b le ...............................................
accommodate
e) I was upset by C a ro l's............................................ to help me.
refuse
f) It took Richard years to becom e a su ccessfu l..............................................
act
g) E v ery ............................................ in this com pany has received a pay rise.
employ
h) You need a lot o f ............................................ to write a good story.
imagine
i) D on't forget to turn off t h e ............................................ before you leave.
cook
j) I saw an in terestin g ............................................ in the local paper.
advertise

216
 VO CA BU LA R Y 2 WORD FORMATION 1

5 Complete each sentence with a noun ending in -ness made from a word in the
box. Make any necessary changes.

dark friendly happy lonely short sick

silly thin tired thorough

a) The of the journey surprised me, as I thought it would be

longer.
b) Sue was impressed by t h e ......................... of everyone in her new school.
c) We knew it was going to rain because of t h e ......................... of the sky.
d) Old Mrs H o lt's ......................... was cured when she was given a pet cat.
e) The doctor told Peter that h i s ......................... was a result of overwork.
f) Wendy's teacher was impressed by t h e ......................... of her work.
g) We wished the bride and g ro o m ......................... in their new life together.
h) Joe's teachers began to grow tired of h i s ......................... in class.
i) I felt rather cold when I arrived because of t h e ......................... of my clothes.
j) Jean took a tra v e l......................... pill, and then she felt m uch better.

6 Complete the word in each sentence with a suffix from the box.

-less -ly -y -ish -ie -al -ous

a) Everyone thanked the fire-fighters for their hero/-.<r.........efforts.

b) Paul received most of his m usic.............education from his mother.
c) The government is going to provide more houses for h om e.............people.
d) Lisa's m other.............qualities made her a favourite with the children.
e) This road is extremely danger.............when the weather is bad.
f) It was very fool.............of you to leave all the doors and windows open.
g) On rain.............days, we spend a lot of tim e indoors w atching television.

217
 VOCABULARY

3 Word formation 2

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) By 11.00 I felt so tired/tiring that I went to bed.

b) I heard the film was good, but it was very disappointed/disappointing.
c) Being alone in an old house at night can be frightened/frightening.
d) Julie was so embarrassed/embarrassing that her whole face turned red.
e) Jim gets bored/boring if he has to study too much.
f) It's very confused/confusing to be taught in so m any classrooms.
g) Andy said that the twenty-mile walk was exhausted/exhausting.
h) Are you interested/interesting in going to the beach tomorrow?
i) I was really surprised/surprising when my boss gave me the day off.
j) W hy don't you go away and stop being so annoyed/annoying !

2 Complete the word in italics in each sentence with a prefix or suffix from the box.
Make any other necessary changes to the word.

-age dis- -ful im- un- -y -ness

a) I suppose Paul m ight help us, but it seems likely. .....

b) Fred can 't fill his pool because there's a water short. ..........................
c) I found m ost of the m aths questions com pletely possible. ..........................
d) Jan has taken up photograph as a hobby. ..........................
e) Thanks for those notes. They were really use. ..........................
f) I like winter sports so I never go skiing. ..........................
g) W hen it's tim e for bed I start feeling sleep. ..........................
h) This is a really usual stamp. I've not seen one like it before.................................
i) I really like Dan. He's always so happy and cheer. ..........................
j) I'm writing to thank you for the kind you showed me. ..........................

3 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) It's . . . f ........cold today, considering it's still summer.
usual
b) Actually, I found Tony's book w a s .................................... interesting.
surprise
c) , my father used to go to school with your father.
interest
d) The police m a n a g ed .................................... to find the missing children.
success

218
 V O C A B U L A R Y 3 WORD FORMATION 2

e) Jean's com positions are a lw ay s.....................................written.

beautiful
f) I 'm ............................... ashamed of your behaviour!
thorough
g) This question is ............................. difficult, isn't it!
awful
h) Mike t r ie d .................. ..................to phone Cathy several times.
success
i) These instructions s e e m .....................................com plicated.
necessary
j) Som eone h a d .......... ......................... left the front door open.
obvious

4 Complete each word with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) I can't sit on this chair. It's really u n .-W .W ^ .^ fl? .^ .. .
comfort
b) Ann has left hom e and is in .................................of her parents.
depend
c) These old envelopes are re.................................so we can save money.
use
d) Not being chosen for the team was a great dis...................................
appoint
e) Maria and Louis have a really g o o d .................................ship.
relate
f) Being u n .................................means that you share with others.
self
g) Not taking exercise is rather u n ...................................
health
h) David has a really u n .................................temper, and gets angry easily.
control
i) These trousers w on't get smaller. They're u n ...................................
shrink
j) They didn't give Gary the job as he was in ...................................
experience

219
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) Harry asked for a :Q P.P........... and the cashier gave him one.
receive
b) Nina wants to be a ............................... and join the governm ent.
politics
c) No one knows the e x a c t ............................... of the water here.
deep
d) You have to have a lot o f ............................... to go fishing.
patient
e) is a serious matter, and you have to think about it.
marry
f) Tom sent in h i s ................................for the job the next day.
apply
g) Helen's m ind is filled with all kinds of u n u su a l..................................
know
h) There was n o ............................... for the crash of the airliner.
explain

6 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) The ...t h fr ft . ............... of the diamonds baffled the police.
thief
b) Most people have no real .............................in ghosts.
believe
c) Tina had n o ............................. .. that anything was wrong.
suspect
d) We measured t h e ................... ........... of the room with a ruler.
long
e) Our teacher was re a lly ............................... when she found out.
anger
f) George won a medal for
brave
g) Looking in the mirror too m uch is an example o f ...............................
vain
h) Do you think you have the ................................to pass the test?
able

220
VOCABULARY

4 Collocations and fixed expressions 1

Complete each sentence with a word from the box. Each word is used THREE
times.

do make have take give

a) ...titiVC...... a njce ciayi

b) At the weekend I like to relax and ju s t ......................... nothing.
c) Can I ......................... a chat with you som etim e about Anna?
d) Hello? Is that the doctor's surgery? I'd like t o ......................... an appointm ent.
e) I ' l l ......................... you my answer by the end of the week.
f) I'm going to have an early night to make sure I ......................... a good
perform ance tomorrow.
g) If you have a headache you c a n ......................... an aspirin.
h) Sometimes it's difficult t o ......................... any progress with English.
i) Sorry, I can't com e out tonight, I have t o ......................... my homework.
j) That was a lovely meal. I ' l l ......................... the dishes in a m om ent.
k) We alw ay s......................... a lot of fun when we go clubbing on Fridays.
1) We can't wait any longer. We have t o ......................... action.
m) Would you like me t o ......................... you a lift to the station?
n) You can catch a taxi o r ......................... the bus.
o) You should dress well for your interview t o ......................... a good impression.

2 Match each group of adjectives (a-j) with a noun (1-10).

a) an ambitious/a clever/a three-point 1 sofa

b) a sudden/a violent/a loud 2 sister
c) a powerful/a notebook/a desktop 3 control
d) a comfortable/a three-seater/a leather 4 plan
e) a neat/a suspicious/a software 5 computer
f) complete/strict/quality 6 im provem ent
g) a considerable/a dramatic/a short-term 7 rent
h) a serious/a deadly/an infectious 8 explosion
i) an elder/a much-loved/an unmarried 9 disease
j) monthly/affordable/unpaid 10 package

221
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete each sentence with a verb from list A and a noun from list B.

A appear clear control fight protect rent return take

B behaviour call flat m inute screen ste» space survival

a) You should use suntan lotion when you go to the beach to ....?.'f.^^f:P.....
y o u r ..... ......................
b) I need t o ......................... a ........................... on my desk for my new computer.
c) I hate it when I'm using m y com puter and error m essages.........................on
t h e ............................
d) I left a message on her answering m achine but she d id n 't.........................my

e) It's going to be expensive to live in London. I'll have t o .........................a

......................... and pay for all my food.
f) Belgium are losing by two goals to nil against Brazil. Now they have to really
......................... f o r ..............................
g) Could you give me a hand? It will o n ly ......................... a .............................
h) The problem with m odern society is that parents d o n 't .........................the
......................... of their children.

4 In each sentence one of the adverbs in italics does NOT make a common
collocation with the verb in bold. Cross out the wrong collocation.

a) 'I'm back,' she said especially/simply/calmly.

b) I particularly/strongly/properly dislike restaurants where the waiters are rude.
c) The governm ent acted firmly/completely/immediately against the threat of
terrorism.
d) She spoke briefly/greatly/warmly about her grandmother.
e) He went to the police and confessed his crime openly/really/voluntarily.
f) The price of oil rose highly/sharply/dramatically last m onth.
g) The sun was shining brightly/directly/perfectly onto the old town square.
h) Ronaldo was deliberately/largely/suddenly pushed in the penalty area.
i) He held the rope and pulled deeply/hard/gently.
j) He always spends his m oney strongly/carefully/wisely.

222
 VOCABULARY 4 C O LLO C A TIO N S AND FIXED EXPRESSIONS 1

5 Complete each sentence with one noun from list A and one noun from list B.

A bank bargain meat sea space stomach student

B account ache dish floor loan price shuttle

a) I can't spend m uch m oney this weekend. My is in the

red.
b) Only forty euros for a top-name sports shoe! That's a r e a l.........................................
c) They say that in the future we'll be able to go to the m oon for our holidays
b y ........................................
d) There's a lot of volcanic activity on t h e ......................................that we don't
norm ally see.
e) I'll need to get a ......................................from the bank to help me com plete my
university studies.
f) I went to Sandra's house last night and she made us all a lo v e ly ..................

g) I think I'm going to go hom e now. I've got a bit of a .........................................

6 Complete each sentence with a verb phrase from the box.

afford to designed to forget to hard to hope to likely to

slow to teach me how to try not to willing to

a) D on't break it. I c a n 't ........f ............ buy a new one.

b) The weather is changing. It's getting m uch colder and we're
......................................... have snow tomorrow.
c) I'd love some more chocolate cake. I t 's ..........................................resist.
d) W hat do y o u ......................................... gain by your actions?
e) It's the first tim e I've tried ice-skating. P le a se ..........................................laugh!
f) Can y o u ..........................................play chess as well as you?
g) The governm ent w a s ..........................................react to the threat of war.
h) D o n 't ......................................... ask him about his mother. She's been ill recently.
i) These exercises a r e ..........................................strengthen your stom ach muscles.
j) She's a great music teacher - s h e 's ..........................................share her love of
Mozart with us all.

223
VOCABULARY |

Collocations and fixed expressions 2 I

Complete the expression based on the word time in each sentence, using a word
from the box.

high in lose on pass spare tell time

a) Com e on Joh n ! It's ...h:l0.h: ...... ... tim e you started doing some work!
b) W hat do you m ost enjoy doing in y o u r ......................... tim e?
c) I don't go sailing often, but I enjoy doing it from tim e t o ...........................
d) W hen I have to wait at the airport, I do a crossword t o .........................the
tim e.
e) W hen Carol was given her first watch, she learned t o .........................the time.
f) Sally is never late. She's alw ay s......................... tim e for her lessons.
g) Thank goodness the doctor hurried. She saved Jim 's life ju s t .........................
time.
h) Hurry up. We've no tim e t o ............................The train leaves in five minutes!

Complete the sentences with the most suitable verb from the box.

burst caught got had lost made paid spent told took

a) Peter's father ....WM-dc ........lots of m oney by selling old cars.

b) S o p h ie ......................... a party last week and most of her friends came.
c) I ......................... some very good photos of our dog with my new camera.
d) D a v e ......................... a lot of m oney on rebuilding his motorbike.
e) The ending of the film was so sad that m any p e o p le .........................into tears.
f) According to the story, George W ashington alw ay s......................... the truth.
g) K e lly ......................... into trouble at school for playing a joke on her teacher.
h) You didn't understand because y o u ......................... no attention to the
instructions.
i) I ......................... a cold last week so I couldn't play in the football match.
j) W e ......................... our way com pletely and had to ask for directions.
 VOCABULARY 5 CO LLO C A TIO N S AND FIXED EXPRESSIONS 2

Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

alone breath difference leaf mad mess secret temper

a) I made a com plete .........of one exam, and had to take it again.
b) W hen I swim underwater I can hold m y ......................... for two m inutes.
c) Peter told the boy to leave his little b r o th e r ............................
d) Can you tell t h e ......................... between butter and margarine?
e) The loud music from the house next door drove M a ry ............................
f) W hen I stepped on Helen's foot again, she tried not to lose h e r ...................
g) I'll tell you, but only because I know that you can keep a ............................
h) Bob wanted to change his ways and turn over a n e w ............................

The words in italics are in the wrong sentences. Find the correct sentence for
each one.

a) Now that my summer holidays have begun I feel as free as houses.

....a .b i r d

b) W ithout my glasses I'm as blind as a p ig ....................................

c) After our search, suddenly David turned up as large as rainl ......................
d) As cool as a bat, the robber asked for all the m oney in the bank!

e) Our dog eats too much, and is getting as fat as a picture ...............
f) Little Sarah looked as pretty as a cucumber in her new dress...........
g) Take this medicine, and in a few days you'll be as right as life. ..
h) D on't be frightened of being on this plane. It's as safe as a bird.

Complete the expressions in italics in each sentence with a word from the box.

down round soul sound then time wide

a) It's extrem ely im portant. In fact, it's a matter o f ... ...... m ..... .. and death.
b) Ann is great fun, and is always the life a n d ......................... o f the party.
c) The police have been searching far a n d ......................... for the stolen jewels.
d) We were com pletely lost, and drove round a n d ......................... for hours.
e) I've told y o u ......................... and again not to write tests in pencil!
f) The two m issing explorers have been found safe a n d ............................
g) That m an has been walking up a n d ......................... outside the house all day.
h) I don't see Paul very often, but I visit him now a n d ............................
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Replace each phrase in italics with one of the expressions in the box.

get ready have an early night have fun have nothing to do

take a day off take it easy

a) I'm really tired. I'm going to go to bed before it gets late.

have m d y n i g h t ....................
b) I think we should prepare ourselves for the trip as early as we can.

c) I felt ill last Tuesday, so I decided to stay at home and not go to work.

d) Let's go out tonight and enjoy ourselves.

e) I don't have any work this evening, so we can go to the cinema.

f) I've been working very hard, so I'm going to relax and have some rest.

226
VOCABULARY

Compound words

Complete each compound word with a word from the box.

ache clip cut glasses lace path post table

a) Make sure you walk on the foot p eitk ... , because the road is dangerous.
b) I need to fix these two sheets together. Have you got a p a p e r......................... ?
c) As I was doing up my shoe, my shoe......................... broke.
d) On our first day at school, we copied down our tim e............................
e) Tom had a hair......................... yesterday and his friends made fun of him .
f) It's really sunny today, and I've forgotten my sun............................
g) Could I have a couple of aspirins? I've got a terrible head............................
h) The bus swerved to avoid a dog and hit a la m p ............................

Complete each sentence with a compound noun made from two words from
the box.

air alarm birthday central clock conditioning fiction heating

machine party report school science stick walking washing

a) I love . . . S C W U : .......................................... films with robots in them .

b) Old Mr Low has a bad leg and always leans on h i s ................................

c) David's teachers wrote lots of good things in his

d) As soon as t h e ........................................................................rings, I jump out of bed.

e) W hen it's hot, I turn on t h e ............................... -................................ and it cools
the room.
f) Julia invited all her friends from school to h e r .............................................................
g) This house h a s ..................................................................and there is a radiator in
every room.
h) If you have any dirty clothes, just put them in t h e ......................................
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 The compound nouns in italics are in the wrong sentences. Find the correct
sentence for each one.

a) I couldn't unscrew the pocket money, so I couldn't drink my cola.

...bottle top...................................
b) On my way to school, I saw a fantastic bike in a bathroom mirror.

c) My bike had a flat tyre, and I didn't have my television screen with me.

d) As the girls were leaving, they saw their teacher at the bottle top.

e) W hen I saw my face in the school entrance, I knew I really was ill.

f) During m y favourite serial, a newsflash appeared on the door handle.

g) Paul's parents gave him a small am ount of bicycle pum p every week.

h) Susie was too small to reach the shop window, so she knocked.

4 Match each situation with an object from the box.

bottle opener coffee maker dishwasher fire extinguisher food mixer

hairdrier lawn mower pencil sharpener stain remover water heater

a) Comb it first and then use this. .............. h& W dxi& T............
b) Just put all the dirty plates in here. ...............................................
c) I've dropped ink all over my white trousers. ...............................................
d) Use this in an emergency. ...............................................
e) I've just broken m ine, and I can 't write. ...............................................
f) I'm really thirsty but I can 't open this lem onade........................................................
g) That grass really needs cutting. ...............................................
h) It's m uch quicker preparing a cake with this. ...............................................
i) If you need a bath, I'll turn it on. ...............................................
j) If you'd like a cup, I've just put it on. ...............................................

228
 VOCABULARY 6 COMPOUND WORDS

5 Make a compound word which describes the person in each sentence, using one
of the words in italics, and a word from the box.

bather dreamer fighter keeper lifter maker manager sitter

a) Som eone who spends all day lost in pleasant thoughts.

b) Som eone who owns or runs a shop. ......................................
c) Som eone who is lying in the sun to get a tan. ......................................
d) Som eone who looks after a baby while you're out. ......................................
e) Som eone who exercises with objects of great weight. ......................................
f) Som eone who is a m em ber of the fire brigade. ......................................
g) Som eone who is in charge of the branch of a bank. ......................................
h) Som eone who is away from hom e on holiday. ......................................

6 Complete each compound word with a word from the box.

about bringing coat com e doors

ground pour set skirts stairs

a) Jan e has a high in ..£ d W £ .......... , but she works very hard to earn it.
b) I'm sorry I said that. I hope you're n ot up............................
c) You have to turn left at the next round............................
d) Kevin fell down......................... and hurt his ankle.
e) It's cold today, so you'd better wear your over............................
f) That child is so polite. She obviously had a good up............................
g) It's a lovely day. W hy don't we have lunch ou t......................... ?
h) They live in a small house on the ou t......................... of the town.
i) It's easy to travel in London if you use the Under............................
j) On our way hom e we got soaked in a terrific down............................
 la i

VOCABULARY

7 Money and shopping

Replace the words in italics with one of the phrases from the box.

in a sale pay you back save up in debt second-hand

be well-off annual incom e can't afford it

a) Kate's car was owned by someone else before her.

b) We're not going on holiday this year, because we are short o f money.

c) D on't worry, next week I'll give you the money you lent me.

d) We decided to p ut money aside so we could buy a small boat.

e) I don't want to end up owing a lot o f money to the bank.

f) W hat exactly is the am ount of your earnings every year?

g) I bought m y DVD-player when the prices were reduced.

h) Mary used to havtf a lot o f money, but she's quite poor now.

2 Complete the sentence with a compound noun formed from two words in the
box. One word is used twice. Some compounds are written as one word.

assistant bag book carrier card cash credit cut

department desk m on ey pocket price shop store

a) Most parents give their children s o m e ...... P.9 . ..W^.YS&/..... to spend.

b) Perhaps you left your wallet at t h e ............................................when you paid.
c) Jan e buys all her CDs cheap in a/ an ............................................store.
d) I bought the new novel by Richard Francis in my lo c a l......................................
e) You can buy nearly anything in a b i g ..............................................
f) T h e ............................................ who served me helped me buy what I wanted.
g) W hen I go abroad I always take a ............................................with me.
h) I brought my shopping hom e in a s tro n g ..............................................

230
 V O C A B U L A R Y 7 MONEY AND SHOPPING

3 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) Dora earns/gains/wins more m oney in her job than I do.

b) The factory workers asked for a rise in their income/reward/wages.
c) Paul borrowed/lent/loaned some m oney from me but didn't pay it back.
d) I'm sorry, but we don't accept credit cards, only cash/coins/money.
e) Is it all right if I pay with cheque/by cheque/from cheque ?
f) We don't exchange goods unless you still have the bill/cheque/receipt.
g) I'm afraid I've only got a £ 5 0 note. Do you have change/money/restl
h) I still debt/owe/own the bank more than £5000.

4 Complete the shopping situations (a-h) with a remark (1-8).

a) I can't decide whether to buy it or not, so I think

b) Have you got a pair like this in r e d ? .............
c) Can I pay by cred it-card ?.............
d) Can I help you? No thanks, .............
e) That's £45, please...............
f) Thanks very m uch for your h elp ...............
g) There isn't a price label on this shirt...............
h) This com puter looks difficult to use...............

1 Not at all, madam. It's a pleasure.

2 I'm just looking.
3 Could you explain how it works?
4 How would you like to pay?
5 We're out of stock at the m om ent. Sorry.
6 I'll leave it.
7 Sorry, we only accept cash or cheques.
8 How m uch is it?

5 Complete each phrase with a suitable word from the box.

bar box bunch carton loaf packet tin tube

a) a ..... of biscuits
b) a ......................... of toothpaste
c) a ......................... of tom atoes
d) a ......................... of milk
e) a la r g e ......................... of tissues
f) a ......................... of chocolate
g) a ......................... of bananas
h) a ......................... of bread

231
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Shopping in the street

W hen I (1) shopping, I enjoy visiting street ( 2 ) .............and looking for
(3) ............... I wander around looking at each (4) ..............., and asking about
( 5 ) ............... Many ( 6 ) ...............on sale are less ( 7 ) .............. than those in high-street
shops, though the ( 8 ) .............is not always as good. It also depends on how
m uch you want to ( 9 ) ............... Clothes are often ( 1 0 ) .............. , but it is difficult
to ( 1 1 ) .............them on. It's always ( 1 2 ) .............. looking at second-hand books,
because you can ( 1 3 ) .............a lot of m oney in this way. Fresh fruit and
vegetables are usually good ( 1 4 ) ............., and there is always an excellent
selection. The m ain problem is whether you can carry hom e lots of ( 1 5 ) ............
bags!

1) A like B make C go D do
2) A markets B trades C shops D sales
3) A values B cheaper C special D bargains
4) A counter B table C stall D department
5) A costs B prices C values D figures
6) A produces B shopkeepers C offers D goods
7) A expensive B cost C priced D cheaper
8) A expense B package C kind D quality
9) A spend B use C make D cash
10) A fashion B cheaper C worn D logical
11) A purchase B carry C try D wrap
12) A worth B more C been D time
13) A borrow B spend C save D count
14) A health B value C tim e D taste
15) A hand B papers C more D heavy

232
 . 3 'iff iibMffii Je
VOCABULARY

8
■l!

Living space

Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

carpet curtains cushion drawer pillow radiator sofa socket

a) Is that chair com fortable, or would you like to use a ?

b) Mark couldn't use his com puter as there wasn't a ......................... in the room.
c) This house has central heating, and there's a ......................... in every room.
d) I was so tired that I fell asleep as soon as my head touched t h e ............................
e) Could you draw t h e ......................... ? Som eone is staring through the window.
f) My bedroom has a f it t e d ......................... which covers the whole floor.
g) The knives and forks are in the s e c o n d ......................... on the left.
h) Come over here and sit next to me on t h e ............................

2 Complete each part sentence (a-h) with one of the endings (1-8).

a) Please sit down and make yourself

b) Many of our language students s h a r e .............
c) I like Do-It-Yourself, but I've decided to h a v e .............
d) Alan seems to have so m any clothes that he can never f i n d .............
e) If you can't find the house you can always ask f o r .............
f) Susan lives on the tenth floor o f .............
g) If you're short of m oney you can b u y .............
h) As we live in a semi-detached house, we h e a r .............

1 room for all of them in the wardrobe.

2 a block of flats on the south side of the city.
3 directions at the bus-station.
4 at home, while I make some tea.
5 accom m odation in the villages nearby.
6 the decorating done by a local firm.
7 a lot of noise through the wall from the family next door.
8 furniture from the street market near the cathedral.

233
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Each sentence contains an inappropriate word or phrase. Underline this word,

and then replace it with a word or phrase from the box.

bookcase chim ney fence floor gate window step towel

a) Unfortunately the ball h it the house and broke a glass.

iViWdW
b) I washed my hands in the bathroom and dried them with a cloth.

c) There was a small wooden door leading into the field.

d) As I sat down at the kitchen table, I knocked my cup onto the ground.

e) In the corner of Joe's room was a small library for his books.

f) All round the garden there was a high wooden wall.

g) On the roof-tops Tina could see a tall fireplace pouring out smoke.

h) The floor of the kitchen is a bit lower, so mind the stair.

4 Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) W ill you be at hom e/at house later this evening?

b) Paul's room is at the top of the stairs/steps opposite the bathroom .
c) Can you remember to clean the wash-basin/sink in the bathroom ?
d) The rooms downstairs are so low I can touch the roof/ceiling.
e) Tony is a keen cooker/cook and always uses an electric cooker/cook.
f) You'll find plates in the cupboard/wardrobe next to the fridge.
g) Ann was sitting at/to her desk, but Chris was sitting in/on an armchair.
h) I w on't be long. I'm just going upstairs for a bath/a bathe.
i) Lisa didn't like doing homework/housework, so she paid a cleaner.
j) Under the house there's a cave/cellar where we keep our old things.

234
 VOCABULARY 8 LIVING SPACE

5 Complete the sentences with a compound word formed from two words in the
box. One word is used twice.

arm ash basin bin book case chair dish down

dust flower hole key room stairs tray wash washer

a) It's very cold in my ...k.edrOOyyt ..... .. ancj i find it hard to sleep.

b) Sarah spent all afternoon sitting in a la rg e .............................. in front of the TV.
c) I left my socks soaking in t h e .............................. in the bathroom .
d) Do you think you could put all your rubbish outside in t h e .............................. ?
e) There's a b e a u tifu l.............................. full of roses right outside my window.
f) D on't worry about the washing-up. W e'll put everything in the

g) I can't open the front door. Som ething is stuck in t h e .................................

h) If you really insist on smoking, please use t h i s .................................
i) Can you c o m e .............................. ? There's som eone at the door for you.
j) In t h i s .............................. are the dictionaries and an encyclopedia.

6 Complete each sentence with a verb from the box in a suitable form. You can use
a verb more than once.

drop finish get look move take turn

a) I've got nowhere to stay tonight. Can y o u ...... P.Qp............me up?

b) We've bought a new house but we c a n 't ......................... in until next m onth.
c) Adrian d o e s n 't......................... on with his neighbours, because they're so
noisy.
d) Jan likes cooking, but she says i t ......................... up a lot of her time.
e) D on't forget t o ......................... off the television before you go to bed.
f) Helen has done most of the decorating and plans t o ......................... it off
tomorrow.
g) I have a large room, and i t ......................... out onto a beautiful garden.
h) Karen and Mike live next door and they o f t e n ......................... in for a chat.

235
 VOCABULARY

9 Personal matters

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) W hen her bicycle was stolen, Jill becam e extrem ely angry/nervous.
b) Peter felt ashamed/embarrassed when he had to make a speech.
c) I always write thank-you letters, just to be gentle/polite.
d) You never do anything to help me! You're so lazy/tired.
e) Penny never does anything silly. She's very sensible/sensitive.
f) The children had to stay in the house all day and felt bored/tired.
g) Jackie doesn't worry about anything and is always cheerful/sympathetic.
h) Mr Jackson is very annoyed/bad-tempered and often shouts at people.
i) W hen he heard about the accident, Alan was very damaged/upset.
j) I've got an im portant exam tomorrow and I'm a bit jealous/nervous.

2 Complete each sentence with one of the verbs from the box. Use each verb once
only.

cheer com plain cry nod shake his head shout smile whistle

a) Please look at the camera and .................... Say 'cheese'!

b) If you agree with what I say, ju s t ......................................
c) The food in the restaurant was terrible so we decided t o .....................................
d) I had t o ................................... Ann's name three times before she heard me.
e) The little boy fell over and then started t o ......................................
f) At the end of the President's speech, the crowd began t o .....................................
g) Paul hardly ever says 'n o '. He tends t o ................................... instead.
h) W hen I try t o ................................... I put my lips together but I can't do it!

3 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in italics.

a) You can't rely on Joe. He's very ....Q W & L w b lc ...........

b) Carla has very little patience. She's v e r y ........................................
c) Jack shows no interest in this subject. H e 's ........................................
d) Pat is lacking in honesty. S h e 's ........................................
e) Bill doesn't act like a friend. H e 's ........................................
f) Lisa doesn't have m uch experience of this work. S h e 's ........................................
g) Peter never acts politely. H e 's ........................................
h) The official did n ot help us very m uch. She w a s ........................................
i) Graham doesn't consider other people. H e 's........................................
j) Ann refused to co-operate with the police. She w a s ........................................

236
 VO CA BU LARY 9 PERSONAL MATTERS

4 Complete each sentence with an adjective from the box. Use each adjective once
only.

ashamed annoyed disappointed exhausted

fascinating glad jealous terrified

a) W hen her team lost the cup final, Sue felt very .
b) I w a s .................................when Jack accepted my invitation to dinner but
didn't come.
c) Mark w a s .................................when he saw smoke com ing from the plane's
engine.
d) Thanks for your letter. I 'm .................................to hear that you're feeling better.
e) David w a s .................................to tell his parents that he had been sent to prison.
f) After running for fifteen kilometres, Zara felt co m p letely ...................................
g) Helen f e l t .................................when she saw her boyfriend talking to another
girl.
h) Mrs Hobson told us about her life. She's a .................................person.

5 Replace the words in italics in each sentence with one of the phrases from the
box.

are fond of fancy fed up with get on my nerves

give up let me down longing for put me off

a) I'm really looking forward to a few weeks' holiday!

.'.longing.for
b) Sarah has decided to do without eating chocolate.

c) I wanted to study biology, but my teacher discouraged me.

d) Sports programmes on television really annoy me.

e) Do you feel like going to the cinem a this evening?

f) W hy can't you tell the truth? I'm tired o f your excuses!

g) Terry and I like going for walks in the country.

h) George agreed to help me, but then disappointed me.

237
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

conscience death hand heart mood

tears temper thanks trouble voice

a) The children were happy because their teacher was in a good ...M fid d . ..........
b) to Mr Dawson, our car was repaired in tim e for our holiday.
c) Ruth was helpful, and went to a lot o f ......................... to make us comfortable.
d) Harry was leaning out of the window and shouting at the top of his

e) W hen Alice heard the bad news, she burst i n t o ............................

f) Neil is a very kind person. H is ......................... is in the right place.
g) If you do som ething bad, it will be on y o u r ......................... for a long time.
h) I was really angry, and lost m y ......................... , and shouted at people.
i) We need some help. Could you give us a ......................... ?
j) The first tim e I saw a horror film, I was scared t o ............................

7 Match positive and negative words and put them in the columns below.

cheerful clever lazy tense fe d generous mean

miserable relaxed stupid hard-working unpleasant

Positive Negative

. . . k i n d .........................

238
V O CA BU LA RY

10 Family and friends

Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

alike children couple elder engaged friendship

housewife husband single twin

a) Jan e got married to her , Bob, four years ago.

b) Jane's friends think that she and Bob are the p e r fe c t............................
c) They haven't got a n y ......................... yet, but they want a large family.
d) J a n e 's ......................... sister, Mary, was born half an hour before she was.
e) Jan e and Mary lo o k ......................... but are n ot exactly the same.
f) Mary isn't married. She says she prefers to b e ............................
g) She says she believes i n ......................... , but doesn't believe in marriage.
h) Diana is Jan e and M a ry 's......................... sister. She calls them her 'little sisters'.
i) Diana has b e e n ......................... for three years, but hasn't got married yet.
j) She has a career and doesn't like the idea of being a ............................

2 Complete each sentence with a noun formed from a verb in the box.

acquaint celebrate die engage greet marry relate resemble

a) All Sue's friends and . . . c a me to her party.

b) I occasionally m eet Terry, but he's more a n ....................................................than a
friend.
c) W hen Paul arrived, he received a warm and frien d ly ...................................................
d) Six m onths after t h e ir ...................................................., M ichael and Lisa got
married.
e) There was a g r e a t....................................................in the village when their team
won the cup.
f) In an id e a l...................................................., husband and wife share each other's
problems.
g) Dina and her m other look alike. There is a stro n g ....................................................
between them.
h) Tim cried when he heard about t h e ....................................................of his old dog.

239
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Children are not allowed to see this film. It's for adults/old only.
b) By the tim e the vet arrived, the injured cat was already dead/died.
c) U nfortunately it rained on Nick and Helen's wedding/marriage day.
d) David and Diana have two sons and one daughter/girl.
e) I think we should try to understand the problems of aged/old people.
f) There should be more facilities for youth/young people in this town.
g) More than fifty relatives/parents were invited to Jack's party.
h) It's my anniversary/birthday today. I'm eighteen years old.

4 Complete each part sentence (a-j) with an ending (1-10).

a) I ve started g o in g -------- 1 takes after his father.

b) W hen little Tina is grown \ 2 together again next Friday evening?
c) I wonder if you could put \ 3 up by an aunt after their parents died.
d) Carol doesn't really get \ 4 in on Steve for a chat.
e) Everyone says that Tom \ 5 after my dog while I'm away?
f) Let's have some friends ^ 6 out with George's younger sister.
g) Do you think you could look 7 round for dinner on Friday.
h) W hy don't we all get 8 on well with her mother-in-law.
i) Ellen and Laura were brought 9 up she wants to be an astronaut.
i) If I have tim e I'll drop 10 us up for a few days next week?

5 Match each sentence (a-h) with a sentence (1-8) which helps to explain the
meaning of the word in italics.

a) We've got a new neighbour called Helen W illis...... rL...

b) This is Sue. She's a colleague of m in e...............
c) Andrew is going to be our best m an ...............
d) At the end of the evening I thanked our host ...............
e) I'm sure that Mary will be a wonderful bride ...............
f) Next week I'm going to stay with my grandparents ...............
g) I've always got on well with my sister-in-law ...............
h) Georgina is the ideal guest ...............

1 I was happy that he'd invited me to his party.

2 Even before she married my brother we'd becom e good friends.
3 She always offers to help in the house when she stays with us.
4 We both work in the same departm ent at the bank.
5 She moved into the house next door yesterday.
6 They're both in their seventies, but they live a very full life.
7 W hen Jo h n and I get married, h e'll stand next to Joh n .
8 She's a dressmaker, and has designed her own wedding dress.

240
 V O C A B U L A R Y 10 FAMILY AND FRIENDS

6 Complete each sentence with a word or phrase from the box. Use each word or
phrase once only.

after against away on on and off out over

a) It would be nice to m eet again. I'll get ...PXk............... touch with you next
week.
b) I'm afraid Sonia isn't here. She w e n t ......................... for the weekend.
c) I keep leaving and com ing back. I've lived h e r e ......................... for several
years.
d) M atthew brought up the c h ild re n ......................... his own after his wife died.
e) The baby was called C la r e ,......................... its grandmother.
f) Peter i s ......................... at the m om ent but h e'll be back in half an hour.
g) Ann decided to get m a rrie d ......................... the wishes of her parents.
h) After their final quarrel, Carrie told Luke their relationship w a s ........................

7 Who are these people?

a) your m others' parents ...S™\Y\dpartnts.

b) your m other's brother
c) your m other's sister
d) your husband's son from a previous marriage
e) the sister of the person you marry
f) your brother's (or sister's) male child
g) your brother's (or sister's) female child
h) a child with no brothers and sisters
i) someone from another country
j) someone you have not m et before

241
 V O CA BU LA R Y

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) The trousers are the right length, but the stomach/waist is too small.
b) I like this watch, but the strap is too small for m y palm/wrist.
c) The hand has four fingers and a thumb/toe.
d) W hen Robert is nervous he tends to bite his nails/joints.
e) This bag has a strap and I can carry it on my neck/shoulder.
f) Gina twisted her ankle/elbow and she can't walk very easily.
g) Paul dropped the stone on his foot and broke two toes/fingers.
h) W hen you're worried lines appear on your eyebrows/forehead.

2 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Clothes
C hoosing clothes can be difficult. Some people want to be (1) ....Q .... , but they
d on't want to look exactly ( 2 ) .............everybody else. Not all clothes are
( 3 ) .............for work or school, perhaps because they're not ( 4 ) .............. enough,
or simply n ot ( 5 ) ............... It is easy to buy the ( 6 ) .............. size, and find that
your trousers are too ( 7 ) ............., especially if you're a little bit ( 8 ) .................Very
( 9 ) .............clothes make you feel ( 1 0 ) ..............., but when they have ( 1 1 ) ..............
in the washing m achine, then you have the same problem! If you buy light
( 1 2 ) .............clothes, then they m ight n ot be ( 1 3 ) ...............enough for winter. If
your shoes are not ( 1 4 ) ............., and if you aren't ( 1 5 ) ...............for the cold, you
m ight look good, but feel terrible!

1) A of fashion B fashioned C fashionable D fashion

2) A alike B like C similar D same
3) A fitted B suitable C com fort D equal
4) A formal B strict C uniform D suited
5) A com forting B com fort C comforted D com fortable
6) A false B mistake C wrong D error
7) A straight B close C stiff D tight
8) A slim B overweight C thin D enormous
9) A loose B lose C loosened D lost
10) A thin B slim C narrow D spare
11) A lessened B reduced C decreased D shrunk
12) A of cotton B in cotton C cotton D cottoned
13) A warm B cold C hot D cool
14) A tight B enclosed C firm D waterproof
15) A worn B clothed C dressed D fitted

242
 V O C A B U L A R Y 11 THE BODY AND CL OTHES

3 Complete each sentence with a verb from the box. Use each verb once only.

disguise dress up frfc go with look put on suit wear

a) This dress doesn't ..............me. It's far too big.

b) The children decided t o ......................... as astronauts for the party.
c) Sue always seems t o ......................... trousers. She says they're more
com fortable.
d) I like your new haircut. It makes y o u ......................... younger.
e) It's a nice pullover, but the colour d o e s n 't......................... you.
f) The escaped prisoner managed t o ......................... him self as a policem an.
g) I got up late and had only a few m inutes t o ......................... my clothes.
h) I don't think that yellow s o c k s ......................... a black suit.

4 Match the words from the box with the definitions.

blouse cap dress shorts skirt sleeve sock suit

a) part of an item of clothing for covering the arm

'.jl& tV t......
b) woman's or girl's clothing that covers the body from shoulders to knee or
below

c) jacket together with trousers or skirt made from the same material

d) a soft covering for the head worn by young people, and in some sports

e) trousers that end above or at the knee

f) item of clothing for wom en or girls that hangs from the waist and covers all
or part of the legs

g) item of clothing for wom en or girls covering the upper half of the body

h) soft item of clothing that covers the lower leg and foot inside the shoe

243
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each expression in italics with one of the parts of the body from the
box.

arms eye face foot hair hand head heart leg tongue

a) The word is on the tip o f m y ..... , but I just can't remember it.
b) Crossing the m ountains on my own was a ......................... -raising adventure.
c) I know this is hard to believe, but you must ......................... the truth.
d) It is now over thirty years since m an first s e t ......................... on the moon.
e) After his long trip Tom's parents welcomed him with o p e n ............................
f) Peter knows the songs b y ......................... and doesn't need to look at a book.
g) Try to stay calm, and don't lose y o u r ......................... , and everything will be
fine.
h) Have I really won the prize, or are you only pidling m y .........................?
i) Lisa needs some help with her suitcase. Could you give her a .........................?
j) I waved at Ann, hoping to catch h e r ......................... , but she didn't see me.

6 Label the drawing with the words in the box.

ankle bottom chock chest (man)/bust (woman) chin elbow

heel hip knee neck shoulder thigh waist wrist

244
VOCABULARY

12 Everyday problems

Complete each sentence with a verb from the box.

blocked collapsed crashed exploded

flooded injured sank trapped

a) Yesterday a lorry into a bus at the traffic lights.

b) The falling roof t i l e s ......................... several passers-by, though not seriously.
c) The old wooden b u ild in g ......................... in a high wind.
d) A terrorist b o m b ......................... at the railway station last week.
e) The river burst its banks a n d ......................... the town during the night.
f) Rocks and mud from the m o u n ta in ......................... the m ain road yesterday.
g) The storm at s e a ......................... several small fishing boats.
h) The rising w a te r......................... two families in their hom es for six hours.

2 Underline the correct word or phrase in each sentence.

a) The doctor gave Sue a prescription/recipe for some m edicine.
b) Tim's m other used a therm om eter to take his fever/temperature.
c) It took Julie a long tim e to get over/get o ff her illness.
d) The cut on Katrina's leg took a long tim e to cure/heal.
e) I couldn't run because I had a hurt/pain in my leg.
f) I bought these sea-sickness pills from the chemist's/physician's.
g) David was ill with a flu/flu for two weeks.
h) Dick couldn't speak because he had a throat ache/sore throat.

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

ambulance bandage blood hospital

operation patient surgeon ward

a) A long white was wound around my arm.

b) T h is ......................... was built only two years ago, but is already too small.
c) T h e ......................... in the bed next to m ine was a m an with a broken leg.
d) The doctor told Jim that he would have to have a/ an ............................
e) David's bed is in a s m a ll......................... with two others.
f) Joan n a was operated on by the b e s t ......................... in the city.
g) Some people feel faint when they s e e ............................
h) Stephen was hurt in an accident and a passer-by called a/ an ........................

245
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Complete each sentence with a compound noun made from two words from the
box.

air bus car centre city failure hour ja*»

park parking pollution power rush shortage stop
strike ticket traffic train water

a) The roads were crowded and I was stuck in a .......... ]?.!#V........... for
hours.
b) T h e ..................................................... is bad in this city. It's getting hard to
breathe!
c) All the lights went out because there was a .......................................................
d) I left my car in the wrong place and the police gave me a .........................

e) I couldn't use the railway yesterday because there was a

f) I had to pay a fortune to leave my car in a multi-storey

g) I waited at t h e ..................................................... for hours but all the buses were

full.
h) There is always a lot of traffic during t h e .......................................................
i) It doesn't rain a lot here, and at the m om ent there is a .........................

j) The Governm ent has decided to ban all cars from the

5 Match the beginnings of the sentences (a-j) with the endings (1-10).

a) Fire-fighters managed to put 6 1 fire accidentally.

b) After a few m inutes a fire 2 fire to the house deliberately.
c) It was believed that someone set 3 spark from a passing train.
d) Luckily Paul carried a fire 4 into flames.
e) The fire was started by a 5 heat inside the burning car.
f) Metal melted from the intense 6 out the fire after two hours.
g) I could hardly breathe because of the 7 thick cloud of smoke.
h) The old theatre caught 8 -extinguisher in his car.
i) The wooden hut was burnt to 9 a heap of ashes.
i) In seconds the building burst 10 engine arrived at the blaze.

246
 V O C A B U L A R Y 12 EVERYDAY PROBLEMS

Match each sentence (a-h) with a sentence (1-8) which has a similar meaning.

a) They arrived too late to see her...... 3.....

b) They didn't think it was safe...............
c) They asked her to com e next week instead...............
d) They argued with her...............
e) They were injured...............
f) They didn't know where they were going...............
g) They asked someone to tell them the w a y ..............
h) They've cancelled their party...............

1 They asked for directions.

2 They had a row with her.
3 They missed her.
4 They were hurt.
5 They put her off for a week.
6 They felt it was dangerous.
7 Their party is off.
8 They'd lost their way.

Match the beginnings of the sentences (a-i) with the endings (1-9).

a) All the surfaces in the living room are . .. 3 .. .. . 1 back to front.

b) The bathroom d o o r ............................................................. 2 blocked.
c) The sink i s ............................................................................... 3 dusty.
d) The bread h a s .........................................................................4 creased.
e) The cola h a s ............................................................................5 gone flat.
f) You're wearing your p u llo v er.......................................... 6 gone stale.
g) The table cloth i s .................................................................. 7 in a mess.
h) That shirt needs ironing, it's v e r y ..................................8 stained.
i) My life i s .................................................................................. 9 w on't lock.
 VOCABULARY

13 Travel and holidays

Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Holidays
Most people enjoy going (1) ....Q ..... for their holidays, and having the
opportunity to ( 2 ) .............in an interesting city or a seaside ( 3 ) .................If you
speak ( 4 ) .............languages, you can make new friends, and ( 5 ) .............. home
some interesting ( 6 ) .............as presents. But before you can do that, you have to
( 7 ) .............your destination, and that is often a problem! If you fly, then you
may find that your flight has been ( 8 ) ............... ( 9 ) ...............by train can also be
difficult, since trains are often ( 1 0 ) .............in the summer, and you might have
to reserve a ( 1 1 ) .............in advance. W hichever way you ( 1 2 ) .............. , you can
have problems with your (13) ............., and it is often difficult to find good
( 1 4 ) ............... Apart from this, you m ight not be able to afford the ( 1 5 ) .............. !

1) A out B forward C abroad D foreign

2) A remain B pass C spend D stay
3) A resort B post C too D one
4) A strange B stranger C foreigner D foreign
5) A fetch B take C go D get
6) A m emories B souvenirs C memoirs D recollections
7) A reach B arrive C go D travel
8) A waited B reversed C delayed D booked
9) A Journeys B Travels C Voyages D Passes
10) A filling B occupied C overdone D crowded
11) A post B chair C seat D position
12) A voyage B travel C trip D tour
13) A baggages B luggage C goods D sacks
14) A staying B hom es C lod ges D accommodation
15) A fare B fair C far D fur

2 Complete each sentence with a word from the box. Use each word once only,

after down for off in out up

a) The car b r o k e ..... d o rify . ......in the m ountains, and we couldn't find a garage.
b) Jam es had to s e t ......................... at dawn to catch the early train.
c) Sue's bike passed me, and I had to ride fast to c a t c h ......................... with her.
d) I arrived at the airport, c h e c k e d ......................... , and then had some coffee.
e) We were h e a d in g ......................... Paris, but we were not in a hurry to get there.
f) Jill r a n ......................... of m oney after a week, and had to go home.
g) Our next-door neighbours lo o k e d ......................... our dog while we were away.
248
 VOCABULARY IS TRA VE L A ND H O L IDAYS

3 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) They told me to ask at the t .... desk,
inform
b) The plane gathered speed as it roared along t h e .........................................
run
c) T h e ......................................of our plane has been delayed.
depart
d) The plane made a b u m p y ......................................and I felt ill.
land
e) The clerk asked me if I had made a .........................................
reserve
f) I got a seat because of another p assen ger's.........................................
cancel
g) We arrived late at t h e ......................................, and missed the plane.
air
h) We fastened our seatbelts and prepared f o r ........................................
take

4 Complete each part sentence (a-j) with one of the endings (1-10) and make a
compound word.

a) I sent my friend a p o s t ..... 7..... 1 suit with you to the beach.

b) I fastened my s e a t ............. 2 table turned out to be wrong.
c) We stayed on a small c a m p ............. 3 belt, and waited for takeoff.
d) I always forget my g u id e ............. 4 port, you m ust tell the police.
e) D on't forget to take your sw im ....... ..... 5 hiking can be dangerous.
f) If you lose your p a s s ............. 6 side w hen I was little.
g) We stayed in a quiet g u e s t............. 7 card of the town where I stayed.
h) The train t i m e ............. 8 book when I visit old cities.
i) I used to like going to the s e a .......... 9 house down by the river.
i) Nowadays I'm afraid that h i t c h ...... ..... 10 site just outside the town.

249
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) In Greece we visited several ancient/antique temples.

b) W henever Lucy travels by boat she feels seasick/dizzy.
c) Brighton is a popular/touristic seaside town.
d) Holidays in the m ountains are always more relaxed/relaxing.
e) We always eat the local/topical food w hen we're abroad.
f) On m y summer holidays I like getting suntanned/sunburnt.
g) It may n ot be easy to find accom m odation at reasonable/logical prices.
h) After cycling all day, Bill was com pletely exhausted/tired.
i) The owner of the hotel gave us a hospitable/warm welcome,
j) Jack likes spending most of his holiday in the open/plain air.

6 The words in italics are in the wrong sentences. Find the correct sentence for
each one.

a) We spent two weeks in a lovely seaside station.

...reso rt ........
b) Jim stayed the night in a small bed and hostel.

c) Karen was exhausted after her fifteen-m ile holiday.

d) M artin and Carol had a great tim e on their cam ping cards.

e) As it was cheaper, I bought a return stop.

f) We managed to find some petrol at a remote filling village.

g) The bus made an overnight breakfast in a town near the border.

h) The fam ily rented a cottage in a country walk for the summer.

i) If you're a student, you can save m oney by staying in a youth ticket.

j) David never carried cash on holiday He always takes credit resort.

250
VOCABULARY

14 Interests and free time

Underline the most suitable word in each sentence.

a) United managed to beat/win City in the last m inute of the m atch.

b) At the end of the play, everyone in the theatre exploded/applauded.
c) If you want to enter for/sign on the com petition, you'll need a form.
d) The cycling club is doing/holding a m eeting next Thursday.
e) The youth orchestra has acted/performed all over Europe.
f) I'm doing/going fishing next week. Do you want to com e?
g) The final score was 2 -2 , so Rovers drew/equalled the game.
h) David passes/spends an hour every day playing com puter games.
i) Did you enjoy/please yourself at the folk festival?
j) We were late and so we lost/missed the beginning of the film.

2 Match each word from the box with one of the explanations.

athletes audience cast competitors fans

group members spectators team viewers

a) People who watch a sporting performance.

. . . s p t c t a t o r s ....................

b) People who exercise and take part in games of speed and strength.

c) People who support a sport, or a famous person.

d) People who together take part in a sport.

e) People who all belong to the same club.

f) People who play rock music together.

g) People who listen to or watch a play or performance.

h) People who watch television.

i) People who act together in a play.

j) People who are all trying to win the same prize.

251
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

exhibition line medal prize queue

rod screen ticket tyre whistle

a) Helen won first .../?.*r.V££.......... ..... in the com petition.

b) W hen Steve won the race, he was given a g o ld ..................................
c) We had to wait in a ............................... before we could get into the cinema.
d) Rachel had to push her bike after she got a f l a t ..................................
e) There was so m uch shouting that no one heard the referee's.................................
f) I've got a sp a r e ............................... for tomorrow's concert. Do you want to
com e?
g) Have you seen the n e w ............................... of paintings at the National Gallery?
h) I'm going fishing tomorrow. I've just bought a n e w ..................................
i) Kate was the first runner to cross the fin is h in g ..................................
j) We didn't en joy the film because we were too close to t h e .................................

4 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

drop go join knock live make stand turn

a) Lenny 'The Fist' Sm ith, the boxer, said he would ..... out his
opponent.
b) Carol won the m atch because the other player failed t o .........................up.
c) The singer asked the audience t o ......................... in and all sing together.
d) It was a reasonable film, but it didn't re a lly ......................... up to my
expectations.
e) Tom and Sue used t o ......................... out together.
f) From my seat, I c o u ld n 't......................... out what was happening on the stage.
g) The referee made it clear that he would n o t ......................... for bad behaviour.
h) Peter had t o ......................... out of the race after his car broke down.

252
 V O C A B U L A R Y 14 I N T E R E S T S AND FREE TI ME

5 Match each activity (a-h) with a place (1-8).

a) Sunbathing and wearing swimming costum es...... if... 1 a stage

b) W atching elephants dancing............... 2 a running track
c) Doing keep fit exercises............... 3 a party
d) Crossing the finishing lin e............... 4 a funfair
e) Taking a dog for a walk............... 5 a circus
f) Celebrating someone's birthday............... 6 a park
g) Riding a ghost train or a big w heel............... 7 a gym
h) Speaking clearly so the audience can hear............... 8 a beach

6 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

Music
W hat kind of music do you (1) ? Some people like going to ( 2 ) .............
concerts, and listening to ( 3 ) ............... The ( 4 ) .............. wear very form al clothes,
and the ( 5 ) .............is silent until the end of the ( 6 ) ................. Perhaps you're a
rock music ( 7 ) ............... Rock concerts are often held at football ( 8 ) ...............or in
parks. ( 9 ) .............of the audience dance to the music, or sing the songs.
( 1 0 ) .............music is ( 1 1 ) .............. at weddings and parties in m any countries, and
some people ( 1 2 ) .............their own music at hom e. Nowadays we ( 1 3 ) ...............
music in shops and lifts, and m any people ( 1 4 ) .............their own music with
them , or even (15) .........to music when they study. Music is everywhere!

1) A listen B enjoy C have D preferring

2) A classic B classics C classical D classified
3) A a group B an orchestra C a band D a record
4) A musicians B actors C musicals D instrum ents
5) A spectators B people C guests D audience
6) A happening B action C music D performance
7) A fan B enthusiasm C reader D friend
8) A m atches B stadiums C pitches D pools
9) A Members B Selections C Persons D Those
10) A Historical B Nation C Traditional D Ancient
11) A acted B formed C done D played
12) A d o B get C make D take
13) A listen B hear C perform D understand
14) A carry B wear C lift D play
15) A hear B have C follow D listen

253
 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

A house in the country

The house is situated am ong beautiful (1) . .. A . .. . , two miles from the nearest
village, surrounded by (2) ............... On a ( 3 ) ...............a short distance from the
house is a ( 4 ) ............., and a small ( 5 ) ...............flows past the end of the garden,
w hich also contains a small (6) ............... The name of the house, Rose Cottage, is
on the garden ( 7 ) ............., from which a ( 8 ) .............. leads to the ( 9 ) .............. door.
On the ( 1 0 ) .............floor there is a large ( 1 1 ) .............. room, a dining room, a
kitchen, and ( 1 2 ) .............and toilet. ( 1 3 ) ...............there are three bedrooms. There
is also a garage next to the house. The village has a post ( 1 4 ) ............., a small
shop and a pub, and there is a railway ( 1 5 ) .............three miles away.

1) A view B scenery C sights D looks

2) A grass B flats C earth D fields
3) A m ountain B peak C hill D summit
4) A wood B greenery C jungle D forest
5) A river B channel C stream D canal
6) A sea B bath C water D pond
7) A gate B door C opening D entrance
8) A road B path C way D pavement
9) A forward B front C first D further
10) A bottom B back C ground D earth
11) A lounge B seating C saloon D living
12) A bathroom B bath C basin D washing
13) A Over B Up C Upstairs D Higher
14) A shop B centre C place D office
15) A station B stop C post D base

2 Underline the most suitable word in each sentence.

a) We arranged to m eet in the centre of town in the main place/square.

b) Their cottage is in the heart of some beautiful country/countryside.
c) The children spent all day playing on the sandy beach/seaside.
d) I dropped my ice-cream on the earth/ground, so I couldn't eat it.
e) This footpath/pavement leads across the fields to the village.
f) There was a wonderful scenery/view from my hotel room.
g) You can 't stop here. Car-park/Parking is not allowed in this street.
h) Helen decided to leave the country/land and work abroad.

254
 V O C A B U L A R Y 15 PLACES

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

block centre crossing hall junction

part place station traffic zone

a) The police officer asked me to com e with him to the police ......
b) W hen you reach the r o a d ......................... turn right.
c) The mayor's office is in the t o w n ............................
d) Margaret lives on the top floor of a ......................... of flats.
e) Cars have to stop for you if you use a p ed estrian ............................
f) W h ic h ......................... of town do you live in?
g) You can buy fresh fish in the m a rk e t......................... every Friday.
h) Take the first turning on the left after the next set o f ......................... lights.
i) The centre of town is now a tra ffic-free......................... and cars are banned.
j) A new sh o p p in g ......................... has been opened on the edge of the town.

4 Replace the words in italics with one of the words from the box.

capital crowded international isolated

local neighbouring ftwai urban

a) It's m uch healthier to live in a country area, far away from the city.
.............................
b) Sue has just moved to a nearby town.

c) We lived in the middle of nowhere in an out o f the way cottage.

d) Paris is the most important city of France.

e) There is not a lot of world news in this newspaper.

f) I do my shopping at the neighbourhood shops, not in the town centre.

g) At weekends the town centre is always full o f people.

h) There is far too m uch pollution nowadays in city areas.

255
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each compound noun with a word from the box.

about bridge ground path park roads side skirts

a) Our children spend a lot of tim e having fun at the local play.J/ .r^ H ^ .
b) W hen you reach the cross......................... , take the road to Linton.
c) You have to turn left when you reach the next round...........................
d) We can 't leave the car here. W e'll have to look for a car...........................
e) Follow this fo o t......................... until you reach the m ain road.
f) There was an old woman selling fruit at the road............................
g) Paula lives on the ou t......................... of the town, where the countryside
begins.
h) You can cross the railway line by walking over a fo o t...........................

6 Match the words from the box with the explanations.

bridge bungalow caravan castlo cottage

semi-detached house terraced house tower

a) A strong building made in the past to defend people against enemies.

...castle.............................
b) A small house on wheels which is pulled by a car.

c) A house w hich is one of a pair of houses joined together.

d) A house with only one floor.

e) This carries a road or railway over a river.

f) A house w hich is part of a row of houses all joined together.

g) A small house in the country.

h) A tall building standing alone, or as part of a castle or church.

256
Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Would you like a bread/roll with your soup?

b) The first course/plate consisted of cold fish and salad.
c) That was a really lovely food/meal. Please let me pay for you.
d) I felt so thirsty that I drank two cans/tins of Corky Cola.
e) Nowadays m any people buy frozen/iced food instead of fresh food.
f) Could you give me the receipt/recipe for this cake? It's delicious!
g) This pie is fantastic! It's really tasteful/tasty.
h) Helen is a really good cook/cooker.
i) Can I have a fork/spoon so I can stir my coffee?

Complete each sentence with a suitable verb from the box.

add bake boil chop fry grate m ix peel roast squeeze

a) Jo h n decided to ...K P .fffi .........the beef in the oven for two hours.
b) Put all the ingredients in a bowl a n d ......................... them together well.
c) F ir s t......................... the onions into small pieces.
d) I wanted t o ......................... some cakes this m orning, but I didn't have tim e.
e) Taste the soup, a n d ......................... salt and pepper if necessary.
f) the potatoes, and then cut them into large pieces.
g) These vegetables taste great if y o u ......................... them for a m inute in h ot oil.
h) some cheese, and sprinkle it over the pasta.
i) a lem on and sprinkle the juice over the salad.
j) .......................... the rice in salted water for ten m inutes.

Complete each phrase with a suitable word from the box.

bacon biscuits butter chips fork salt saucer vinegar

a) pepper and ...#?/.£........... ............................e) fish and

b) knife a n d ......................... ............................... f) oil and .
c) egg a n d ......................... ...................................g) cup and
d) bread a n d ......................... .............................. h) tea and .

257
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Complete the phrase with a suitable word from the box.

bar carton cup glass jar loaf pinch sMee

a) a .......... of bread or cake e) a ......................... of bread

b) a ......................... of chocolate f) a ......................... of water
c) a ......................... of jam g) a ......................... of salt
d) a ......................... of tea h) a ......................... of milk

5 Match each description with the name of a kind of food from the box.

cheese chop grape lamb lettuce onion pie plum

a) Green or purple fruit which grows in bunches.

. . j m p e .......
b) Small vegetable with a strong smell and taste.

c) Plant with large green leaves used in salads.

d) Meat from a young sheep.

e) Meat, vegetables or fruit baked in pastry.

f) Small sweet fruit with red or yellow skin, and a stone in the centre.

g) Solid food made from milk.

h) Piece of pork or lamb with a bone, cut from the ribs of the animal.

6 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

bill book dessert menu takeaway tip

a) We weren't sure what to have, so we asked for t h e ..................................

b) Tony finished his meal, paid t h e ............................... , and left the restaurant.
c) After two courses we felt full, so we didn't have a n y ..................................
d) We had a very tasty In d ia n ............................... for the main course.
e) This is a popular restaurant and you have t o ............................... a table.
f) The service was excellent so we left a la rg e ............................... on the table.

258
 V O C A B U L A R Y 16 FOOD AND DRINK

7 Complete each sentence with a or some, or leave the space blank.

a) I'd like ....?...................chicken, please, a large one for roasting.

b) Could I h a v e ......................... bread, please?
c) Do we have tim e f o r ......................... snack before our bus leaves?
d) Would you like to com e t o ......................... lunch with me on Thursday?
e) T h e re 's......................... milk jug in the cupboard near the fridge.
f) George has decided to go o n ......................... diet, starting next week.
g) I'm going to h a v e ......................... cheese and tom ato sandwich.
h) For breakfast I e a t ......................... toast and marmalade, and drink a glass of
milk.
i) Do you l i k e ......................... yoghurt? Personally, I can 't stand it!
j) Tim managed to e a t ......................... chicken, but felt too ill to eat anything else.

8 Label the vegetables using the words from the box.

asparagus aubergine (Br)/eggplant (Am) bean broccoli

cabbage carrot cauliflower celery courgette (Br)/zucchini (Am)
leek lettuce mushroom onion pepper

Icttucc

259
 BULARY

7 Work and study

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Penny took three exams and managed to pass/succeed them all.

b) Most people would prefer a job/work which was near home.
c) Tim had to learn/teach fifty children how to swim.
d) I can't com e to the cinem a tonight. I'm reading/studying for a test.
e) Rita did very well, and was given m axim um grades/marks.
f) Every Friday, the building workers are given their salary/wages.
g) It's hard reading aloud/loudly w hen you don't understand the words.
h) The manager told David to make an application/invitation for the job.
i) Ann works in advertising and earns/wins a very high salary.
j) Would you like to com e into my bureau/office ? We can talk there.

2 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

business date heart phone practice rules time work

a) Before her history exam, Laura learnt a list of dates by ...k&tf.Kt ..........
b) The manager will be with you in a m om ent. He's on t h e ...........................
c) I haven't spoken Spanish for ages and I'm a bit out o f ...........................
d) Ever since Tim lost his job he's been out o f ............................
e) Bringing your m obile phone to the class is against t h e .........................!
f) This factory isn't very modern. Most of the m achines are out o f .....................
g) Our m aths teacher is always late. He's never o n ............................
h) Mrs Sm ith isn't here at the m om ent. She's away o n ...........................

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

get hand keep leefe pick stand take write

a) If you don't know the answer, ...l-P.P.h-............ it up in the back of the book.
b) My boss w ouldn't let m e ......................... tim e off to go to a football match.
c) Stop talking, a n d ......................... on with your work!
d) George finds it hard t o ......................... up with the rest of the maths class.
e) Carol stayed in France and managed t o ......................... up the language.
f) If you speak so fast I c a n 't ......................... down what you're saying.
g) D on't forget to check over your work before y o u ......................... it in.
h) Mrs Wood is going t o ......................... in for your teacher while he's away.

260
 V O C A B U L A R Y 17 W O R K A N D S T U D Y

4 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.
a) Nowadays it's very im portant to get a g o o d ........................................
educate
b) Our com pany h e lp s ......................................people to find new jobs.
employ
c) Paul has good ideas, but writes v e r y ........................................
care
d) Helen has becom e a ......................................businesswoman.
succeed
e) I hope to leave school with some u s e fu l........................................
qualify
f) Mr Dale was m y ......................................for ten years, and paid me well.
employ
g) According to t h e ......................................, the French lesson starts at ten.
time
h) Cathy has three jobs, so she has a h ig h ........................................
come
i) J o h n 's ......................................of history is amazing for a boy of his age.
know
j) All t h e ......................................in this com pany are given free meals.
employ

5 Match each sentence (a-j) with a sentence (1-10) which has a similar meaning.

a) She was given the sack........ 7...... 1 She

b) She got a rise............... 2 She
c) She got a prom otion............... 3 She
d) She retired............... 4 She
e) She did it for a living............... 5 She
f) She resigned............... 6 She
g) She was unem ployed............... 7 She
00

h) She applied for the jo b ............... She

i) She was am bitious............... 9 She
j) She was conscientious............... 10 She

261
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

The wrong age for school!

Are the years you (1) ....J?..... at school the best years of your life? Personally, I
found m ost ( 2 ) .............rather uninteresting. We had to sit at our ( 3 ) .............. in
silence and ( 4 ) .............attention. The teachers used to ( 5 ) .............. on the
blackboard and (6) .............us difficult questions. We also had to ( 7 ) .............. lots
of homework, and ( 8 ) .............it in on tim e. We had to wear a school ( 9 ) .............. ,
and we had to obey lots of ( 1 0 ) ............... I ( 1 1 ) .............. school as soon as I could
and started ( 1 2 ) ............... I read books at the public ( 1 3 ) .............. , and later I
decided to ( 1 4 ) .............college. I really enjoyed studying because I was older and
knew that I wanted some ( 1 5 ) ............... W hen I was at school, I was just the
wrong age!

1) A g o B have C pass D spend

2) A lectures B lessons C them D class
3) A chairs B desks C posts D parts
4) A pay B make C have D follow
5) A read B sit C write D talk
6) A make B do C get D ask
7) A answer B do C take D finish
8) A write B hand C pass D complete
9) A uniform B robe C dress D cloth
10) A ways B rules C laws D time
11) A passed B qualified C exam ined D left
12) A job B labour C employee D work
13) A bookshop B shelves C library D university
14) A go B attend C study D follow
15) A qualifications B exam inations C papers D grades

262
VOCABULARY

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Before we set off, we listened to the climate/weather forecast.

b) Paula saw a flash of lightning/thunder and then heard a deep boom .
c) The traffic had to slow down because of the thick fog/vapour.
d) There w on't be m uch rain. It's only a short shower/stream.
e) Spring is my favourite season/term of the year.
f) Last summer was very hot, and there was a real heatwave/temperature.
g) Look at those clouds! There's going to be a blast/storm.
h) On a hot day in summer, I look forward to the chilly/cool evening.
i) We were caught in the rain and got damp/soaked to the skin.
j) In the m orning there was half a metre of ice/snow blocking the road.

2 Choose the word which best matches the description.

a) Large white water bird with a long neck. duck/$wan

b) Four legged anim al with horns, good at clim bing. goat/sheep
c) Sea anim al with a shell and five pairs of legs. crab/frog
d) Insect with large beautifully coloured wings. bee/butterfly
e) Small reptile with four legs and a long tail. lizard/snake
f) Small flying insect w hich drinks blood from the skin. fly/mosquito
g) Small long-eared anim al that lives in a hole. mouse/rabbit
h) Animal with long legs and neck and orangey skin. camel/giraffe
i) Eight-legged creature w hich catches insects, bat/spider
j) Young anim al w hich barks, often a pet. kitten/puppy

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

bark berry blossom braac-h leaf root thorn trunk

a) Sue managed to reach the ...kXfiYUM:.... of a tree and clim b up to the

window.
b) I felt ill after I ate a r e d ......................... from a bush in the woods.
c) The wall was cracked by t h e ......................... of a tree growing underneath it.
d) In the autum n, e v e r y ......................... on the tree turns yellow and then falls
off.
e) Liz hurt herself on a ......................... while she was picking some roses.
f) T h e ......................... of this tree can be removed and used as a kind of paper.
g) In spring all the apple trees are covered in w h ite ............................
h) An oak tree has a very b ro a d ......................... .. sometim es two metres thick.

263
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

4 Choose the best ending (1-8) for each sentence (a-h).

a) In cities the air is hard to breathe because of c a r .....1 waste

b) The earth's clim ate is changing because o f ............................... 2 pollution
c) Not having enough of som ething is called a ............................3 recycling
d) Air, sea and land can suffer f r o m .................................................. 4 global warming
e) Throw ing things away unnecessarily is c a lle d ......................... 5 rubbish
f) A m ixture of smoke and fog is c a lle d .......................................... 6 exhaust fumes
g) Things which we throw away are c a lle d .....................................7 shortage
h) To avoid wasting things we can u s e .............................................8 smog

5 Decide which answer (A, B, C or D) best fits each space.

The threat to the Environment

Nowadays people are more aware that wildlife all over the world is i n (1 ) . . . A ........

Many ( 2 ) .............of animals are threatened, and could easily becom e ( 3 ) ..............
if we do n ot make an effort to ( 4 ) .............them . There are many reasons for this.
In some cases, anim als are ( 5 ) .............for their fur or for other valuable parts of
their bodies. Some birds, ( 6 ) .............as parrots, are caught ( 7 ) .............. , and sold
as pets. For m any animals and birds, the problem is that their habitat - the
( 8 ) .............where they live - is ( 9 ) ................. More ( 1 0 ) ...............is used for farms,
for houses or industry, and there are fewer open ( 1 1 ) .............than there once
were. Farmers use powerful chem icals to help them grow better ( 1 2 ) ............ , but
these chem icals pollute the environm ent and ( 1 3 ) .............wildlife. The most
successful animals on earth - hum an beings - will soon be the only ones
( 1 4 ) ............., unless we can ( 1 5 ) ...............this problem.

1) A danger B threat C problem D vanishing

2) A marks B more C species D forms
3) A disappeared B vanished C empty D extinct
4) A harm B safe C protect D serve
5) A hunted B chased C game D extinct
6) A like B such C or D where
7) A lively B alive C for life D for living
8) A spot B point C place D site
9) A exhausting B departing C escaping D disappearing
10) A earth B land C soil D area
11) A spaces B air C up D parts
12) A products B fields C herbs D crops
13) A spoil B harm C wound D wrong
14) A survived B over C missing D left
15) A answer B calculate C solve D explain

264
 V O C A B U L A R Y 18 THE NATUR AL ENVIRONMENT

6 Complete each sentence with a pair of verbs from the box with opposite
meanings.

clean up cut down destroy let plant

pollute prevent protect recycle throw away

a) People should be encouraged to ...pfQtcct.......... the environm ent, rather

than .... destroy.........it.
b) We should try t o ............................. ,, disasters happening, n ot just
............................... them happen.
c) Everyone should try t o ................. ..............beaches, and n o t .................................
them .
d) It would be a good idea t o .......... .................... more trees, n ot to
............................... trees.
e) We can use things again if we ... ............................rather t h a n .................................
them .

Complete the sentences with the pairs of words from the box.

country/city farm/cottage fence/hedge hills/mountains

paths/tracks stream/river town/village crops/weeds

a) Elderly people often move away from the ..................to live in the
touM'cy
b) I've often walked over t h e .......... .................... .. but I don't like clim bing

c) A boat can sail up a ....................... ........, but a ..................................is too small.

d) If you go for a walk, stay on the .................................. If you follow any of the
a n im a l............................... you m ight get lost.
e) Farmers try to get rid of all the ............................... and increase the quantity of
............................... they grow.
f) I com e from a li t t l e ........................ ......... The nearest b i g ................................. is
Bedford.
g) One field has a w o o d e n ............... ............... , the other has a ..................................
made of bushes.
h) In the middle of t h e ..................... .........was a lovely o l d ................................. with ;
garden.

265
Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) In the UK it's a 'm obile phone', but in the US it's a cell phone/pocket phone.
b) In Britain most private cars run on gas/petrol or diesel.
c) Ann’s friends bought her an electric/electrical m ixer for her birthday.
d) Peter had to push his bike when he got a flat tyre/wheel.
e) This car has got a really powerful engine/machine.
f) W hen the m achine is on, a little red light/torch comes on.
g) The noise of the workmen banging in nails/screws was disturbing.
h) The radiators will have to be fitted by a heater/plumber.

Match the words from the box with the explanations.

answering m achine camera dishwasher photocopier

mobile phone sewing m achine vacuum cleaner

a) Use this if you can 't stay in to take your calls. ...
b) Use this to make calls when you're out and about.......................................................
c) Use this to do your own dressmaking. ...................................................
d) Use this to get rid of dust and dirt. ...................................................
e) Use this to take a snapshot for your album. ...................................................
f) Use this to deal with dirty cutlery and crockery............................................................
g) Use this if you need several pages all the sam e.............................................................

Complete each phrase in italics with a verb from the box.

blow break cut go plug run turn warm wear

a) I'm sorry I can 't talk now, but I'll ........... back in half an hour.
b) The police think that a car bom b was used t o ......................... up the building.
c) These tyres are strong, and w o n 't ......................... out for ages.
d) Jane's old car used t o ......................... down all the tim e.
e) You c a n ......................... in the com puter to the socket by the window.
f) If you don't pay the electricity bill they w ill......................... you off.
g) I think it's tim e t o ......................... o ff the television and go to bed.
h) W henever there is a thunder storm, all the lig h ts ......................... out.
i) It's not necessary t o ......................... up the engine first, although it's so cold.
j) If you leave the radio on all night the battery w ill.......................... out.
 V O C A B U L A R Y 19 TOOLS AND T E C H N O L O G Y

4 Complete the sentences about computers with a word from the box.

button cursor hard disk highlight icon

print out memory modem website

a) The com puter stores large am ounts of inform ation on its k q r d d is k .

b) W hen a program is running, it is using the computer's

c) A small picture that represents a program is called an
d) The flashing symbol that shows where text will appear is t h e ..............................
e) W hen you've finished writing text you often want to
f) You can click the left or right m o u s e ...................................
g) Organizations use the internet to provide inform ation about themselves -
they put the inform ation on t h e ir ...................................
h) You connect the com puter to the internet via a ..................
i) Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across any text that
you want t o ...................................

Replace the group word in italics in each sentence with an example word from
the box.

estf cello electric toothbrush oven

frying pan gun ladder saw

a) The police discovered the vehicle more than twenty miles away.
a tr

b) My sister bought me this gadget to clean my teeth as a present.

c) The builders left their equipment outside the house.

d) The cost of the kitchen includes an electrical appliance.

e) This kitchen utensil is lightweight and non-stick.

f) I had to use a tool to cut the floorboards in half.

g) One of the robbers was carrying a weapon.

h) This instrument is rather heavy to carry.

267
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

6 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

battery handle key lock plug socket switch wire

a) Lisa turned the door , opened the door and entered the room.
b) My watch stopped working because t h e ......................... had run out.
c) The television w on't work in this room, as there isn't an electric

d) Bill pressed the li g h t ......................... , but none of the lights was working.
e) To wind up this old clock you need a special kind o f ............................
f) Mary put the key in t h e ......................... , but it wouldn't turn.
g) I've bought an electric kettle, but the lead hasn't got a .........................on it.
h) The electric bell didn't work because t h e ......................... had been cut.

7 Match each sentence with the necessary object from the box.

binoculars compass hairdrier iron lawnmower

pump razor scissors thermometer tin-opener

a) There is no air in either of these tyres.

...pklMp...............
b) Do you fancy some tinned beans for lunch?

c) The grass in the back garden is awfully long.

d) Sam has been letting his beard grow but now he's going to shave.

e) W hen it's long like this you need more than a towel.

f) I've got to cut the ends off the legs of my new jeans.

g) Do you think I've got a temperature?

h) It's difficult to see wild anim als w hen they're so far away.

i) Jean was com pletely lost, and needed to know where north was.

j) You can 't go out with all those creases in your shirt.

268
VOCABULARY

20 Everyday objects

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) I have to do some sewing. Do you have a pin/needle ?

b) You need special glue/sticker when you make model aeroplanes.
c) I always carry a carving knife/penknife in my pocket.
d) Paul keeps his papers together with a rubber band/rubber ring.
e) Sheets of paper can be fastened together with a paper clip/zipper.
f) I wrapped up the parcel using brown paper and rope/string.
g) Helen took the cutters/scissors and started trim m ing Mary's hair.
h) Oh bother! One of my shirt bottoms/buttons has fallen off.
i) As David was tying his shoelace/shoestring, it broke.
j) Little Susie usually ties up her hair with a red ribbon/strip.

2 Match each sentence with the necessary object from the box.

diary dictionary envelope correction fluid file

notepad notice ruler sharpener stamp

a) It's im portant to let everyone know what tim e the m eeting starts.
...notict .............
b) Hang on a m inute, I'll just write down those details.

c) Oh dear, I've written my nam e in the wrong place.

d) Write down the date of the next m atch so you don't forget.

e) I've written my letter but I've got nothing to put it in.

f) I keep losing the sheets I wrote m y homework on.

g) How long is this piece of paper exactly?

h) W hat a nuisance! My pencil has broken.

i) My letter's ready for the post. How m uch will it cost?

j) I'm .not really sure what this word means.

269
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

3 The words in italics are in the wrong sentence. Find the correct sentence for each
one.

a) You can hang your coat on the fireplace behind the door.
...kook...............
b) It's tim e for lunch. Can you put the doormat on the table?

c) I've bought a beautiful hook with long leaves for your room.

d) D on't forget to put all the rubbish from the kitchen into the broom.

e) Cathy pulled back the plant and looked out at the street.

f) You can sweep the floor with the curtains in that cupboard.

g) My m other insists that we all wipe our feet on the tablecloth.

h) Some logs were blazing and crackling in the dustbin.

4 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

alarm r -r \ » v i K
vTTTTTTLT gown hanger mirror pillow
slippers table toothpaste towel

a) My hair is in an awful mess. Have you got a ....£0!'MrI?..............?

b) W hen I get up I put on my d ressin g ............................... and go downstairs.
c) It's sometim es a shock to see your own face in t h e ..................................
d) Helen always sits at her d ressin g ............................... and brushes her hair.
e) W hen I'm in the house I take off my shoes and put on m y ...........................
f) I want to clean my teeth but I can't find a n y ..................................
g) Every m orning at 6.30 t h e ................................clock goes off and I wake up.
h) You can wash your hands here, and there's a ............................... behind the
door.
i) I can 't get to sleep unless I have a really c o m fo rta b le..................................
j) You can put your coat in the wardrobe on a c o a t ..................................

270
 V O C A B U L A R Y 20 EVERYDAY OBJECTS

5 Match the words from the box with the explanations.

street sign hedge kerb lamp post pavement

pedestrian crossing gate subway

a) This is a safe place to go from one side of the street to the other.
. cxossing. .

b) This has a light at the top in the street.

c) This is where people walk in the street.

d) This is a kind of wall made of a living plant.

e) This closes the opening in an outside wall.

f) This is a line of stones between the footpath and the road.

g) This helps you know where you want to go.

h) This is a way of crossing under the road.

271
 VOCABULARY

21 People

Underline the correct word in each sentence.

a) Mrs Grant is a good employee/employer and pays her staff well.

b) Excuse me, but are you the ower/owner of this bike?
c) Tom works in a local garage as a car engineer/mechanic.
d) I want to borrow some money, so I'm seeing the bank boss/manager.
e) Little Jim m y has got a new professor/teacher at his primary school.
f) Helen joined the army as an officer/official, and is now a captain.
g) The house really needed decorating so I called a painter/wallpaper.
h) Please ask the cash/cashier for a receipt.
i) Have you thought about getting a job as a waiter/table server1
j) I waited for my letters, but the poster/postman was late as usual.

2 Match a person from the box with each problem.

carpenter dentist electrician gardener guide

hairdresser optician photographer plumber vet

a) The lawn is really long and there are weeds everywhere.

...0 w dey\£,'c.........
b) I want to visit as m uch of the old city as possible in an afternoon.

c) The taps don't work, and there is water all over the floor.

d) I w ant to have a special portrait made for my eighteenth birthday.

e) One of m y fillings has com e out, and I've got terrible toothache.

f) I want to use the wood from these shelves to make a bookcase.

g) W hen I turn on the television, all the lights go off.

h) I can 't see to read very well and I think I need glasses.

i) Benny hurt one of his paws w hen I was taking him for a walk.

j) It's far too long at the back and too curly at the front.

272
 V O C A B U L A R Y 21 PEOPLE

3 Complete each sentence with a word from the box.

assistant flatmate employee guest host

member partner supporter team-mate

a) Peter has just becom e a/an of the fishing club.

b) I started this business with m y ......................... , Dora, about ten years ago.
c) I've got a n e w ......................... to help pay the rent. She moved in last week.
d) We provide e v e ry ......................... in the hotel with whatever he or she needs.
e) At the end of the party, Bill thanked h i s ......................... and then left.
f) A n y ......................... who wishes to work at weekends should see the manager.
g) I've been a / an ......................... of Hull City FC for as long as I can remember.
h) Mary was m y ......................... last year in the basketball tournam ent.
i) This job is a lot for one person, so we think you need a/ an ............................

4 Match each word from the box with an explanation.

celebrity coward expert favourite fool

genius liar miser optimist pessimist

a) Som eone who does not have any courage.

covJc\rd
b) Som eone who hates spending m oney and becom es rich by keeping it.

c) Som eone who says that a bottle is half full.

d) Som eone who is very well known in the media.

e) Som eone who is loved more than any other.

f) Som eone who has special knowledge or training.

g) Som eone who does som ething silly or mistaken.

h) Som eone who has very great ability or special talent.

i) Som eone who says that a bottle is half empty.

j) Som eone who does not tell the truth.

273
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

5 Complete each sentence with a group word from the box.

audience cast erew crowd group

queue society staff team trio

a) The ...£r£VX.......... of the ship cheered as the new captain came on board.
b) Paula has just joined the d ra m a tic......................... at school.
c) The head teacher thanked t h e ......................... for working so hard.
d) There was a lo n g ......................... of people waiting in the post office.
e) A h u g e ......................... had assembled outside the president's palace.
f) The members of t h e ......................... play the violin, the piano and the cello.
g) A s m a ll......................... of us went on a trip to Rome last summer.
h) W hen the music stopped, t h e ......................... applauded for ten minutes.
i) Last year Helen was the captain of the b a sk etb a ll............................
j) W hen the play ended all t h e ......................... came on stage and took a bow.

6 Complete each sentence with a word formed from the word in bold.

a) This city has over half a m illion T. .

inhabit
b) Margaret has decided to have a career as a ...................................
politics
c) E v e ry .................................in this country has the right to vote.
city
d) Eric studied hard to becom e a r o c k ...................................
guitar
e) After the crash, Carla was the o n ly ...................................
survive
f) David's m other is a fa m o u s...................................
science
g) At nineteen, Tony becam e a p ro fessio n al...................................
crime
h) I've always wanted to be a ja z z ...................................
music
i) It'll take Kate years to becom e a ...................................
law
j) Jack was m y .................................in the tennis m atch.
oppose

274
1 Tenses

Present simple
I/you/we/they like. She/he/it likes.
Do you like? Does she like?
You don't like. He doesn't like.

Present continuous
I am going. You/we/they are going.
She/he/it is going.
Are you going? Am I going?
I am not going. Is she going?
She isn't going. You aren't going.

Present perfect
I/you/we/they have left She/he/it has left.
Have they left? Has she left?
They haven't left. He hasn't left.

Present perfect continuous

I/you/we/they have been waiting She/he/it has been waiting.
Have you been waiting? Has she been waiting?
We haven't been waiting. He hasn't been waiting.

Past simple
1 I/you/she/he/it/we/they started, (regular)
Did you start?
You didn't start.
2 I/you/she/he/it/we/they went, (irregular)
Did you go?
You didn't go.

Past continuous
I/he/she/it was going. You/we/they were going.
Was he going? Were you going?
She wasn't going. You weren't going.

Past perfect
I/you/she/he/it/we/they had left.
Had he left?
They hadn't left.
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Future p erfect
I/you/she/he/it/we/they will have finished.
W ill they have finished?
They w on't have finished.

2 Reported Speech

'I always drink m ilk.' He said (that) he always drank milk.

'I'm leaving.' She said she was leaving.
'I'll be back soon.' He said he would be back soon.
'I've forgotten it.' She said she had forgotten it.
'I took it.' He said he had taken it.
'I was reading.' She said she had been reading.
'I had left by then.' He said he had left by then.
'I must go.' She said she had to go/must go.
'I can help.' He said he could help.
'I would like to help.' She said she would like to help.

3 Passive Tenses

Active Passive
He helps. He is helped.
He is helping. He is being helped.
He has helped. He has been helped.
He helped. He was helped.
He was helping. He was being helped.
He will help. He will be helped.
He will have helped. He will have been helped.

4 Infinitives

Present: to like
Present passive: to be liked
Past: to have liked
Past passive: to have been liked

5 Participles (-ing form s)

Present: liking
Present passive: being liked
Past: having liked
Past passive: having been liked

276
—
Infinitive
be
beat
becom e
begin
Past sim ple
was/were
beat
becam e
began
Past participle
been
beaten
becom e
begun
bend bent bent
bite bit bitten
blow blew blown
break broke broken
bring brought brought
build built built
burn burnt/burned burnt/burned
burst burst burst
buy bought bought
catch caught caught
choose chose chosen
com e cam e come
cost cost cost
cut cut cut
deal dealt dealt
dig dug dug
do did done
draw drew drawn
dream dreamt/dreamed dreamt/dreamed
drink drank drunk
drive drove driven
eat ate eaten
fall fell fallen
feed fed fed
feel felt felt
fight fought fought
find found found
fly flew flown
forbid forbade forbidden
forgive forgave forgiven
freeze froze frozen
get got got
give gave given
go went gone
grow grew grown
hang hung hung
have had had
hear heard heard
hide hid hidden
hit hit hit
hold held held
hurt hurt hurt
keep kept kept
know knew known
lay laid laid
lead led led

277
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

learn learnt/learned learnt/learned

leave left left
lend lent lent
let let let
lie lay lain
light lit lit
lose lost lost
make made made
mean m eant m eant
m eet m et met
pay paid paid
put put put
read read read
ride rode ridden
ring rang rung
rise rose risen
run ran run
say said said
see saw seen
sell sold sold
send sent sent
set set set
shake shook shaken
shine shone shone
shoot shot shot
show showed shown
shut shut shut
sing sang sung
sink sank sunk
sit sat sat
sleep slept slept
speak spoke spoken
spell spelt/spelled spelt/spelled
spend spent spent
stand stood stood
steal stole stolen
stick stuck stuck
swim swam swum
take took taken
teach taught taught
tear tore torn
tell told told
think thought thought
throw threw thrown
understand understood understood
wake woke woken
wear wore worn
win won won
write wrote written

278
Grammar index

A b ility 1 8 , 19 For
A d je c tiv e s 3 7 t im e 4, 6, 3 2
A d v erb s 3 7 p u rp o s e 2 1
A d v isin g 2 4 F or ex a m p le 4 7
A fter 3 2 F r e q u e n c y a d v e rb s 3
A go 4 , 3 2 F u n c tio n s 24
A ll 3 6 w ill, sh a ll, g o in g to 9
A lthou gh 2 3 F u tu re c o n t in u o u s 9
A nyone, an ybody, an y th in g 4 5 F u tu re p e r fe c t 9
A rticle s [a/an , the, zero ] 3 3 , 3 4 , 35 F u tu re t im e 8, 9
As 2 2
As a resu lt 2 2 G oing to 8
A sk in g fo r i n f o r m a t io n 24
H a d b etter 1 8
A sk in g , a g re e in g a n d re fu s in g 24
H a d to 19
A t la s t 3 2
H av e so m eth in g d o n e 17
B e a b le to 1 8 , 19 H av e to 1 8
B eca u se 2 2 H op e 15
B oth 3 6 H ow ever 2 3
But 23
I f I w ere you 14
By 32 I f on ly 15
C an 1 8 / / "sentences 13

C an 't 18 In fa c t 4 7
C a n ’t h a v e 19 In order to 2 1
C a p ita l le tte rs 48 In sp ite o f 2 3
C e r ta in ty 1 8 , 19 In th e en d 2 2 , 3 2
C o m p a r a tiv e a d je c tiv e s 3 8 In d ir e c t q u e s tio n s 28

C o m p a r a tiv e a d v e rb s 3 8 I n fin it iv e o f p u rp o s e 21

Com pound nouns 46 In s tea d 4 7

C ou ld 18 In te n s ifie r s [very, really, extrem ely]

C ou ld h a v e 19 It a n d there 2 9
Its a n d It's 2 9
C o u n ta b le a n d u n c o u n t a b le 33

D espite 2 3 L a ter 3 2
D idn 't n eed to 19 M a k in g o ffe rs 2 4
D o u b le p o sse s siv e [a frien d o f John's] 46 M an y a n d m u ch 3 3
E ach 3 6 M ay 18
Either, n eith er 3 6 M ay h a v e 19
Either, or 4 7 M ight 18
E nough M ight h a v e 19
M o d a ls
N ot + a d je c tiv e + en ou gh 2 2
N ot + en ou gh + n o u n 2 2 in c o n d it io n a l s e n te n c e s 14

Even though 2 3 p r e s e n t a n d fu tu r e 18
E ventu ally 2 2 p ast 19

Every 3 6 M ust 18
E veryone, everybody, everything 4 5 M ust h a v e 19
E xcept 4 7 N eedn 't h a v e 1 9
F irst c o n d it io n a l 13
No 36
N o-on e, n obody, n oth in g 4 5
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

N on e o f 3 6 Since
N ot a 3 6 reaso n 22
N ow ad a y s 3 2 t im e 6, 3 2
So 22
O b lig a t io n 1 8 , 19
So m u ch, so m any, so few , so little 22
O ffe r in g 24
So th a t 2 1
On th e o th er h a n d 2 3
S o/su ch + a d je c tiv e + [n o u n ] th a t 22
On tim e 3 2
S om e 3 6
O ne 4 5
S om eon e, som ebody, so m eth in g 4 5
O p in io n s a n d a d v ic e 1 8 , 19
S p e llin g 4 9 , 5 0
O ught to 1 8
S ta te a n d a c t io n v e rb s 3
O ught to h a v e 19
S u g g e stin g 2 4
P a ssiv e v o ic e 1 6 , 17 S u p e rla tiv e a d je c tiv e s 38
P a st c o n t in u o u s 4
Tag q u e s tio n s 2 8
P a st p e r fe c t s im p le 5
T e x t o r g a n iz e rs 4 7
P ast sim p le 4
T hat 25
P e r m is s io n 18, 2 4
T here a n d it 29
P h ra s a l v e rb s 3 9 , 4 0
T here, they're a n d their 29
P la c e a n d p o s itio n 30
T h ir d C o n d it io n a l 14
P lu ra ls 3 3
T hou gh 2 3
P o ss e ssiv e a d je c tiv e s [m y e tc .] 46
T im e 32
P o ss e ssiv e a p o s tr o p h e 4 6
in, on, a t
P o ss e ssiv e o f 4 6
during
P o ss e ssiv e p r o n o u n s [m in e e tc .] 46
T im e e x p r e s s io n s 3 2
P o s s ib ility o r u n c e r t a in t y 1 8 , 19
w ith p a st sim p le a n d p a st c o n tin u o u s 4
P r e p o s itio n s 3 0 , 4 4
w ith p re s e n t p e r fe c t sim p le 6
P la c e a n d p o s itio n 30
T oo + a d je c tiv e 2 2
at, to, in
T ra n s itiv e a n d in tr a n s itiv e v erb s 16
a b o v e, below , over, u n der
in, out, inside, on Unless 13
n ext to, near, by, b e sid e Until 3 2
o p p osite U sed to 5
P re s e n t c o n t in u o u s 2, 3
V erb s fo llo w e d b y in f in itiv e 4 2 , 4 3
P re s e n t c o n t in u o u s fu tu re u s e 8
V erb s fo llo w e d b y -ing 4 2 , 4 3
P r e s e n t p e r fe c t c o n t in u o u s 7
V erb s fo llo w e d b y p r e p o s itio n s 4 4
P r e s e n t p e r fe c t s im p le 6, 7
P r e s e n t sim p le 2, 3 W h a t I w a n t ... 2 6
P r e s e n t sim p le t im e t a b le fu tu r e 9 W h ich 2 5
P r o m is in g 24 W h ile a n d w h ereas 2 3
P u n c tu a tio n 48 W h ile a n d w hen 4
Q u e s tio n s 2 7 , 2 8
W ho 25
W h om 2 5
R e fle x iv e s [m y self e tc .] 45 W h o se 2 5
R e la tiv e c la u s e s 2 5 , 2 6 W ill 8
R e p ly q u e s tio n s 2 8 W is h e s 15
R e p o rte d s p e e c h 1 1 ,1 2 W ou ld in f u n c tio n s 1 3 , 2 4
R e p o r tin g v e rb s 12 W ou ld [re p e a te d a c tio n s ] 5
R e q u e s tin g 24
Yet 6 , 2 3
Say, tell, s p e a k 11
S e c o n d c o n d it io n a l 13, 14
S h a ll 9
S h o r t a n s w e rs 2 7
S h ou ld 18
S h o u ld h a v e 19

280
 answers

In som e cases m ore th a n o n e answ er is G ram m ar 3 5 a) w oke up, told

acceptable. b) was w aiting, arrived
a) 2 b) 1 c) 1
c) w anted, ch ose
Gram m ar 1 e) 2 f) 1 g) 2
d) w as studying, p h on ed
1 a) 12 b) 4 c) 2 d) 3 a) I don't believe e) fou n d , was lo o k in g for
e) 8 f) 10 13 h) 1 b) has f) w as w atch in g , arrived
g)
5 7 c) I ’m leaving
i) j) 6 k) 1) 11 g) w en t ou t, was lyin g
m) 14 n) 9 d) are you d oing h) w ent, did you eat
e) You're b ein g
2 a) 2 b) 4 c) 5 d) 1
f) I’m driving G ram m ar 5
e) 8 f) 7 g) 3 h) 6
g) are we eatin g 1 a) W hen we h a d eaten lunch, we
3 a) 2 b) 1 c) 2 d) 3 h) tastes sa t in the garden.
i) are you going b) W h ile I was loo k in g for m y
Gram m ar 2
i) I d o n ’t un derstand keys, I rem em bered Pd
1 a) do you go left th e m at hom e.
a) hate
b) are y ou w aiting c) A nna used to play bad m in ton
b) are you going
c) d oesn 't know w h en sh e was at sch oo l.
c) do you wear
d) I'm hav in g
d) th in k d) W h e n I got in to bed, I fell
e) do you leave asleep im m ediately.
e) d o esn 't usually sit
f) is h ap p enin g
f) are you loo k in g at e) W h e n I finallv/’d finally
g) do you know fou n d th e house, I knocked
g) D oes th is bus stop
h) I'm having
h) am n o t takin g at th e door.
2 a) does Sue live f) After Jill gave/had given Nick
a) 1 b) 7 c) 2
b) you know Jim his books, she w ent ho m e.
e) 6 f) 8 g) 4
c) are you doing at th e m om en t g) M aria used to live/lived in
d) you sittin g here a) do you usually do Sw eden w h en she was a
e) we ch an g e trains here b) o n ly eats ch ild .
f) are you w earing two c) D o y ou know h) 1 used to get up early w hen
pullovers d) are y o u staring I w en t sailing.
e) Do y ou speak i) T h e Vikings sailed to N orth
3 a) Naomi and Bill aren't
f) is staying A m erica a th o u san d years
watching television.
g) You're p u ttin g ago.
b) Peter d oesn 't like ch o co late
h) Are th ey speaking j) Ju lie t was sure sh e'd seen
cake.
th e tall m an before.
c) I'm n o t using th is p en cil at G ram m ar 4
th e m om en t.
1 a) was washing, rang
2 a) was waiting, noticed, hadn't
d) T he ch ild ren a ren 't hav in g been
b) did y ou feel
lu n ch in th e k itch en . b) w ent, fou n d , had stolen
c) got, received
e) I d on 't get up early o n c) m et, th o u g h t, had seen
d) w ent sw im m ing
Saturday. d) g ot off, was w alking,
e) b it, scream ed
f) Elena isn 't w riting a novel. realized, had left
f) sang, ate
4 a) Do you like g) fell, hap pened e) had b o u g h t, d id n 't have
b) does th e sun rise f) said, h a d n 't arrived
h) was w ashing-up, broke
c) are you reading i) see, m issed a) had bro k en g) d id n ’t know
d) I'm having j) were you doing, p h on ed b) w anted h) had flow n
e) d o n ’t w atch videos c) had stolen i) had b een
2 a) I didn't enjoy the concert.
f) It’s snow ing d) th o u g h t j) to o k place/
b) Did you eat all th e bread?
g) are you talking e) had d one had taken
c) J o h n sp ent a lot.
h) goes f) needed place
d) I d id n 't feel w ell yesterday.
i) Do you wear used to have
e) A nn a b o u g h t a car. a)
i) Sh e’s building
f) Did th e y w in th e prize? b) would/used to read
a) w riting i) using g) Paul speaks G reek. c) would/used to m eet
b) digging j) w aiting h) I d id n 't pay all th e bills. d) d id n 't use to like
c) taking k) w ashing e) used to w rite
3 a) while f) ago
d) deciding 1) riding f) used to live
b) Last w eek g) w h en
e) sw im m ing m) flying g) used to be
c) w h en h) in
f) having n) studying h) would/used to ch eer
d) at i) W h e n
g) lying o) going 5 a) had taken
e) W h ile j) ago
h) reading b) d id n 't use
4 a) 3 b) 1 c) 6 d)
2 f) 7 8 h) c) d id n 't have/he h a d n 't
e) g)
d) used to play

281
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

e) get up g) h o p e, 've cooked b) /

f) w e'd m issed h) have tak en up c) T h e bo at is tu rn in g over! I think
g) would/used to spend i) reached , w eren 't it's going to sink!
6 a) When I'd w ashed and got ready, j) h as had, 's gone d) ✓
I went out to m eet m y friends. 3 a) H ave you seen, 've been e) T he w eather forecast says it's
b) I knew m u ch m ore about looking forward d efinitely going to be sunny
th e jo b w h en I ’d visited b) 've b e en studying, h av en 't tom orrow .
th eir offices. fin ished f) ✓
c) W h e n I'd looked at th e new c) 've b e en p h o n in g , 's gone g) Sorry, I w o n ’t see you
dress for ages, I asked how m u ch d) Have y ou heard, has robbed tom orrow . I have to go to
it cost. e) 've b rok en , has w ritten Lond on.
d) I felt m u ch m ore h) Bye for now. I'll see you
4 a) 've been living here
in d ep en d en t w h en I'd later th is evening.
b) has g on e
passed m y d rivin g test. 5 a) I'm going to study engineering
c) 've b een learn in g
e) A nne w ent o n h o lid ay w h en in France.
d) h a v en ’t fin ished
sh e'd saved e n o u g h m on ey. b) I'm g oin g to have a party
e) ju st left
f) W h e n th e tea m had fin ally n e x t Friday.
f) h a v e n 't been
w on th e m a tch , th e y ran c) W e’re g oin g to th e doctor's,
g) h a v e n 't eaten/’ve never eaten
round th e p itch to celebrate. so we ca n 't com e.
h) forg o tten
d) Kelly w ill probably get the
G ram m ar 6 a) so f) tea ch in g
job .
1 a) H ave you cut b) sin ce g) yet
e) M artin 's w ife is going to
b) 've had c) b een h) has
have an o th er baby.
c) has n ever seen d) m et i) practisin g
f) Sarah isn 't going to get
d) has stolen e) recen tly j) tau ght
m arried yet.
e) h a v e n 't slept 6 a) My penfriend has been w ritim g) I th in k it'll snow tom orrow .
f) 've ju st bro k en to m e for years. h) T h e score will be 3 -0 .
g) h a s n 't w on b) W e started th is course three
h) Have y ou ever eaten weeks ago. Gram m ar 9
2 a) 've been married c) 'W h a t have you b een d oing 1 a) will be lying
b) 've been all day?' ‘I’ve been w riting b) rings
c) 've w ritten letters.' c) W e'll be m oving
d) 've n ev er eaten d) W h e n did you arrive in th is city? d) does your train leave
e) 've loved e) Have you ever b een to India? e) you leave
f) 've broken f) Paula has b een staying in a h o tel f) will you be w orking
by th e sea. g) I'll be
3 a) sin ce e) yet h) So far g) I've b een feelin g ill for three h) w o n 't stop
b) always f) for i) o ften
weeks/I felt ill th ree weeks ago.
c) ever g) never j) already 2 a) 5 b) 2 c) 1 d) 6 e) 3 f) 4
h) I've lived/I’ve b e en liv in g in th is
d) just 3 a ) /
city sin ce I was bo rn .
4 a) 've worked here i) I've b een w aiting here for b) you grow
b) h a v e n 't been/'ve n ever been ages. W h ere hav e y o u been? c) ✓
c) M y p en has j) T ony has left his bo ok s o n th e d) you give
d) hav e left bus. e) arrives, I'll let
e) 've ju st seen f) be using
f) h a v e n 't fin ished G ram m ar 8 g) sh e'll have left.
g) you been a) 2 b) 2 c) 1 d) h) I'll do it.
h) 've left e) 2 f) 1 4 a) Shall we play tennis?
i) h a v e n 't spoken b) I'm g oin g to study Arabic in
a) is joining/is going to join
j) Anna/she w oken Cairo.
b) w o n 't be
c) 's g oin g to snow c) I'll be h o m e by m id night.
G ram m ar 7 d) I'll m eet you later.
d) 'm g oin g ou t
1 a) I've lived here e) W ill you go to th e shops for
e) 're g oin g to k n o ck
b) left m e?
f) w ill p ro bab ly ride
c) has ju st sto len f) We w o n 't m ake too m u ch
g) is g oin g to give/is giving
d) I've decided noise.
h) 'm g oin g to go
e) I lost g) Shall I h elp you w ith those
i) 're g oin g to h it
f) It's started bags?
j) w ill probab ly w in
g) W e've visited h) W e'll co m e back later if you
h) I've b e en stand ing a) 'm having a party
like/Shall we co m e back
has been b) g o in g to rain
i) later?
W e w ent c) our team will
j)
d) w o n 't be 5 a) '11 have finished
2 a) lost, 've just lost b) m eet next/again, I'll p h on e
e) is g oin g to fin ish
b) w ork, 've decided c) I ch eck th e spelling
f) '11 m eet you
c) 've be en , 've co m e d) let m e share her
g) are we m eeting/going
d) Have you seen, left e) w e have
h) w ill visit/will co m e to visit
e) had , cau gh t f) leave/go u n til I
f) 've never eaten , ate a) I'm going swim m ing next
g) th e lesson has finished
Saturday. Would you like to
h) you be doing
282 come?
 GRAMMAR ANSWERS

Gram m ar 10 G ram m ar 11 b) C hris in v ited Je a n to (go to) th e

cin em a.
1 a) I used to ride 1 a) Sally said that she'd lost her
c) Patsy advised Dave n o t to eat
b) Shall I keys.
to o m u ch .
c) Have you seen her b) C hris said/told m e th a t he
d) N ick suggested g oin g for a walk.
d) have you b e en w orking m ust leave early.
e) C arol apologized for breaking
e) I h a v en 't fin ished c) M aria and T ony said th ey
th e w indow .
f) I was w ashing w ould see us tom orrow .
f) B ill offered to do th e w ashing-
g) are you staring d) Tom said, 'I'm co m in g to
up.
h) I'm having you r party.'
g) Tina's m o th e r co n g ratu lated her
i) stops e) Sue said th a t sh e'd w ritten a
o n passing her d riving test.
i) did you last go letter to Lisa.
h) Pat refused to op en h is m ou th .
2 a) do you do f) Steve told us/said th a t he
was arriving at 8 .0 0 .
b) ran G ram m ar 13
was sitting g) 'I'v e b o u g h t a new bik e,'
c) 1 a) we're, will be
d) d o n 't understand Pam told us.
b) lived, w e'd see
realized h) 'W h a t’s th e m atter?' Ellen
e) c) take, w e'll arrive
'm studying asked.
f) d) d o n 't hurry, w e'll be
g) was reading 2 a) I've finished e) w ere, w ould be able to
h) know b) I'll be back at 6 .0 0 d o n 't wear, y o u 'll feel
f)
i) 'm staying c) I'm g oin g to go sh op p in g studied, w ould get
g)
i) did you do d) I w ant to m ake a p h o n e call h) had , I'd ride
3 a) arrived, Steve had e) I’ve fo rg o tten m y hom ew ork lend , I'll let
i)
f) I have to be back b y 3 .3 0 had , I'd give
b) I help j)
c) do you usually g) I'll let you know
2 a) fall in, will get
h) I'm g o in g to b e late
d) has been playing b) were/was, 'd go
e) I'll 3 a) 3 b) 5 c) 2 d) 1 c) knew, 'd tell
f) was eating/having e) 4 d) run, '11 c a tch
g) is staying 4 a) told d) told/saying e) rains, '11 go/could go
h) h av en 't seen b) spoke, said e) told/tell had, 'd jo in
f)
i) you doing c) said, told f) told/spoke 3 a) would f) W ould
4 1)i C 2) A 3) D 5 a) wouldn't be there because she was b) unless g) w ould
5) B 6) A 7) C 8) C having a party w ould h) If
c)
9) D 10) B 11) B 12) D b) 'd lost th e m ap and (he) d) U nless i) w ould
13) A 14) C 15) A d id n 't know th e way. e) W ould j) unless
a) before f) never c) she fin ished th e book , she 4 a) 8 b) 6 c) 9 d) 10
b) since g) lately/recently was going to w atch television e) 1 f) 3 g) 4 h) 2
c) all week h) at/by d) was d o in g som e h o m ew o rk bu t 5 j) 7
i)
d) yet i) for h e w o u ld n 't b e lon g
5 a) had, 'd be able
e) As so on as i) By th e tim e e) 'd g o t up late and (had)
b) take, '11 feel
been 7) / / m issed th e bus
1) 13) c) ate, w ould live
2) / 8) are 14) been
/ b een /
Gram m ar 12 d) b ecam e, 'd bu y
3) 9) 15) e) leave, w ill give
have w ill have 1 a) whether, was
4) 10) 16) f) follow , '11 co m e
had 17) b) w h en , w ould
5) 11) shall be
g) used, w o u ld n 't be
/ 12) have c) if/w hether, had
6) h) to u ch , w o n 't bite
d) if/w hether, to o k
7 a) it had stopped ringing i) leave, '11 give
e) w here
b) I h a v en 't played it before. j) ow ned, w o u ld n 't visit
f) If/whether, had
c) W h e n did Pete w rite to you
last? 2 a) Are you having lunch or going out G ram m ar 14
d) Do you ever go to the cinem a? b) W h a t did y ou do yesterday a) W hat would you do i f you had
e) I w ent to th e b e ach every c) D o y ou o ften go sailing wings?
day. d) How m an y G erm an bo ok s have b) If I were you, I'd leave now .
f) She's playin g basketball. you read c) How w ould y ou feel if you
g) I've been w aiting here for e) Are y ou g oin g to ch an g e sch oo ls lived o n M ars?
ages! f) W h o do y ou sit n e x t to in class d) If I w ere you, I’d bu y a bike.
3 a) if/w hether I was staying there all e) W h a t w ould y ou do if you were
8 a) Have you finished yet?
summer rich?
b) I'll see y ou tom orrow !
b) w hat 'p ro crastin ate' m ea n t f) W h a t w ould y ou say if Jim cam e
c) Did you have a n ice tim e?
c) if/whether I'd done m y hom ew ork w ith us?
d) Do you know w hat I m ean?
d) w h en her birth d ay was g) If I w ere y ou , I’d take th e bus.
e) Are you co m in g ou t for a
e) if/w hether I'd rem em bered to h) W h a t w ould you do if you
drink later?
lo ck th e door ow ned a ro bo t?
f) Have you b een w aiting long?
f) w hy I'd tu rn ed o ff th e telev isio n a) ha d phoned, would have given
4 a) Mike prom ised Sue he would be a t b) too k, m ig h t feel
her house before 8.00. c) had driven, w o u ld n 't have
crashed

283
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

d) h ad co m e, w ould have en jo y ed e) - e) sold a rock co n cert ticket

e) I'd k no w n, w ould hav e sen t f) by th e p o stm an f) his h ouse broken in to
f) helped , m ig h t be g) by th e p o lice g) w ere you
g) had scored, could h av e w on h) by so m eo n e h) was given th is ring by m y
h) w ore, w o u ld n 't get i) is b ein g kept
2 a) was qu estion ed
3 a) had left early, wouldn't have b) is w atched j) will b e sent
missed c) w ill be finished
3 a) I'm having my car serviced
b) 'd b o u g h t m ore m ilk, w ould d) has b een elected
tomorrow.
have had e) is b ein g rebuilt
b) I had m y bike stolen yesterday.
c) 'd taken/'d rem em bered to take a f) has b e en closed
c) We had our h ouse painted last
m ap, w o u ld n 't hav e g ot lost g) is w ritten
year.
d) ’d g on e to bed, w ould have h) was stolen
d) I'm h av in g m y to o th taken out
w oken up i) w ill be m et
tom orrow !
e) had m ade a sh op p in g list, j) was w on
e) I've just had m y hair cut.
w o u ld n 't hav e fo rg o tten to
3 a) M any p et dogs are lost every year. f) W e're hav in g our new
buy/would hav e rem em bered to
b) T h e in ju red m a n was tak en to carpet fitted tom orrow .
buy
ho sp ital. A nn has just had her portrait
f) 'd realized you were tired, I g)
c) A new bridge is b ein g bu ilt p ainted.
w o u ld n 't have asked you to go
across th e river.
g) had sailed across th e Atlantic, 4 a) is believed to be living
d) All th e food at th e party was
w ould hav e reached b) is supposed to fall
e a te n .
h) 'd tu rn ed left at th e statio n , c) is exp ected to w in
e) N o th in g w ill b e decided
w o u ld n 't hav e lost d) is th o u g h t to be plan n in g
befo re n e x t Saturday.
e) is said to be m aking
f) T h e m a tch is b ein g played o n
G ram m ar 15 f) is reported to disagree
Friday even in g.
1 a) h a d n ’t sunbathed
b) could stay
g) T h e robb er u n lo ck ed th e d oor Gram m ar 18
w ith a false key.
c) could swim l a) might f) m ay no t
h) T h is b o o k was w ritten by Sam 's
d) had b) c a n ’t be g) ca n 't be
father.
e) co u ld see c) m ust be h) m ust be
d id n 't sit 4 a) has been discovered d) could be i) could be
f)
had b) w ill be op ened e) m ig h t ca n 't com e
g) j)
h) en jo y c) was p ain ted by
a) can swim really
could d) w ill be a n n o u n ce d
i) b) m ig h t
I’ll e) is b ein g redecorated
j) c) ca n 't be
f) have been arrested
2 a) 2 b) 2 c) 1 d) d) m ust work
g) are sold by
e) 1 f) 2 g) 2 h) e) c a n ’t co m e
h) is b ein g b u ilt
i) 1 j) 1 f) m ig h t (be able to) see you
5 a) The casino has been closed. tom orrow
3 a) had brought
b) T h e m a tch has b een postpon ed. your teach er c a n ’t com e
b) had bo u g h t
c) English is spoken all over th e h) m ust be very h o t
c) w ent
w orld. i) can I op en
d) knew
d) T h e new sw im m ing -p ool has j) m ust be
e) had taken
b een opened .
f) h a d n 't bo u g h t a) S b) D c) d)
e) T his purse was left in th e
g) had fin ished
classroom yesterday.
e) f) g) h)
h) spoke/could speak i) j)
f) Traffic has b e en b an n ed from
4 (Suggested answ ers) th e city cen tre. a) You ought to see a dentist.
a) I h a d a sandw ich g) A new g o v ern m en t has b een b) W e d o n 't have to go to school
b) you have a good elected. tom orrow .
c) 'd b e en here/'d co m e here/ h) T h e flat was brok en in to last c) T h at c a n ’t be Jo h n , because he's
'd visited it w eek. in Paris.
d) lived d) A nn could/m ight/m ay be at
e) danced/could d an ce G ram m ar 17 hom e.
1 a) cut e) You'd better wear a w arm coat
5 a) h a d n 't w asted
b) taken today.
b) w eren ’t
c) were c) sen t f) I m ay b e late.
d) serviced g) I d o n 't th in k (th at) you
d) could
e) brok en should/ought to go skiing.
e) had
d id n 't have to f) offered h) You ca n 't leave your bike here.
f)
h a d n 't m oved g) w ere y ou b o rn a) have f) had
g)
h) w asn 't h) repaired b) should c a n ’t
g)
i) was given c) m ust h) have
G ram m ar 16 j) was m ade d) m ay/m ight i) able
1 a) by som eone 2 a) h a d his e) m ust/should j) ought
b) - b) was le n t to m e by a) 1 th in k y ou 'd better/you should
c) by a d octor c) had o n e o f m y te e th tak en take m ore exercise.
d) - d) was b o rn b) T h e p lane should land soon.

284
 GRAMMAR ANSWERS

c) You ca n 't use a d ictionary. 5 a) knew the answer, I would help you 3 a) left work early, he could go
d) T h at ca n 't be Sue. She's abroad. b) y ou run fast, y o u 'll feel tired b) w as rebuilt, m ake it
e) I m ay/m ight co m e to you r party. c) was arrested by an off-d uty c) gave Ja ck h e r p h o n e nu m ber, he
f) You m u stn 't drop litter in th e po licew om an could/w ould call
street. d) had left early, we w ou ld n 't d) put o n so m e su n tan oil, I
g) You d o n 't hav e to w ait. have m issed th e train d o n ’t/w on't get
h) You should stay/ought to e) I h a d n 't eaten all th e ice-cream e) hid th e presents, n o b o d y
stay in bed today. f) tell m e w here th e bus statio n is w ould/could see
g) is bein g b u ilt by th e local council f) had th e party in a large hall,
Gram m ar 19 h) w ere you, I'd go to th e d octor's p eo p le w ould/could
l a) must have dropped i) was bro k en (by so m eo ne) arrived early, h e could/w ould get
g)
b) could/may/might have m issed w ith/using a h am m er h) ch an g ed seats in th e cin em a, I
c) could/was able to j) Amy to bu y som e m ilk could see
d) should have told j) so m e san dw iches, w o u ld n ’t feel
6 a) have to go
e) d id n't have/need to h u ngry
b) I were
f) ca n 't have taken c) m y hair cut i) w ore a fu n n y h at, his friends
g) m ay/m ight n o t have d) have m issed w ould n o tice
h) n eed n 't have
e) was in v en ted
i) have/need to buy have forg o tten
G ram m ar 22
f)
j) sh ou ld n 't have had 1 a) such f) so m u ch
g)
2 a) have studied so late h) m ust have w orked b) so m an y g) in th e end
b) you able to stop h im i) was given c) to o h) so m u ch
c) have to/need to w ork hard n e e d n 't have d) so few i) tall en ou g h
j)
d) have lost his way e) so i) so little
7 a) having our house
e) have hu rt yourself 2 a) so g) few
b) had his car
f) have told m e b) too h) such
c) h e'd
g) have en jo y ed it c) m u ch i) so
d) w o u ld n 't take
h) have helped her d) m an y to o
e) tell m e w h en i)
i) n o t to have left/to have stayed e) en ou g h k) so
f) unless
i) have d one it f) little
g) w o u ld n 't have
3 a) should have taken an umbrella h) c a n 't have 3 a) too
b) m ust hav e left it o n th e bus i) had to b) as/because/since
c) co u ld n 't get thro u g h j) asked c) so m u ch
d) should have b o u g h t her a 8 written d) so m an y
a)
present e) so
b) c a n ’t
e) ca n 't eat/stand oranges f) so few
c) where the train station was.
f) m ig h t have forg o tten th e address d) m ig h t have b een g) en ou g h
g) o u g h t to have studied harder e) you have to h) so
h) could have had fun i) so little
f) had to/m ust fin ish
m ust have op ened j) As/Since/Because
Gram m ar 20 g)
h) I were taller! 4 a) I stayed a t hom e and h a d a rest
l a) asked
i) I have m y car repaired because I felt really tired.
b) had
j) I'd scream b) I d id n 't use th a t p iece o f string,
c) had
because it w asn 't lo n g en ou g h .
d) said she d id n 't w ant m e to G ram m ar 21 c) It was su ch a d ifficu lt q u estion
e) ca n 't have stolen
1 a) so that th a t I h ad to ask for help.
f) had b) to d) T h ere w ere to o few seats for all
g) you 'd better c) in order to th e guests.
h) would be
d) dressed, could/would e) T h ere were to o m an y guests and
i) have been e) for n o t en ou g h seats.
j) w e'd rem em bered f) co u ld n ’t/w ouldn't f) W e c a n ’t p u t th a t b o x in th e car
2 1) 3 7) 3 13) 3 g) can as th ere's to o little space.
2) if 8) m ust 14) was h) could g) I've g ot to o little tim e to do all
3) th ey 9) have 15) if m y work.
2 a) I went to the shops for som e eggs.
4) to 10) if 16) been h) I've got so m u ch w ork th a t I
b) N icola cam e here to hav e a
5) p ain t 11) can 17) us c a n 't go out.
m eetin g w ith th e director.
6) to 12) hav e 18) 3 i) Sh e h ad so m a n y ch ild ren th at
c) W e w en t o n h o lid ay for a rest.
d) M ike plays ch ess to relax. she d id n 't know w hat to do.
3 1) C 2) A 3) B 4) A j) T h e play was so good th a t th e
e) I op ened th e w ind ow for som e
5) D 6) D 7) B 8) C au d ience ch eered .
air.
9) A 10) C 11) D 12) A
f) C ristin a w en t sh op p in g for som e 5 a) Sorry, but I haven't got enough
13) C 1 4 )B 1 5 )D
new cloth es. time.
4 a) don't have to e) m ust g) I w en t to a private sch o o l to b) Erica is n o t old en o u g h to drive
b) m u stn 't f) could learn English. a car.
c) m ig h t have g) had to h) Sam w en t to a specialist for c) Paul has so m an y friends th at
d) have to h) should treatm en t. he's always busy.

285
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

d) W e had to o little tim e to go c) I th in k you sh ou ld talk it over 6 a) Triday was the last time that I saw
sight-seeing. w ith you r parents. Jim.
e) It’s so h o t th a t I c a n 't th in k ! d) Sh all I carry it? b) T h e island that/w hich we visited
f) T here was so m u ch sn ow th a t e) How abo u t g oin g to th e was extrem ely beautiful.
we c o u ld n ’t travel. cinem a?/Let's go to th e c) T h e girl that/w ho I m et was a
It was su ch a lo n g w ay th a t we cinem a?/ W hy d o n 't we go to th e friend o f Philip's.
decided to drive there. cin em a? d) T h e m eal that/w hich we ate
h) As I'd run a lo n g way, I felt f) C an I leave sch o o l early? w asn 't very tasty.
exhausted./I'd ru n su ch a g) Could/Can y ou tell m e how e) G in a was th e first person
lo n g w ay th a t I felt exh austed . m u ch it costs? that/w ho I asked.
a) slow to be in the running team. h) W ould you like som e lem o n ad e? f) T h e b o o k that/w hich I read
b) to th e ho u se, because/as it's n o t i) Could you open th e window? d id n 't exp lain th e problem .
very far. j) No, I w o n 't. g) T h e teach er that/w ho we
c) su ch a lo n g film th a t we m issed a) you m ind taking usually have was away ill.
our last bus. b) 'd rather have/'d prefer h) T h e friends that/who I m et last
d) u n h ap p y th a t she cried, c) can you w ait n ig h t send you th eir love.
e) m u ch m o n ey th a t he d o esn 't d) Can/M ay I leave
k now w hat to do w ith it. e) you tu rn o ff
Gram m ar 26
f) old e n o u g h to get m arried, f) How abo u t going
l a) which f) th at
e n o u g h m o n ey to bu y th is bike, b) W h at g) w hose
g) g) w o n 't talk
h) e n ou g h plates I'm afraid. h) Sh all I help c) w ho h) w ho
d) w hose i) w hich
i) m in d tellin g m e
G ram m ar 23 i) w ere you,
e) th at i) w ho
l a) however should 2 a) his b) / c) it d) she
a)
b) A lth ou gh e) it f) ✓ g) th ey
b) Can/Could/W ould
c) A lth ou gh
c) Can/Could/W ould a) The museum that we want to visit
d) O n th e o th e r h an d
d) W ill/W ould opens a t 12.00.
e) bu t Let's
e) b) T he b o y w hose bike was taken
f) despite
f) m in d visited th e p o lice station.
g) In spite o f rather
g) c) T he friend w ho m et m e at the
h) a lth o u g h
h) Can/Could/W ould airport carried m y suitcase.
a) Although e) still i) W ould d) T h e m eal th a t Tom cooked was
b) but f) alth o u g h j) can/m ay d elicious.
c) H ow ever g) D espite e) T h e friend w ho is staying w ith
d) even h) spite G ram m ar 25 m e com es from Paris.
a) the snow, we went out for a walk. 1 a) who e) th a t f) T h e m an w hose w allet I found
b) so m e exp erts th in k prices will b) w hose f) w hose gave m e a reward.
fall, o th ers disagree, c) w ho g) w hose g) T h e shop in th e cen tre th at I go
c) losin g at h a lf-tim e , C ity w on in d) w h ich to is cheaper./The shop th at I go
th e end. 2 a) whose e) w hose to in th e cen tre is cheaper.
d) it was h o t, D ian a w ore her b) th a t w ho h) T h e girl w hose party I w ent to
f)
w in ter cloth es. c) w hose w ho ph on ed m e.
g)
e) but/, how ever, th is su m m er it's d) w ho i) I know so m eo n e w ho likes you.
rained all th e tim e, a) / e) /
3 a) D b) N c) N d) D
f) h a v in g a headache,/his e) N f) N g) D
b) w hat f) what/who
h ead ach e, Ja m es still read u n til c) / g) W h at
late. 4 a) The book that John was
d) w hat h) /
but/, how ever, h e (still) did well reading was a bit frightening.
in th e test. b) / Gram m ar 27
c) In th e end, our h o lid ay was th e
1 a) W hat time do you usually get up?
G ram m ar 24 best th a t w e had ever had.
b) W h a t w ere you reading?
4 b) 2 c) 7 10 d) T h e d en tist w h o I go to isn 't
a) d) c) W h y did you go there?
very expensive.
e) 6 f) 3 g) 9 h) 1 d) W h a t have you d one so far?
5 j) 8 e) T h e film w h ich we saw last week
i) e) W h at do I have to do now ?
was m u ch b e tter th a n th is on e.
a) Would you m ind f) How did you feel yesterday?
f) ✓
b) If I w ere you, I'd w rite g) W h a t are you doing?
g) S h) W h y have th e ligh ts gone
c) go 5 a) These are the boys I went on
d) C ould y ou out?/W hy aren 't th e lights
holiday with.
e) W ould you like w orking?/W hy is n ’t th ere any
b) T h is is th e letter I've been
f) I w o n 't do it electricity ?
w aiting for.
g) Sh all I help W h ere did you leave your
c) T h at's th e sh op Sue b o u g h t her
h) W h y d o n 't you go bike?/W here's you r bike?
bike from .
i) C ould I borrow W ho's com ing to your party?
d) T h at's th e h o tel I stayed at.
i) sh ou ld go
e) Tim is so m eo n e I hardly
a) I'll be back ever w rite to.
b) I'll have ice-cream f) /
g) S
h) U n ited w ere th e best team (th at)
286 w e played against.
 GRAMMAR ANSWERS

a) W ho lives next door? 3 a) There is a sm all restaurant a) H ave you ever been to America?
b) W h o do you play w ith? b) It's strange th a t you w ent b) H as Andrew ever been to America?
c) W h o teaches y ou m aths?/W hat c) T here's a big tree at th e en d o f c) D oes Rita like rap m usic?
does Mrs D aw son tea ch you? my d) D o you like rap m usic?
d) W h a t do you (usually) eat for d) It seem s th a t Brian e) Did y ou e n jo y th e film ?
lu n ch ? e) It’s really cold f) Did N igel e n jo y th e film ?
e) W h a t frightens you? f) It's a lo n g w ay from here g) Are y ou g oin g to L on d on n e x t
f) W h o do you talk to m ost? g) T h ere aren 't any/There are n o sum m er?
g) W h o do you sit n e x t to in batteries in your h) Is M aria g oin g to L o n d o n n e x t
English? h) It appears th a t w e're sum m er?
h) W h a t helps you study? i) C an I borrow your m obile ph on e?
Gram m ar 30 j) C ould you len d m e you r m obile
3 a) I haven't e) I d id n't
b) 1 am f) I ca n 't l a) a t f) in p h o n e?
c) I did I do b) on g) over a) You've got
g)
d) I will h) he isn ’t c) to h) on b) w o n 't th ey
d) in i) on c) Let's go
Gram m ar 28 e) below i) in d) 're n o t leaving
l a) I haven't f) th ey can 2 a) / f) / e) h a v e n ’t th ey
b) I do g) I w o n 't b) in g) on f) c a n 't you
c) I am h) she h a sn 't c) in h) / g) You w eren 't
d) she d id n't i) it is d) at i) in h) do you
e) he has j) she d id n't e) by/beside j) over/through i) w eren 't th ey
2 a) Have we Is there 3 a) in inside j) d id n 't forget
f) f)
b) D o n 't you g) Has she b) on g) on a) read a book which she really
c) Did she h) H aven't you c) on h) ou t b) w ho visited m e brou gh t m e a
d) D o n 't you i) Isn ’t there d) in i) on c) th a t I stayed in was ch eaper
e) Is he i) Did you e) on j) at th a n
3 a) aren't we d o n 't th ey 4 a) in e) on d) friend w hose bike I borrow ed
f)
b) have you do you b) at to w anted it
g) f)
c) aren ’t you h) d o n 't you c) in in e) to bu y th e vase (th at) I saw in
g)
d) w ill you h a s n ’t he d) in h) over th e
i)
e) isn 't he should I f) w ho sings in th e group has got
j) 5 a) in e) op posite
g) I m et a girl w hose b ro th er is in
4 a) Paul doesn't like football, does he? b) n e x t to f) near
my
b) You've got a sister, h a v en 't you? c) to g) on
h) th a t w e're tak in g leaves
c) You h a v e n 't d one your d) insid e h) on
i) w ho k n o ck ed at th e d oor was
hom ew ork, have you? 6 at
a) e) on/over selling
d) You sat n e x t to Ellen, d id n't you? b) over on
f) j) w h ich I saw w ith Luke was
e) The guests h a v e n 't arrived, have c) near on
g) 8 1) / 7) she 13) he
they? under in
d) h) who th em
f) Your n am e is Jo h n , isn 't it? 2) 8) 14) at
G ram m ar 31 3) to 9) m u ch 15) /
g) Your n am e isn 't Jo h n , is it?
h) I d id n't leave m y w allet o n th e 4) T h en 10) you 16) it
l a) in order to f) because
so
desk, did I? 5) 11) / 17) so
b) too g) A lthou gh
6) w ho 12) th at
i) W illiam h a sn 't g ot m arried, has c) th ey 're h) in
he?
d) w hose i) so Gram m ar 32
j) This bo ok is by M artin Aimless, e) for In spite o f
i) a) one day
isn 't it?
2 a) but we decided b) Nowadays
5 a) 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) 1
b) used to w ork c) T h is m o rn in g
e) 2 f) 2 g) 1 h) 2 c) such a d) by
6 a) w hat the time is d) th e rain e) th e day after tom orrow
b) w hat this m eans e) abo u t spend ing f) D uring
c) how m u ch th is costs f) T h ere are g) afterwards
d) w hat tim e th e m useum opens g) d o n ’t/w on't feel h) on
e) if/w hether I'm in th e rig h t seat h) It’s strange
a) we h a d /h ad h a d lunch, we went for
f) w here A sham Street is i) en o u g h m on ey a coffee
g) if/whether this is Trafalgar Square i) you m in d b) on tim e for lessons
h) w hen this bus leaves 3 B 2) C 3) C 4) a
1) c) u n til 8 .0 0
5) d 6) d 7) b 8) a th ree m o n th s ago
Gram m ar 29 d)
9) d 10) b 11) c 12) b e) at 1 2 .0 0
l a) there e) there, there 13) d 14) a 15) c
b) It's It's
f) first o f Jan u ary
f) day after tom orrow
c) th ey 're their 4 a) on f) on g)
g) h) for th ree
its h) its b) beside g) at
d)
c) to h) op posite a) on e) At
2 a) There, It e) It at inside
d) i) b) ago f) now adays
b) It, it f) T here, it near
e) i) at c) later g) in
c) It, there g) It, there, there
d) during h) afterwards
d) It
287
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

a) I go to the seaside in summer. a) - b) a d) T h e present (that/w hich) m y

b) I ’ve b e en a t th is sch o o l sin ce c) an, - d) a, an friends
1997. e) a, - f) e) is th e capital o f
c) G eorge had a b a th and th e n g) - a f) T h e first lesson tom orrow is
w ashed his hair. is an g) th e p h o n e for you
a)
d) D in a was a t m y h ouse u n til b) in a h) T h e film (that/w hich) we saw
lO.OO./Dina d id n 't leave m y Parking is last n ig h t
c)
h o u se u n til 1 0 .0 0 .
d) Fabio is at a) 1 - 2 The
e) T h e tra in arrived o n tim e. to th e statio n on 1
e) b) - 2 th e
f) I'll arrive by 2 .0 0 .
c) 1 T he 2 -

g) Paul tried hard b u t in th e end he G ram m ar 35 d) 1 T he 2 -

gave up./he gave up in th e end. l the th e, th e
a) f) e) 1 - 2 th e
h) I w asn 't in tim e to say goodbye th e, th e a 1
b) g) f) T he 2 -
to Lisa. an, th e a
c) h) g) 1 T he 2 -

5 a) last e) one/som e d) An i) a h) 1 - 2 th e
b) D uring f) on e) th e, th e j) th e, th e
c) After g) afterw ards Gram m ar 36
a) plays the piano
d) for h) at 1 a) no d) Som e
b) help th e
c) bike is th e b) each e) eith er
G ram m ar 33 c) N ot on e f) b o th tyres
d) is/has an a p p o in tm en t at th e
1 a) How much e) m u ch
not one
e) was ab o u t th e life 2 a) d) all, each
b) are f) How m an y
f) was scored b y th e b) no e) none
c) som e g) a
a) The, the, the e) th e , th e, a c) All f) eith er
d) som e h) was
b) th e, - f) th e, a, th e 3 a) Every dog in the garden was
2 a) an e) m a n y /-
c) a, th e g) A, a, a barking.
b) a f) a th e, th e h) th e, th e
d) b) N ot a single person cam e to the
c) som e g) som e m eetin g.
d) h) any/m any G ram m ar 34 and 35 m ixed c) N one o f m y friends has got a car.
3 a) give you som e advice a) The, a, - - , th e, an, - d) N either o f these chairs is
b) any clea n trousers b) - , th e, a - , the, a co m fortab le.
c) T h ere isn 't m u ch c) a, - , th e a, th e, th e e) T here were n o boys in th e class.
d) needs w ashing d) th e, a, a th e, th e, th e f) All we w ant to do is listen to a
e) w asn 't in th e b o o k e) T he, th e, th e a, th e few CDs.
Could you get a lo a f o f bread from g) B oth books are interestin g.
a)
4 a) som e w ood
the baker’s? 4 a) None o f these books is/are
b) T h ere was
b) M ilk is good for ch ild ren . interesting.
c) any
c) J o h n is at w ork at th e m o m en t. b) All you have left is ten m inutes.
d) a ch ick en
d) W e travelled to H ungary b y car. c) N either o f th e h o tels was/were
e) was very useful
e) Have you got a b ro th er or sister? suitable.
f) How m an y
f) T h e war b etw een th e tw o d) Not a single person replied to
g) It's green
co u n tries was th e lon g est in m y letter.
h) th ey 're o n th e ir way
history. e) B o th Paul and his b roth er David
i) n o ise
g) W h o was th e first astro n au t w ho are ill.
5 a) water w alked o n th e m o o n ? All o f th e team played well.
f)
b) news h) T h e N ile is th e lon g est river in Every h ouse in th e street was
g)
c) glasses th e world. searched (by th e police).
d) luggage
a) We travelled there on the train. h) Som e o f th e qu estion s in th e test
e) eggs w ere difficult/hard.
b) T h is o n e is th e largest./This is
f) scissors
loaf
th e largest size. 5 a) 1 b) 2 c) 2 d) 1
g)
h) p o lice officer/policem an/ c) C lara is a (professional) singer. e) 1 f) 2 g) 2 h) 2
d) T h e unem p loy ed o ften feel
p o licew om an
depressed. G ram m ar 37
G ram m ar 34 e) A nna is learn in g to play th e a) a large old green plastic bag
guitar. b) tw o square w ooden tables
1 a) H ave you ever visited the United
M ike w orks in an office. c) a beautiful red silk dress
Kingdom?
O n our trip, we visited M arie com es from France. d) a pair o f an tiq u e silver jugs
b)
h) David is still at work. e) a sm all plastic bow l
C an terbu ry C a th e d ral.
Love is a w on derfu l th in g . a) A h) - o) a f) a lo n g w ind in g co u n try road
c)
Pets are n o t p erm itted in th is b) a i) ia p) an g) som e dirty old footb all boots
d)
a j) h) a lo n g yellow c o tto n skirt
h o tel. c) i) -- q) -
A rab bit is a sm all wild furry d) k) th e r) i) a glass o f cold freshly squeezed
e)
an im al w ith lon g e) 1) a s) orange juice
ears./R abbits are sm all wild furry f) th e m ) th e t) 2 a) boiling f) fantastic
an im als w ith lo n g ears. g) n) a b) gigan tic g) w orried
New York is in th e U n ited States a) Darrel was the c) tired h) w arm er
o f A m erica. b) you hav e a dog at d) co ol i) bored
c) a ch em istry e) ex citin g j) interested

288
 GRAMMAR ANSWERS

3 a) The old couple lived happily a) just as, as f) We called o n m y au n t o n her

together. b) th e m ost birthday.
b) You've w orked hard. c) more/less, th a n , did g) I'm afraid th a t w e've ru n ou t of
c) Chris and Paul w alk slowly. d) m ore eggs.
d) G eorgia plays th e p ian o well. e) th a n , th e h) M o n ica w ill call for you at 6.3 0 .
e) Sue dances gracefully. f) th e least i) N o bo d y u n d erstoo d w hat I was
f) Kate isn 't w ell/doesn't feel w ell. g) just as, as g ettin g at.
g) M ich ael skates w onderfully. h) less, th a n i) I c a n ’t put up w ith so m u ch air
h) M ary w rites carefully. p o llu tio n .
a) biggest i) harder
i) Alex slept badly.
b) greatest j) - G ram m ar 40
j) A nn co m p leted th e course k) fitter
c) -
successfully. d) - 1 a) wash e) try
1) -
a) happy fast b) loo k f) fill
f) e) - m) -
b) well quite c) set g> turned
g) f) fatter n) -
c) hardly hard d) called h) dropped
h) g) sm allest o) w ider
d) good i) terrible h) - 2 a) Turn the lights o f f when you leave
e) ill i) extrem ely a) talk more slowly the school.
5 a) Peter has been working very hard. b) isn 't as frig h ten in g b) Ja ck tu rn ed up half-w ay throu g h
b) M y sister b o u g h t m e a lovely c) th e b est co ok th e lesson.
blue w oollen sweater. d) as fast as c) We can put you up for a week.
c) T his b o ok I'm reading is e) less e co n o m ica l th a n d) M arta is g ettin g o n w ell in her
excellent/ extrem ely good . m ore ex citin g th a n English class.
f)
d) David felt bad because he'd as hard as e) Lidia grew up in Uruguay.
g)
shouted at his m other. h) is m ore interested f) How do you tu rn o n th e
e) Everyone in th e team played is older th a n com puter/turn th e co m p u ter on ?
i)
w ell. m ore th a n m e g) C arol looked up th e dates/
j)
f) Too m u ch exercise can m ake you looked th e dates up in an
feel tired . G ram m ar 39 en cy clop ed ia.
g) Paula felt happy w hen her 1 3 b) 5 c) 8 h) Surfing is a great sport. W h e n
a)
exam s were over. e) 4 f) 2 did y ou take it up?
g) 6
h) Hans has never arrived late at 2 at 3 a) 3 b) 8 c) 1 d) 6
a) g) up
school. for h) o n e) 4 f) 5 g) 7 h) 3
b)
i) O n e b o xer h it th e oth er really to i) up
c) G ram m ar 41
hard right o n th e ch in . d) dow n j) up
j) I'm n o t really interested in th is e) over k) to 1 a) better e) best
car. for 1) ou t b) each f) for
f)
c) hard g) n o
Gram m ar 38 3 a) didn't live up to d) som e h) is
1 as tasty as b) drop in o n
a) 2 1) d 2) a 4) a
c) run ou t o f 3) c
b) th e m ost in terestin g 5) d 6) d 7 )b 8) c
oldest d) get o n w ith
c) 9) b 10) a 11) b 12) d
th an e) cau g h t up w ith
d) 13) c 14) b 15) c
worse f) lo o k in g forw ard to
e)
g) keep up w ith 3 a) o f these
f) tallest
h) cu t dow n o n b) u n til
g) as hard as
4 a) Brian takes after his mother. c) sm ok in g is allow ed
h) worse
b) W e've run ou t o f food! d) som e advice
i) lon ger th an
c) M ike and Tom d o n 't get o n well e) as lo n g as
i) m ore qu ietly
w ith each other. f) since
2 a) the longest g) classroom
d) Je a n is very good at d ealin g w ith
b) less en tertain in g h) o n fo o t
faster th a n people.
c) i) an y further
th e h o ttest e) T h e han d lebars o n m y bike need
d) j) in tim e
better th a n seeing to.
e)
ju st as tall as f) Ju lia was very ill, b u t she's got 4 a) I can put you up.
f)
m ore d ifficult over it now. b) C arlos c a n 't pu t up w ith th e
g)
as large as g) W h a t exactly are you g ettin g at? traffic an y m ore.
h)
h) Paul's new sch o o l d id n 't live up c) Peter is g ettin g o n w ell at
i) n o t as big as/just as big as/bigger
th an to his exp ectation s. university.
5 a) The central heating system needs d) I’ll clear up th e ro om if y ou do
1) th e w orst
seeing to. th e w ash in g up.
3 a) as good a runner as D avid (is) e) W e're h e ad in g for M adrid.
tallest (person) in th e class b) Let's drop in o n Ju lia w hile w e're
b) f) W h y d o n 't y ou loo k up th is
m ore th a n m e/than I have here.
c) word/look th is w ord up in th e
lon ger th a n J a n e ’s (hair) c) W e're h ead in g for Paris.
d) d iction ary ?
noisiest student in th e school d) O ur h o tel ro om loo ks ou t
e) g) Ja n e takes after h er father.
onto/over th e m ain road!
f) as in terestin g as th is o n e (is) h) Kelly's fath er is try ing to give up
e) Tw o ch ild ren started playing,
g) go faster th a n this/go any faster sm oking.
eat as m u ch as Andrew (did) and th e n th e o th ers jo in ed in.
h)

289
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

1) / 7) ago 13) after g) to go to th e cin em a w ith m e a) Dick was bored with his work.
2) the 8) m u ch 14) after h) to get m arried b) T h is tow n rem inds m e of
3) it 9) th e 15) up i) to see you later Glasgow.
4) a 10) m ore 16) on ce j) to do th is ev en in g c) Sara know s a lo t abo u t biology.
5) was 11) one 17) th e 4 seems d) I'm loo kin g for th e art gallery.
a) f) refused
6) ✓ 12) / 18) ✓ e) I'm fon d o f cream cakes.
b) h ate g) ch o se
a) the f) - k) th e c) w ant h) like f) Sue is m arried to Adrian.
b) -
g) lot 1) th e d) asked i) decided g) D in a is kind to anim als.
c) - h) m u ch m ) th e e) hopes agreed h) Ugh! T his cake tastes o f rubber!
j)
d) th e i) th e n) a i) Lisa is jealous o f you!
5 a) W hat do you intend to do?
e) for J) any o) eith er i) I feel excited abo u t our new
b) I ca n 't bear g ettin g up early!
house!
7 a ) a single c) 1 exp ect to see you in th e
b) n o ch eese m orn in g . a) 'm angry with
c) rich are d) Susan prom ised to be back at b) ready
d) beau tifu lly 6 .0 0 . c) good at
e) th e w orst film e) Pat learn ed to drive w h en h e was d) felt upset about
f) u n til young. e) dream ed about
f) I offered to h elp Jo e. f) rely on
8 a) much, than e) all, b o th
b) th e, th a n f) as, as g) E llen c o u ld n ’t afford th e ticket. g) bike to Jack
h) Tom refused to help. h) afraid of
c) th e, a g) u n til, by
d) som e, m u ch h) best, ever a) explain, to
G ram m ar 43 b) belo ng ed to
9 a) I'm really interested in travel.
l a) to lock e) to op en c) depends o n
b) K ate's b ro th er is a d o cto r.
b) to have f) to take d) paid for
c) I ate so m e food w ith Ja ck , and
c) talking g) sky-diving e) apologized, for
after th a t I w ent h o m e.
d) bein g h) starting f) rem ind , o f
d) M ilk is good for you.
2 a) you fancy g) succeeded in
e) C an y ou give m e so m e ad vice?
b) (th at) h e'd h) w ait for
f) I've looked in th e b o x.
E veryth ing is broken , I'm afraid. c) I suggest/How about a) 4 b) 6 c) 5 d) 2
g) T h ey w ill h av e fin ished th e new d) keeps in terru p tin g e) 7 f) 1 g) 3
h o sp ita l by th e en d of e) Do/Would you m in d
May./They w o n 't have fin ished f) Im agin e bein g Gram m ar 45
th e new h o sp ital u n til th e end g) d enied w riting a) anyone f) Som eone
o f May. h) c a n 't help b) a n y th in g g) an y th in g
h) T here's a p o lice officer/ 3 a) chose e) denied c) n o th in g h) No one
p olicem an/ policew om an w aiting b) afford ad m itted d) so m eo ne i) anyw here
f)
outside. c) m in d decided e) a n y th in g j) som ew here
g)
i) I co m e to class o n fo o t. d) m ean t h) fan cy a) do anything
j) Your h air is very beautiful. 4 try b) know s M ary b etter th an I do
a) e) d enied
b) p retended practise c) was late yesterday
G ram m ar 42 f)
d) nothing/ no work
c) exp ect g) im ag in e
1 a) Jim can't afford to to to the cinema m ean t refused e) ask you so m eth in g
d) h)
twice a week. f) here drinks
b) David w ishes to leave th e room . 5 a) forget e) kept
g) replied w h en I phoned/answered
c) / b) m eans f) tried
th e p h on e
d) I'd really like to go sw im m ing c) ad m it g) rem em ber
h) so m eo n e going to drive us there
o n Saturday. d) stop h) stand/bear
i) I go I m ake friends
e) E m m a p reten ded to leav e, but j) called for you th is m orn ing
G ram m ar 44
w aited ou tside.
l a) from e) about 3 a) enjoy yourselves
f) /
b) to for b) behave ourselves
g) M y bike seem s to have f)
c) for on c) h u rt m yself
so m e th in g w rong w ith it. g)
d) to d) express herself
h) T h e d irecto r refused to answ er
e) in tro d u ce m yself
H elen's p h o n e call. 2 a) laughs at
f) blam e yourself
2 a) loves f) co n tin u ed b) succeeds in
g) talk, m yself
b) afford g) bear c) apologizes for
h) cu t h im self
c) h ap p en h) offered d) depends o n
e) know s abo u t 4 a) There’s som ething in the box.
d) exp e cted i) p retended
belo n g s to b) E veryone was dancing.
e) learn ed j) prefers f)
rem ind s, of c) S o m eth in g has annoyed/is
g)
3 a) to let m e leave early a n n o y in g m e.
b) singing/to sing for an ho u r 3 a) right about
d) T here's n o th in g to eat./We've
w ith o u t stop pin g b) good at
g ot n o th in g to eat.
c) (th at) y ou 'v e passed th e exam c) fam ous for
e) T here's n o o n e in th e office.
d) to do w ell/that h e 'll do well d) interested in
f) Everybody likes Ju lia.
e) to do for th e su m m er e) an n oy ed w ith
g) You can have a n y th in g you
f) clearin g up m y room f) kind to
like./A nything you like you can
g) frig h ten ed o f
have.
h) Now here is better th an hom e.
290
 GRAMMAR ANSWERS

5 a) Everybody/Everyone f) a tin op ener f) Ju lia's read ing 'A Portrait o f a

b) so m eth in g g) are our n eig h bo u rs' Lady' b y H enry Jam es.
c) So m eth in g h) o n th e k itch en 3 a) 'First o f all, w ho is going to carry
d) som eone/som ebody 5 a) There are two bus stops near my the suitcase?' asked Emilie.
e) them selves house. b) Kate said sh e'd be o n tim e, b u t I
f) O ne b) O ur cat sleeps all day in its bed. d id n 't b elieve her.
g) E verything c) Have y ou m et Ja n e 's sister? c) Ja m es said th a t h e 'd m issed th e
h) N oth ing d) Creatures like th ese live at th e train, g ot lost, and b e en arrested.
i) yourself b o tto m o f th e sea. d) W h e n th e bell rang, our teach er
j) m yself e) T his b o o k is m in e. stood up and said, 'S to p w riting,
6 a) Someone spoke to me, but I can't f) T h o se are tw o friends o f m y please.'
remember their name. fa th e r’s. e) 'O n th e o th er h an d , w e could go
b) Evervthing in th e garden has g) Everybody's draw ings were to th e cin em a, c o u ld n 't w e?' said
been growing a lot lately. b e tter th a n ours. David.
c) Carol d id n't do anvthing/did h) Are th ese gloves yours or f) 'G o o d m o rn in g ,' said T in a. 'H ow
n o th in g vesterdav. mine?/Are th ese you r gloves or do you feel tod ay?'
d) There isn 't anvone/There's n o m in e? g) If I w ere you, I'd ask for som e
on e w aiting for you. i) T h e h o u se stand s o n its ow n at help, or perhaps start again.
e) Pete and Kate en jo y ed th e en d o f th e street. h) T h e old stad iu m was even tu ally
them selves at th e partv. j) 1 n o tice d th ese shoes in a shop d em o lish ed : very few people
f) You fill in an ap p licatio n form , window . w ent there, and it was b e co m in g
and th e n you w ait for an dangerous.
answer./One fills in an Gram m ar 47
ap p licatio n form , and th e n on e 1 a) instead o f e) excep t G ram m ar 49
w aits for an answer. b) eith er f) sin ce a) deciding g) th eir
g) We need to do th e shopping. c) also g) b o th b) sw im m ing h) b eau tifu l
There isn 't a n v th in g in th e d) su ch as h) yet c) p h o to i) receipt
fridge. 2 a) Debra visited the castle and the d) q u estio n j) b e g in n in g
museum, too. e) / k) p sy ch iatrist
Gram m ar 46 f) know n 1) successful
b) E veryone was o n tim e excep t Jill.
1 a) hers e) theirs h) my c) I said it was rain in g bu t, in fact, 2 a) phone, received
b) her ow n f) your i) our it isn 't! b) w histle, field
c) yours g) his j) its d) Karen c o u ld n 't play ten n is, sin ce c) successfully, physics
d) m in e sh e ’d h u rt h e r leg. d) know , knife
2 a) Tell Monica it's Elena's turn, not e) In m y view, sm ok in g is bad for e) th ief, leaving
hers. you. f) qu estion , liste n in g
b) Alice's younger b roth er's called f) I ate th e ch o co la te cake as w ell g) b e g in n in g , view
Bill. as th e apple pie. h) co lu m n s, b eau tifu lly
c) Tim 's sandw iches were tastier g) D an iel played in goal in stead o f controlling u p settin g
a) g)
th a n ours. his brother. th ick en in g h o o k in g
b) b)
d) T he film ’s b e g in n in g is good bu t h) In co n clu sio n , I'd like to th a n k gripping w riting
c) i)
its en d ing is weak. th e head teacher, A nn Coles. d) ch o o sin g im provin g
j)
e) Are th ese keys yours or hers? 2) b
1) c 3) a 4) d e) flying k) sw im m ing
f) Barbara fills in th e p a tien ts'
5) d 6) c 7) b 8) d f) m akin g 1) rid ing
record cards at th e doctor's.
9) a 10) b 4 Dear Becky,
g) W h en it's raining, everybody's
raincoats get wet. a) except e) instead I’m sorry th a t I h a v e n ’t w ritten to
h) T he m anager's assistant reads all b) as w ell as this f) actually you for so lon g . I ’m afraid I've been
th e cu stom ers’ letters. c) P ersonally g) such as very busy at sch oo l, and I h a v en 't
d) b o th h) eith er had m u ch tim e for w ritin g letters.
i) Your sister's dog runs faster th a n
ours. 5 b) 9 3 d) 7 Last w eek 1 fin ish ed m y
a) c)
j) One's our teach er's car and th e e) 1 f) 4 10 h) 2 e x am in atio n s, so now I'm g ettin g
g)
8 ready to go o n holiday.
o th e r’s a visitor's. i) j) 6
I was w on d erin g w h eth er you w ould
3 a) football boot, cheese sandwich
b) shop window, co at pocket
Gram m ar 48 like to co m e to stay for a few days?
l a ) 1 b) 2 c )2 d) 2 You ca n m eet m y friends, and we
c) garden gate, bicy cle ligh t could all go sw im m ing. T h e w eather
d) d epartm en t store, co u n try e) 3 f) 1
is really good now h ere in Italy, and
cottage 2 a) We're meeting Uncle D avid on I'm sure you w ill e n jo y yourself.
e) fire en gin e, rock singer Tuesday evening a t eight. Best w ishes,
f) post office, pen cil sharpener b) Last February I m et Mrs Silvia
g) footb all ground, sch o o l report W ilk in so n for th e first tim e.
h) shop assistant, railw ay statio n c) Tim lives in th e so u th o f France a) tomorrow
near C an nes. b) W ednesday
4 a) my sister's ad vertisem en t
d) W e saw a great film at th e ABC c)
b) are Sam 's d) neig h b o u r
c) friend o f m in e called 'T h e R em ains o f th e Day'.
e) W e w en t to a party at Mrs e) th ro u g h
d) m y favourite television grateful
H arrisons’ h ouse o n New Year's f)
e) are your teachers' n ecessary
Eve. g)

291
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

h) d isappoin ted G ram m ar 51

i) w eather/w hether
1 a) hers e) a n y th in g
i) rem em ber
b) to h elp f) spend ing
k) library
c) in g) at
1) answ er
d) as h) a n y th in g
6 a) debt i) au tu m n
2 1) b 2) d 3) d 4) a
b) e x h ib itio n k) answ er
5) c 6) b 7) a 8) d
c) h ig h 1) d aughter
9) c 10) b 11) b 12) d
d) k nife m) h alf
13) a 14) c 15) c
e) lam b n) ligh t
f) p sy ch olo g ist o) salm on 3 a) except J e f f
receip t w hole b) o n e know s
g) P)
h) w hat w ould c) th e tw in s'
q)
i) y a ch t r) w riting d) refused to carry
e) rely o n
f) a friend of
G ram m ar 50 g) began/started snow ing
1 a) 4 b) 1 c) 9 d) 3 h) closin g
e) 7 f) 2 g) 6 h) 5 4 1) / 7) b een 13) th ey
i) 8 2) that 8) got 14) /
2 a) stare f) qu ite 3) take 9) 15) have
b) practise g) aloud 4) me 10) for 16) w ith
c) th o ro u g h h) to o 5) it 11) or 17) it
d) advice i) latter 6) for 12) it
e) fare j) loose 5 a) for i) forg o tten
3 a) 3 b) - c) 3 d) - b) her j) even
e) 3 f) 3 g) - h) 3 c) of k) so m eth in g
i) - i) 3 k) 3 1) - d) n o one/nobody 1) E ither
m) - n) - o) - e) begun/started m) kept
f) hers n) saw
4 Dear Silvia,
T h an k s for you r letter and you r g) seem ed o) So m eon e
h) w ith
in v ita tio n to Italy! I'v e never
travelled abroad before, and I'm 6 Dear David,
really loo k in g forw ard to staying It was great to hear from you after
w ith you and y ou r fam ily. I've so lon g . I en jo y ed h earin g all your
spoken to m y parents and th ey 'v e new s. I d id n 't realize th a t y ou 'd
agreed. T h ey say th e y 're g oin g to sp en t a year abroad. You m ust have
p h o n e so o n to discuss th e had a really good tim e in G reece.
arrangem ents. I've decided to go th ere n e x t
I've d ecided to h av e so m e Italian sum m er. Perhaps we could go
lessons so th a t I ca n practise w h en I together.
co m e to Italy. I ’d like you to w rite I've had a fan tastic year at college.
so m e sim ple sen ten ces for m e. T h e w ork is harder th a n th e w ork
Please n o te m y new address. We we did at sch oo l, bu t it's m ore
m oved last w eek and n o w I ’ve g ot a in terestin g . I'm studying Business
m u ch bigger bed room . A d m in istration and C o m p u ter
B est w ishes, S cien ce at th e m o m en t. I've also
Becky m ade lots o f new friends.
I'm th in k in g o f co m in g to B ristol for
5 a) vegetable g) in terestin g
a few days to visit m y sister. W ould
b) language h) b iscu it
you like to m eet? You could show
c) queue i) ceilin g
m e th e sights and we could talk
d) receive i) d ifferent
abo u t our old sch ooldays.
e) people k) know ledge
W h y d o n 't y ou give m e a rin g and
f) beau tifu l 1) in d ep en d en t
we co u ld discuss it. It w ou ld be
6 a) eight h) none w on d erfu l to see you again.
b) bean i) p iece Best w ishes,
c) ch eck j) pair Ellen
d) flow er k) w rite
a) Instead o f f) as well
e) w h o le 1) rows
b) every single g) yours
f) m uscle m) so
c) in fact h) herself
g) know n) stair
d) In co n clu sio n i) on , in
e) o f my, m in e i) even

292
 Vocabulary answers

Vocabulary 2 3 a) unusually d) sea floor

b) surprisingly e) stu d en t loan
l a) uninteresting c) In terestin g ly f) m eat dish
b) disadvantage d) successfully g) sto m ach ach e
c) u n fortu n ately e) b eau tifu lly
d) im p atient f) th o ro u g h ly 6 a) afford to f) teach m e how to
e) disappears g) aw fully b) likely to g) slow to
f) unem ployed h) un su ccessfu lly c) hard to h) forget to
g) disagree i) u n necessarily d) h o p e to i) designed to
h) m isunderstanding j) obviou sly e) try n o t to i) w illin g to

2 a) overslept e) rewrite 4 a) uncom fortable

b) underw ear f) overcooked b) in d ep en d en t Vocabulary 5
c) overcoat g) renew c) reusable
d) outplayed h) underpaid d) d isap p o in tm en t l a) high d) pass g) in
e) relatio n sh ip b) spare e) tell h) lose
3 a) friendship f) unselfish c) tim e f) on
b) foreigner
g) u n h ea lth y
c) ch ild h o od 2 a) m ade e) burst h) paid
h) u n co n tro lla b le
d) stewardess b) had f) told i) cau gh t
i) u n sh rin k ab le
e) teenager c) to o k g) g ot j) lost
j) inex p erien ced
f) spoonful d) spent
g) n eig h bo u rh oo d 5 a) receipt e) M arriage
3 a) mess e) m ad
h) handfu l b) p o litician f) ap p licatio n
b) b reath f) tem per
i) m ach in ery c) d epth g) know ledge
c) alon e g) secret
i) bo ok let d) p atien ce h) exp lan atio n
d) d ifference h) leaf
4 a) inhabitants 6 a) theft e) angry
4 a) a bird e) a pig
b) boredom b) b e lief f) bravery
b) a bat f) a picture
c) building c) su spicion g) v an ity
c) life g) rain
d) acco m m od atio n d) len g th h) ability
d) a cu cu m ber h) houses
e) refusal
f) actor 5 a) life e) tim e
g) em ployee Vocabulary 4 b) soul f) sound
h) im ag in ation c) wide dow n
l a) Have give k) have g)
i) cooker f) round th e n
d) h)
b) do take 1) take
i) ad vertisem ent g)
c) have h) m ake m) give 6 a) have an early ight
5 a) shortness f) thoroughness d) m ake i) do n) take b) get ready
b) friend liness g) happiness e) give i) do o) m ake c) take a day off
c) darkness h) silliness d) h av e fun
d) lon elin ess i) th in n ess 2 a) 4 b) 8 c) 5
e) h av e n o th in g to do
e) tiredness j) sickness d) 1 e) 10 f) 3
f) take it easy
g) 6 h) 9 i) 2
6 a) heroic e) dangerous i) 7
b) m usical f) foolish
hom eless g) rainy 3 a) protect, skin Vocabulary 6
c)
d) m oth erly b) clear, space
1 a) footpath e) h aircu t
c) appear, screen
b) paper clip f) sunglasses
d) return, call
c) sh o elace g) h ead ach e
Vocabulary 3 e) ren t, flat
d) tim etab le h) lam p post
f) fight, suvival
1 a) tired f) co nfu sin g g) take, m in u te 2 science fiction
a)
b) d isappoin ting g) exh au stin g h) co n tro l, b ehaviou r b) w alking stick
c) frig htening h) interested c) sch o o l report
d) em barrassed i) surprised 4 a) especially f) hig h ly
d) alarm clock
e) bored j) an n o y in g b) ptoporly g) perfectly
e) a ir-co n d itio n in g
c) co m p letely h) latgety
f) b irth d ay party
2 a) unlikely f) dislike d) greatly i) deeply
g) cen tral h e a tin g
b) shortage g) sleepy e) really j) stro n g ly
h) w ash in g m a ch in e
c) im possible h) unusual
d) p h otograph y i) ch eerful 5 a) batik account
3 a) bottle top
e) useful j) kindness b) bargain price
b) shop w ind ow
c) space sh u ttle
c) b icy cle pum p

293
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

d) sch o o l en tra n ce Vocabulary 8 a) m ood f) heart

e) b a th ro o m m irror b) T han ks g) co n scien ce
f) telev isio n screen 1 a cushion e) cu rtain s c) trou ble h) tem per
g) p o ck et m o n ey b socket f) carp et d) v o ice i) hand
h) d oor han d le c rad iator g) drawer e) tears j) death
d pillow h) sofa
a) hairdrier Positive Negative
b) d ishw asher 2 a b) c) 6 d) 1 Kind Unpleasant
c) stain rem over e f) g) 8 h) 7 cheerful lazy
d) fire extin g u ish er clever tense
e) p en cil sh arpen er 3 a ila ss - window generous m ean
f) b o ttle op en er b c lo th - tow el
relaxed m iserable
g) law n m ow er c d oor - gate
hard-w orking stupid
h) food m ixer d ground - floor
i) w ater h eater e library - bookcase
j) co ffee m aker f w all - fen ce Vocabulary 10
fireplace - ch im n e y
5 a) day-dream er stair - step 1 a) husband f) single
b) shopkeep er b) couple g) friendship
c) su n b ath er 4 a) a t hom e f) cupboard ch ild ren h) elder
c)
d) b ab y sitter b) stairs g) at, in tw in i) engaged
d)
e) w eigh tlifter c) w ash-basin h) a bath alike
e) j) housew ife
f) fire-fighter d) ceilin g i) housew ork
g) b a n k m an ag er e) cook, co ok er j) cellar 2 a) relations/relatives
h) h o lid ay m ak er b) acq u ain tan ce
5 a) bedroom f) dishw asher c) greeting
6 a) income f) u p brin gin g b) arm ch air g) keyhole en gag em ent
d)
b) upset g) ou tdoors c) w ash-basin h) ashtray celebratio n
e)
c) ro u n d ab o u t h) outskirts d) dustbin i) dow nstairs m arriage
f)
d) d ow nstairs i) U nderground e) flow erbed i) bookcase resem blance
g)
e) ov ercoat j) dow npour h) d eath
6 a) p u t d) takes g) looks
b) m ove e) turn h) drop 3 adults e) old
a)
c) get f) fin ish
Vocabulary 7 b) dead f) young
c) w edding g) relatives
a) second-hand d) d aughter h) birthday
b) c a n 't afford it Vocabulary 9
c) pay y ou back 4 a) 6 b) 9 c) 10 d) 8
1 a) angry f) bored
d) save up e) 1 f) 7 g) 5 h) 2
b) em barrassed g) ch eerful
e) in d ebt i) 3 j) 4
c) p o lite h) bad-tempered
f) a n n u a l in co m e
d) lazy i) upset
in a sale 5 a) 5 b) 4 c) 7 d) 1
g) e) sen sible j) nervous
h) be w ell-off e) 8 f) 6 g) 2 h) 3
2 a) sm ile e) cry
2 a) pocket money 6 a) in e) after
b) no d f) ch eer
b) ca sh desk b) away f) ou t
c) co m p lain g) shake h is head
c) cu t price c) o n and off g) against
d) sh ou t h) w histle
d) b o o k sh o p d) on h) over
e) d ep a rtm en t store a) unreliable 7 a) grandparents f) nephew
f) sh op assistan t b) im p atien t
b) un cle g) niece
g) credit card c) u n in terested
h) carrier bag c) au n t h) on ly child
d) d ish o n est
d) stepson i) foreigner
e) u n frien d ly
3 a) earns e) b y ch eq u e e) sister-in-law i) stranger
f) in ex p erien ced
b) w ages f) receip t
g) im p o lite
c) borrow ed g) ch an g e
h) u n h elp fu l Vocabulary 11
d) cash h) owe
i) in co n sid erate
4 a) 6 b) 5 c) 7 d) 2 e) 4 f) 1 i) u n co-o p erativ e 1 a) w aist e) shoulder
g) 8 h) 3 b) wrist f) ankle
4 a) disappointed e) asham ed c) th u m b g) toes
5 a) packet e) b o x b) an n oy ed f) exh au sted d) nails h) forehead
b) tube f) bar c) terrified g) jealous
c) tin g) b u n ch d) glad h) fascin atin g 2 1) C 2) B 3 )B 4 )A
d) ca rto n h) lo af 5) D 6) C 7) D 8) B
5 a) longing for e) fan cy 9) A 10) B 11) D 12) C
6 1) C 2) A 3) D 4) C b) give up f) fed up w ith 13) A 14) D 15) C
5) B 6) D 7 )A 8) D c) put m e off g) are fon d of
9) A 10) B 11) C 12) A d) get o n m y h) let m e down
13) C 14) B 15) D nerves
 VO CA BU LARY ANSWERS

3 a) fit e) suit 3 a) information e) reservation a) rural e) in tern a tio n a l

b) dress up f) disguise b) runw ay f) ca n cella tio n b) n eig h b o u rin g f) local
c) wear g) put o n c) departure g) airport c) isolated g) crow ded
d) look h) go w ith d) lan d in g h) tak eoff d) capital h) u rban

4 a) sleeve d) cap g) blouse 4 a) 7 b) 3 c) 10 d) 8 a) playground e) fo o tp ath

b) dress e) shorts h) sock e) 1 f) 4 g) 9 h) 2 b) crossroads f) roadside
c) suit f) skirt i) 6 j) 5 c) ro u n d ab ou t g) outskirts
d) car park h) footb rid g e
5 a) tongue e) arm s i) h an d 5 a) ancient f) su n tan n ed
b) hair f) heart j) eye b) seasick g) reason able a) castle
c) face g) head c) popular h) exh au sted b) caravan
d) foot h) leg d) relaxin g i) w arm c) sem i-d etach ed h ouse
e) local i) op en d) bu ng alow
6 a) ch eek h) shoulder
e) bridge
b) ch in i) elbow 6 a) resort f) statio n terraced house
f)
c) neck j) wrist b) breakfast g) stop
g) co ttag e
d) bust k) hip c) walk h) village h) tow er
e) waist 1) b o tto m d) h o lid ay i) h o stel
f) thig h m) ankle e) tick et i) cards
g) knee n) fo o t Vocabulary 16
Vocabulary 14 1 a) roll f) recipe
Vocabulary 12 b) course g) tasty
l a) beat f) going c) m eal h) co o k
1 a) crashed e) flooded b) applauded g) drew cans spoon
d) i)
b) injured f) blocked c) en ter for h) spends frozen
e)
c) collapsed g) sank d) h o ld in g i) e n jo y
d) exploded h) trapped e) perform ed I) m issed 2 a) roast f) Peel
b) m ix g) fry
2 a) prescription e) pain 2 a) spectators f) group ch o p G rate
c) h)
b) tem peratu re f) ch em ist's b) ath letes g) au d ience bake
d) i) Squeeze
c) get over g) flu c) fans h) view ers add Boil
e) i)
d) heal h) sore th ro at d) team i) cast
e) m em bers j) co m p etito rs 3 a) salt e) ch ip s
3 a) bandage e) ward b) fork f) vinegar
b) hospital f) surgeon 3 a) prize f) tick et bacon
c) g) saucer
c) p atien t g) blood b) m edal g) e x h ib itio n b u tter h) biscu its
d)
d) op eratio n h) am bu lan ce c) queue h) rod
d) tyre i) lin e 4 a) slice e) loaf
4 a) traffic jam e) w histle screen b) bar
j) f) glass
b) air p o llu tion jar
c) g) p in ch
c) pow er failure 4 a) knock d) live g) stand cup
d) h) carton/glass
d) parking ticket b) tu rn e) go h) drop
e) train strike c) jo in f) m ake 5 a) grape e) pie
f) car park b) o n io n f) plum
5 a) S b) 5 c) 7 d) 2
g) bus stop c) lettu ce g) cheese
h) rush hour e) 6 f) 3 g) 4 h) 1 d) lam b ch o p
h)
i) w ater shortage
6 1) B 2) C 3) B 4) A 6 menu takeaw ay
i) city cen tre a) d)
5) D 6) D 7) A 8) B b) bill e) b o ok
5 a) 6 b) 10 c) 2 d) 8 9) A 10) C 11) D 12) C c) dessert tip
f)
e) 3 f) 5 7 h) 1 13) B 1 4 )A 15) D
g)
i) 9 i) 4 7 a) a
b) som e
6 a) 3 b) 6 c) 5 d) 2 Vocabulary 15 c) a
e) 4 f) 8 g) 1 h) 7 d) -
1) B 2) D 3) C 4) A
e) a
7 a) 3 b) 9 c) 2 d) 6 5) C 6) D 7) A 8) B a
f)
e) 5 f) 1 g) 8 h) 4 9) B 10) C 11) D 12) A a
g)
i) 7 13) C 14) D 15) A
h) -

2 a) square e) fo o tp ath i) -

j) som e
Vocabulary 13 b) cou ntry sid e f) view
c) b each g) Parking 8 a) lettu ce h) asparagus
1 1) C 2) D 3) A 4) D d) ground h) co u n try
b) b ro cco li i) courgette
5) B 6) B 7) A 8) C
3 a) station c) cauliflow er j) celery
9) A 10) D 11) C 12) B f) part
ju n c tio n d) pepper k) cabbage
13) B 14) D 15) A b) g) place
e) leek 1) bean
c) hall h) traffic
2 a) down after d) blo ck f) o n io n m) carrot
d) in g) i) zon e
b) off for g) m u sh ro o m n) aubergine
e) e) crossing j) cen tre
c) up f) ou t
295
INTERMEDIATE LANGUAGE PRACTICE

Vocabulary 17 e) w eeds, crops a) hook e) curtains

f) village, tow n b) ta b leclo th f) broo m
1 a) pass f) wages g) fen ce, hedge c) p lan t g) d oorm at
b) jo b g) aloud h) farm , cottag e d) d ustbin h) fireplace
c) tea ch h) ap p licatio n
d) studying i) earns a) com b f) too th p aste
e) m arks j) office Vocabulary 19 b) gow n g) alarm
c) m irror h) tow el
2 a) heart e) rules 1 a) cell phone e) en gin e d) table i) pillow
b) phone f) date b) p etro l f) lig h t e) slippers j) hanger
c) practice g) tim e c) electric g) nails
d) w ork h) business d) tyre h) plum ber a) pedestrian crossing
b) lam p post
3 a) look e) pick 2 a) answering m achine c) p avem ent
b) take f) w rite b) m o b ile p h o n e d) hedge
c) get g) h an d c) sew ing m ach in e e) gate
d) keep h) stand d) vacu um clean er f) kerb
e) cam era g) street sign
4 a) education f) em ployer dishw asher h) subway
f)
b) u n em p lo y ed g) tim etab le p h o to co p ier
g)
c) carelessly h) in co m e
d) successful i) know ledge 3 a) ring e) plug h) go Vocabulary 21
e) q u alificatio n s j) em ployees b) blow f) cut i) w arm
c) w ear g) tu rn j) run 1 a) employer f) officer
5 a) 7 b) 10 c) 1 d) 9 break b) ow ner
d) g) painter
e) 6 f) 3 g) 5 h) 2 m ech an ic h) cashier
c)
i) 8 j) 4 4 a) hard disk m anager
d) i) w aiter
b) m em o ry teacher
6 1) D 2) B 3) B 4) A
e) i) postm an
c) ico n
5) C 6) D 7) B 8) B d) cursor 2 a) gardener f) carpenter
9) A 10) B 11) D 12) D p rin t ou t b) guide
e) g) electrician
13) C 14) B 15) A b u tto n c) plum ber
f) h) o p tician
g) w ebsite d) photographer i) vet
h) m od em e) d entist j) hairdresser
Vocabulary 18 i) h ig h lig h t
3 a) m em ber f) em ployee
1 a weather f) heatw ave 5 car e) frying pan partner
a) b) g) supporter
b lig h tn in g g) storm electric f) saw
b) c) flatm ate h) team -m ate
c fog h) co ol to o th b ru sh g) gun d) guest i) assistant
d show er i) soaked ladder h) cello
c) e) host
e season i) snow ov en
d)
4 a) coward f) expert
2 a swan f) m o sq u ito 6 handle e) key m iser fool
a) b) g)
b goat g) rab bit battery f) lock
b) c) o p tim ist h) genius
c crab h) giraffe socket g)
c) plug d) celebrity i) pessim ist
d b u tterfly i) spider sw itch h) wire favourite liar
d) e) j)
e lizard 1) puppy
7 a) pump f) scissors 5 a) crew f) trio
3 a branch e) th o rn
b) tin -o p en er g) th erm o m eter b) society g) group
b berry f) bark
c) law nm ow er h) b in ocu lars c) staff h) audience
c ro ot g) blo sso m
d) razor i) com pass d) queue i) team
d leaf h) trun k
e) hairdrier j) iron e) crow d 1) cast
4 a 8 b) 4 c) 7 d) 2
6 a) inhabitants f) scien tist
e 1 f) 8 g) 5 h) 3
Vocabulary 20 b) p o litician g) crim inal
c) citizen h) m usician
5 1 a 2) c 3) d 4) c
l a) needle f) string d) guitarist i) lawyer
5 a 6) b 7) b 8) c
b) glue g) scissors e) survivor j) op p on en t
9 d 10) b 11) a 12) d
c) p en k n ife h) b u tto n s
13) b 14) d 15) c
d) ru bber band i) sh oelace
6 protect, destroy e) paper clip j) ribb on
prevent, let
2 a) notice f) file
c) clea n up, p ollute
b) n o tep ad g) ruler
d) p la n t, cu t dow n
c) co rrectio n h) sh arpen er
e) recycle, th ro w (th em ) aw ay
fluid i) stam p
7 a) city, country d) d iary j) d ictio n ary
b) h ills, m o u n ta in s e) en velope
c) river, stream
d) p aths, tracks

296
Intermediate
Language Practice
Intermediate level grammar clearly explained and practised.
Consolidation and extension of vocabulary in common
topic areas.
Vocabulary skills, including word-building and dictionary
work, developed and practised.
PET exam-format exercises included.
Grammar index and wordlist.
Ideal for self-study or classroom use.

Elementary Intermediate First Certificate Advanced

Language Practice Language Practice Language Practice Language Practice
With Key 1 405 00764 8 1 405 00768 0 1 405 00766 4 1 405 00762 1

Without Key 1 405 00763 X 1 405 00767 2 1 405 00765 6 1 405 00761 3

Cambridge KET PET FCE CAE/CPE

ESOL exams

Council of A2 B1 B2 C1/C2
Europe Level

ISBN 1